TP Link Network Router TL SG3210 User Manual
TL-SG3210/TL-SG3216/TL-SG3424/TL-SG3424P  
JetStream L2 Managed Switch  
REV3.0.0  
1910011091  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Safety Information  
When product has power button, the power button is one of the way to shut off the product;  
When there is no power button, the only way to completely shut off power is to disconnect the  
product or the power adapter from the power source.  
Don’t disassemble the product, or make repairs yourself. You run the risk of electric shock and  
voiding the limited warranty. If you need service, please contact us.  
Avoid water and wet locations.  
This product can be used in the following countries:  
AT  
ES  
LT  
BG  
FI  
BY  
FR  
MT  
SK  
CA  
GB  
NL  
TR  
CZ  
GR  
NO  
UA  
DE  
HU  
PL  
DK  
IE  
EE  
IT  
LV  
SE  
PT  
RO  
RU  
US  
II  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CONTENTS  
Package Contents............................................................................................................................ 1  
Chapter 1 About This Guide........................................................................................................... 2  
1.1  
1.2  
1.3  
Intended Readers........................................................................................................... 2  
Conventions ................................................................................................................... 2  
Overview of This Guide.................................................................................................. 2  
Chapter 2 Introduction.................................................................................................................... 6  
2.1  
2.2  
2.3  
Overview of the Switch................................................................................................... 6  
Main Features ................................................................................................................ 6  
Appearance Description................................................................................................. 7  
2.3.1  
2.3.2  
Front Panel.......................................................................................................... 7  
Rear Panel .......................................................................................................... 9  
Chapter 3 Login to the Switch .......................................................................................................11  
3.1  
3.2  
Login..............................................................................................................................11  
Configuration.................................................................................................................11  
Chapter 4 System......................................................................................................................... 13  
4.1  
System Info .................................................................................................................. 13  
4.1.1  
System Summary.............................................................................................. 13  
Device Description ............................................................................................ 15  
System Time...................................................................................................... 15  
Daylight Saving Time ........................................................................................ 16  
System IP.......................................................................................................... 18  
System IPv6 ...................................................................................................... 19  
4.1.2  
4.1.3  
4.1.4  
4.1.5  
4.1.6  
4.2  
4.3  
User Management........................................................................................................ 28  
4.2.1  
4.2.2  
User Table ......................................................................................................... 28  
User Config ....................................................................................................... 28  
System Tools................................................................................................................ 30  
4.3.1  
Config Restore .................................................................................................. 30  
Config Backup................................................................................................... 30  
Firmware Upgrade............................................................................................. 31  
System Reboot.................................................................................................. 32  
System Reset.................................................................................................... 32  
4.3.2  
4.3.3  
4.3.4  
4.3.5  
4.4  
Access Security............................................................................................................ 32  
III  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
4.4.1  
4.4.2  
4.4.3  
Access Control .................................................................................................. 32  
SSL Config ........................................................................................................ 34  
SSH Config........................................................................................................ 35  
Chapter 5 Switching ..................................................................................................................... 42  
5.1 Port............................................................................................................................... 42  
5.1.1  
Port Config ........................................................................................................ 42  
Port Mirror.......................................................................................................... 43  
Port Security...................................................................................................... 46  
Port Isolation ..................................................................................................... 48  
Loopback Detection .......................................................................................... 49  
5.1.2  
5.1.3  
5.1.4  
5.1.5  
5.2  
LAG .............................................................................................................................. 50  
5.2.1  
LAG Table.......................................................................................................... 51  
Static LAG.......................................................................................................... 52  
LACP Config...................................................................................................... 53  
5.2.2  
5.2.3  
5.3  
5.4  
Traffic Monitor............................................................................................................... 55  
5.3.1  
5.3.2  
Traffic Summary ................................................................................................ 55  
Traffic Statistics ................................................................................................. 57  
MAC Address ............................................................................................................... 58  
5.4.1  
Address Table.................................................................................................... 59  
Static Address.................................................................................................... 60  
Dynamic Address .............................................................................................. 61  
Filtering Address................................................................................................ 63  
5.4.2  
5.4.3  
5.4.4  
Chapter 6 VLAN............................................................................................................................ 66  
6.1  
802.1Q VLAN............................................................................................................... 67  
6.1.1  
6.1.2  
VLAN Config...................................................................................................... 69  
Port Config ........................................................................................................ 71  
6.2  
6.3  
MAC VLAN................................................................................................................... 73  
Protocol VLAN.............................................................................................................. 74  
6.3.1  
Protocol Group Table......................................................................................... 77  
Protocol Group .................................................................................................. 77  
Protocol Template.............................................................................................. 78  
6.3.2  
6.3.3  
6.4  
6.5  
6.6  
6.7  
Application Example for 802.1Q VLAN........................................................................ 79  
Application Example for MAC VLAN............................................................................ 81  
Application Example for Protocol VLAN ...................................................................... 82  
GVRP ........................................................................................................................... 84  
IV  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 7 Spanning Tree.............................................................................................................. 88  
7.1  
STP Config................................................................................................................... 93  
7.1.1  
7.1.2  
STP Config........................................................................................................ 93  
STP Summary................................................................................................... 95  
7.2  
7.3  
Port Config ................................................................................................................... 96  
MSTP Instance............................................................................................................. 98  
7.3.1  
Region Config.................................................................................................... 98  
Instance Config ................................................................................................. 99  
Instance Port Config........................................................................................ 101  
7.3.2  
7.3.3  
7.4  
7.5  
STP Security .............................................................................................................. 103  
7.4.1  
7.4.2  
Port Protect ..................................................................................................... 103  
TC Protect ....................................................................................................... 105  
Application Example for STP Function ...................................................................... 105  
Chapter 8 Multicast......................................................................................................................110  
IGMP Snooping...........................................................................................................114  
8.1  
8.2  
8.3  
8.1.1  
Snooping Config...............................................................................................116  
VLAN Config.....................................................................................................116  
Port Config .......................................................................................................118  
IP-Range ..........................................................................................................119  
Multicast VLAN................................................................................................ 120  
Static Multicast IP............................................................................................ 123  
Packet Statistics .............................................................................................. 124  
8.1.2  
8.1.3  
8.1.4  
8.1.5  
8.1.6  
8.1.7  
MLD Snooping............................................................................................................ 126  
8.2.1  
Global Config................................................................................................... 127  
VLAN Config.................................................................................................... 129  
Filter Config..................................................................................................... 131  
Port Config ...................................................................................................... 132  
Static Multicast ................................................................................................ 132  
Querier Config................................................................................................. 133  
Packet Statistics .............................................................................................. 134  
8.2.2  
8.2.3  
8.2.4  
8.2.5  
8.2.6  
8.2.7  
Multicast Table............................................................................................................ 136  
8.3.1  
8.3.2  
IPv4 Multicast Table ........................................................................................ 136  
IPv6 Multicast Table ........................................................................................ 137  
Chapter 9 QoS............................................................................................................................ 138  
9.1  
DiffServ....................................................................................................................... 141  
V
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9.1.1  
9.1.2  
9.1.3  
9.1.4  
Port Priority...................................................................................................... 141  
DSCP Priority .................................................................................................. 142  
802.1P/CoS mapping...................................................................................... 143  
Schedule Mode ............................................................................................... 144  
9.2  
9.3  
Bandwidth Control...................................................................................................... 145  
9.2.1  
9.2.2  
Rate Limit ........................................................................................................ 145  
Storm Control .................................................................................................. 146  
Voice VLAN ................................................................................................................ 148  
9.3.1  
Global Config................................................................................................... 150  
Port Config ...................................................................................................... 150  
OUI Config....................................................................................................... 152  
9.3.2  
9.3.3  
Chapter 10 PoE ............................................................................................................................ 154  
10.1 PoE Config ................................................................................................................. 154  
10.1.1 PoE Config ...................................................................................................... 155  
10.1.2 PoE Profile ...................................................................................................... 156  
10.2 PoE Time-Range........................................................................................................ 157  
10.2.1 Time-Range Summary .................................................................................... 157  
10.2.2 PoE Time-Range Create................................................................................. 158  
10.2.3 PoE Holiday Config......................................................................................... 159  
Chapter 11 ACL............................................................................................................................ 161  
11.1 Time-Range................................................................................................................ 161  
11.1.1 Time-Range Summary .................................................................................... 161  
11.1.2 Time-Range Create......................................................................................... 162  
11.1.3 Holiday Config................................................................................................. 163  
11.2 ACL Config................................................................................................................. 163  
11.2.1 ACL Summary................................................................................................. 164  
11.2.2 ACL Create...................................................................................................... 164  
11.2.3 MAC ACL......................................................................................................... 165  
11.2.4 Standard-IP ACL.............................................................................................. 166  
11.2.5 Extend-IP ACL................................................................................................. 166  
11.3 Policy Config .............................................................................................................. 168  
11.3.1 Policy Summary .............................................................................................. 168  
11.3.2 Policy Create................................................................................................... 168  
11.3.3 Action Create................................................................................................... 169  
11.4 Policy Binding............................................................................................................. 170  
VI  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
11.4.1 Binding Table................................................................................................... 170  
11.4.2 Port Binding..................................................................................................... 171  
11.4.3 VLAN Binding.................................................................................................. 171  
11.5 Application Example for ACL ..................................................................................... 172  
Chapter 12 Network Security........................................................................................................ 175  
12.1 IP-MAC Binding.......................................................................................................... 175  
12.1.1 Binding Table................................................................................................... 175  
12.1.2 Manual Binding................................................................................................ 177  
12.1.3 ARP Scanning................................................................................................. 178  
12.1.4 DHCP Snooping.............................................................................................. 179  
12.2 ARP Inspection........................................................................................................... 185  
12.2.1 ARP Detect...................................................................................................... 189  
12.2.2 ARP Defend..................................................................................................... 190  
12.2.3 ARP Statistics.................................................................................................. 191  
12.3 DoS Defend................................................................................................................ 192  
12.4 802.1X........................................................................................................................ 194  
12.4.1 Global Config................................................................................................... 198  
12.4.2 Port Config ...................................................................................................... 200  
12.4.3 Radius Server.................................................................................................. 201  
Chapter 13 SNMP......................................................................................................................... 204  
13.1 SNMP Config.............................................................................................................. 206  
13.1.1 Global Config................................................................................................... 206  
13.1.2 SNMP View ..................................................................................................... 207  
13.1.3 SNMP Group................................................................................................... 208  
13.1.4 SNMP User...................................................................................................... 209  
13.1.5 SNMP Community............................................................................................211  
13.2 Notification.................................................................................................................. 213  
13.3 RMON......................................................................................................................... 215  
13.3.1 History Control................................................................................................. 216  
13.3.2 Event Config.................................................................................................... 216  
13.3.3 Alarm Config.................................................................................................... 217  
Chapter 14 Cluster........................................................................................................................ 220  
14.1 NDP............................................................................................................................ 221  
14.1.1 Neighbor Info................................................................................................... 221  
14.1.2 NDP Summary ................................................................................................ 222  
VII  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
14.1.3 NDP Config...................................................................................................... 224  
14.2 NTDP.......................................................................................................................... 225  
14.2.1 Device Table.................................................................................................... 225  
14.2.2 NTDP Summary .............................................................................................. 226  
14.2.3 NTDP Config ................................................................................................... 228  
14.3 Cluster........................................................................................................................ 229  
14.3.1 Cluster Summary............................................................................................. 229  
14.3.2 Cluster Config.................................................................................................. 230  
14.4 Application Example for Cluster Function.................................................................. 232  
Chapter 15 LLDP.......................................................................................................................... 235  
15.1 Basic Config ............................................................................................................... 239  
15.1.1 Global Config................................................................................................... 239  
15.1.2 Port Config ...................................................................................................... 240  
15.2 Device Info ................................................................................................................. 241  
15.2.1 Local Info......................................................................................................... 241  
15.2.2 Neighbor Info................................................................................................... 242  
15.3 Device Statistics......................................................................................................... 242  
15.4 LLDP-MED ................................................................................................................. 244  
15.4.1 Global Config................................................................................................... 245  
15.4.2 Port Config ...................................................................................................... 246  
15.4.3 Local Info......................................................................................................... 247  
15.4.4 Neighbor Info................................................................................................... 248  
Chapter 16 Maintenance .............................................................................................................. 250  
16.1 System Monitor .......................................................................................................... 250  
16.1.1 CPU Monitor.................................................................................................... 250  
16.1.2 Memory Monitor .............................................................................................. 251  
16.2 Log.............................................................................................................................. 251  
16.2.1 Log Table......................................................................................................... 252  
16.2.2 Local Log......................................................................................................... 254  
16.2.3 Remote Log..................................................................................................... 254  
16.2.4 Backup Log ..................................................................................................... 255  
16.3 Device Diagnostics..................................................................................................... 256  
16.3.1 Cable Test........................................................................................................ 256  
16.4 Network Diagnostics .................................................................................................. 257  
16.4.1 Ping ................................................................................................................. 257  
VIII  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
16.4.2 Tracert ............................................................................................................. 258  
Appendix A: Specifications........................................................................................................... 259  
Appendix B: Configuring the PCs................................................................................................. 261  
Appendix C: Load Software Using FTP ....................................................................................... 266  
Appendix D: 802.1X Client Software............................................................................................ 271  
Appendix E: Glossary................................................................................................................... 279  
IX  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Package Contents  
The following items should be found in your box:  
One JetStream L2 Managed Switch  
One power cord  
One console cable  
Two mounting brackets and other fittings  
Installation Guide  
Resource CD for TL-SG3210/TL-SG3216/TL-SG3424/TL-SG3424P switch, including:  
•
•
•
•
•
This User Guide  
The CLI Reference Guide  
SNMP Mibs  
802.1X Client Software  
Other Helpful Information  
Note:  
Make sure that the package contains the above items. If any of the listed items are damaged or  
missing, please contact your distributor.  
1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter 1 About This Guide  
This User Guide contains information for setup and management of TL-SG3210/TL-SG3216/  
TL-SG3424/TL-SG3424P JetStream L2 Managed Switch. Please read this guide carefully before  
operation.  
1.1 Intended Readers  
This Guide is intended for network managers familiar with IT concepts and network terminologies.  
1.2 Conventions  
In this Guide the following conventions are used:  
The switch or device mentioned in this Guide stands for TL-SG3210/TL-SG3216/TL-SG3424/  
TL-SG3424P JetStream L2 Managed Switch without any explanation.  
Tips:  
The TL-SG3210/TL-SG3216/TL-SG3424/TL-SG3424P switchs are sharing this User Guide. They  
just differ in the number of LED indicators and ports. For simplicity, we will take TL-SG3424 for  
example throughout this Guide. However, differences with significance will be presented with  
figures or notes as to attract your attention.  
Menu Name→Submenu Name→Tab page indicates the menu structure. System→System  
Info→System Summary means the System Summary page under the System Info menu  
option that is located under the System menu.  
Bold font indicates a button, a toolbar icon, menu or menu item.  
Symbols in this Guide：  
Symbol  
Description  
Ignoring this type of note might result in a malfunction or damage to the  
device.  
Note:  
Tips:  
This format indicates important information that helps you make better use  
of your device.  
1.3 Overview of This Guide  
Chapter  
Introduction  
Chapter 1 About This Guide  
Chapter 2 Introduction  
Introduces the guide structure and conventions.  
Introduces the features, application and appearance of the switch.  
2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Chapter  
Introduction  
Chapter 3 Login to the Switch  
Chapter 4 System  
Introduces how to log on to the Web management page.  
This module is used to configure system properties of the switch.  
Here mainly introduces:  
System Info: Configure the description, system time and network  
parameters of the switch.  
User Management: Configure the user name and password for  
users to log on to the Web management page with a certain  
access level.  
System Tools: Manage the configuration file of the switch.  
Access Security: Provide different security measures for the  
login to enhance the configuration management security.  
Chapter 5 Switching  
This module is used to configure basic functions of the switch. Here  
mainly introduces:  
Port: Configure the basic features for the port.  
LAG: Configure Link Aggregation Group. LAG is to combine a  
number of ports together to make a single high-bandwidth data  
path.  
Traffic Monitor: Monitor the traffic of each port  
MAC Address: Configure the address table of the switch.  
Chapter 6 VLAN  
This module is used to configure VLANs to control broadcast in  
LANs. Here mainly introduces:  
802.1Q VLAN: Configure port-based VLAN.  
MAC VLAN: Configure MAC-based VLAN without changing the  
802.1Q VLAN configuration.  
Protocol VLAN: Create VLANs in application layer to make some  
special data transmitted in the specified VLAN.  
GVRP: GVRP allows the switch to automatically add or remove  
the VLANs via the dynamic VLAN registration information and  
propagate the local VLAN registration information to other  
switches, without having to individually configure each VLAN.  
Chapter 7 Spanning Tree  
This module is used to configure spanning tree function of the  
switch. Here mainly introduces:  
STP Config: Configure and view the global settings of spanning  
tree function.  
Port Config: Configure CIST parameters of ports.  
MSTP Instance: Configure MSTP instances.  
STP Security: Configure protection function to prevent devices  
from any malicious attack against STP features.  
Chapter 8 Multicast  
This module is used to configure multicast function of the switch.  
Here mainly introduces:  
IGMP Snooping: Configure global parameters of IGMP Snooping  
function, port properties, VLAN and multicast VLAN.  
MLD Snooping: Configure global parameters of MLD Snooping  
function, port properties, VLAN and multicast VLAN.  
Multicast Table: View the information of IPv4 and IPv6 multicast  
groups already on the switch.  
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter  
Introduction  
Chapter 9 QoS  
This module is used to configure QoS function to provide different  
quality of service for various network applications and  
requirements. Here mainly introduces:  
DiffServ: Configure priorities, port priority, 802.1P priority and  
DSCP priority.  
Bandwidth Control: Configure rate limit feature to control the  
traffic rate on each port; configure storm control feature to filter  
broadcast, multicast and UL frame in the network.  
Voice VLAN: Configure voice VLAN to transmit voice data  
stream within the specified VLAN so as to ensure the  
transmission priority of voice data stream and voice quality.  
Chapter 10 PoE  
Chapter 11 ACL  
This module is used to configure the PoE function for the switch to  
supply power for PD devices. Here mainly introduces:  
PoE Config: Configure PoE function globally.  
PoE Time-Range: Configure the effective time for PoE port to  
supply power.  
This module is used to configure match rules and process policies  
of packets to filter packets in order to control the access of the  
illegal users to the network. Here mainly introduces:  
Time-Range: Configure the effective time for ACL rules.  
ACL Config: ACL rules.  
Policy Config: Configure operation policies.  
Policy Binding: Bind the policy to a port/VLAN to take its effect on  
a specific port/VLAN.  
Chapter 12 Network Security  
This module is used to configure the multiple protection measures  
for the network security. Here mainly introduces:  
IP-MAC Binding: Bind the IP address, MAC address, VLAN ID  
and the connected Port number of the Host together.  
ARP Inspection: Configure ARP inspection feature to prevent the  
network from ARP attacks.  
DoS Defend: Configure DoS defend feature to prevent DoS  
attack.  
802.1X: Configure common access control mechanism for LAN  
ports to solve mainly authentication and security problems.  
Chapter 13 SNMP  
This module is used to configure SNMP function to provide a  
management frame to monitor and maintain the network devices.  
Here mainly introduces:  
SNMP Config: Configure global settings of SNMP function.  
Notification: Configure notification function for the management  
station to monitor and process the events.  
RMON: Configure RMON function to monitor network more  
efficiently.  
4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter  
Introduction  
Chapter 14 Cluster  
This module is used to configure cluster function to central manage  
the scattered devices in the network. Here mainly introduces:  
NDP: Configure NDP function to get the information of the directly  
connected neighbor devices.  
NTDP: Configure NTDP function for the commander switch to  
collect NDP information.  
Cluster: Configure cluster function to establish and maintain  
cluster.  
Chapter 15 LLDP  
This module is used to configure LLDP function to provide  
information for SNMP applications to simplify troubleshooting. Here  
mainly introduces:  
Basic Config: Configure the LLDP parameters of the device.  
Device Info: View the LLDP information of the local device and its  
neighbors.  
Device Statistics: View the LLDP statistics of the local device.  
LLDP-MED: Configure LLDP-MED parameters of the device.  
Chapter 16 Maintenance  
This module is used to assemble the commonly used system tools  
to manage the switch. Here mainly introduces:  
System Monitor: Monitor the memory and CPU of the switch.  
Log: View configuration parameters on the switch.  
Device Diagnostics: Test the connection status of the cable  
connected to the switch, test if the port of the switch and the  
connected device are available.  
Network Diagnostics: Test if the destination is reachable and the  
account of router hops from the switch to the destination.  
Appendix A Specifications  
Lists the hardware specifications of the switch.  
Introduces how to configure the PCs.  
Appendix B Configure the PCs  
Appendix C Load Software  
Using FTP  
Introduces how to load firmware of the switch via FTP function.  
Appendix D 802.1X Client  
Software  
Introduces how to use 802.1X Client Software provided for  
authentication.  
Appendix E Glossary  
Lists the glossary used in this manual.  
Return to CONTENTS  
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 2 Introduction  
Thanks for choosing the TL-SG3210/TL-SG3216/TL-SG3424/TL-SG3424P JetStream L2  
Managed Switch!  
2.1 Overview of the Switch  
Designed for workgroups and departments, TL-SG3210/TL-SG3216/TL-SG3424/TL-SG3424P  
from TP-LINK provides wire-speed performance and full set of layer 2 management features. It  
provides a variety of service features and multiple powerful functions with high security.  
The EIA-standardized framework and smart configuration capacity can provide flexible solutions  
for a variable scale of networks. ACL, 802.1x and Dynamic ARP Inspection provide robust security  
strategy. QoS and IGMP/MLD snooping optimize voice and video application. Link aggregation  
(LACP) increases aggregated bandwidth, optimizing the transport of business critical data.  
SNMP/SNMPv6, RMON, WEB/CLI/Telnet Log-in bring abundant management policies.  
TL-SG3210/TL-SG3216/TL-SG3424/TL-SG3424P switch integrates multiple functions with  
excellent performance, and is friendly to manage, which can fully meet the need of the users  
demanding higher networking performance.  
2.2 Main Features  
•
Resiliency and Availability  
+ Link aggregation (LACP) increases aggregated bandwidth, optimizing the transport of  
business critical data.  
+ IEEE 802.1s Multiple Spanning Tree provides high link availability in multiple VLAN  
environments.  
+ IGMP snooping and MLD snooping automatically prevents flooding of IP multicast traffic.  
+ Root Guard protects root bridge from malicious attack or configuration mistakes  
Layer 2 Switching  
•
+ GVRP (GARP VLAN Registration Protocol) allows automatic learning and dynamic  
assignment of VLANs.  
+ Supports up to 4K VLANs simultaneously (out of 4K VLAN IDs).  
Quality of Service  
•
•
+ Supports L2/L3 granular CoS with 4 priority queues per port.  
+ Rate limiting confines the traffic flow accurately according to the preset value.  
Security  
+ Supports multiple industry standard user authentication methods such as 802.1x, RADIUS.  
+ Dynamic ARP Inspection blocks ARP packets from unauthorized hosts, preventing  
man-in-the-middle attacks.  
+ L2/L3/L4 Access Control Lists restrict untrusted access to the protected resource.  
+ Provides SSHv1/v2, SSL 2.0/3.0 and TLS v1 for access encryption for both IPv4 and IPv6.  
Manageability  
•
+ IP Clustering provides high scalability and easy Single-IP-Management.  
6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
+ Supports Telnet, CLI, SNMP v1/v2c/v3, RMON and web access.  
+ Port Mirroring enables monitoring selected ingress/egress traffic.  
+ Simple Network and Management Protocol (SNMP) can be configured over IPv6 transport.  
+ IPv6 supports stateless autoconfiguration to manage link, subnet, and site addressing  
changes.  
+ DHCPv6 enables switch to receive configuration parameters, such as IPv6 network  
addresses from DHCPv6 servers.  
2.3 Appearance Description  
2.3.1 Front Panel  
The front panel of TL-SG3210 is shown as the following figure.  
Figure 2-1 Front Panel of TL-SG3210  
The front panel of TL-SG3216 is shown as the following figure.  
Figure 2-2 Front Panel of TL-SG3216  
The front panel of TL-SG3424 is shown as the following figure.  
Figure 2-3 Front Panel of TL-SG3424  
The front panel of TL-SG3424P is shown as the following figure.  
Figure 2-4 Front Panel of TL-SG3424P  
The following parts are located on the front panel of the switches:  
10/100/1000Mbps Ports: Designed to connect to the device with a bandwidth of 10Mbps,  
100Mbps or 1000Mbps. Each has a corresponding 1000Mbps LED. Each port of  
TL-SG3216/TL-SG3424 also features a Link/Act LED.  
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
SFP Ports: Designed to install the SFP module. TL-SG3216/TL-SG3424/TL-SG3424P switch  
features some SFP transceiver slots that are shared with the associated RJ45 ports. The  
associated two ports are referred to as “Combo” ports, which means they cannot be used  
simultaneously, otherwise only SFP ports work. TL-SG3210 features two individual SFP ports.  
Note:  
For TL-SG3216/TL-SG3424/TL-SG3424P switch, when using the SFP port with a 100M module or  
a gigabit module, you need to configure its corresponding Speed and Duplex mode on  
Switching→Port→Port Config page. For 100M module, please select 100MFD while select  
1000MFD for gigabit module. By default, the Speed and Duplex mode of SFP port is 1000MFD.  
For TL-SG3210’s SFP port, it only supports 1000MFD mode.  
Console Port: Designed to connect with the serial port of a computer or terminal for monitoring  
and configuring the switch.  
LEDs  
For TL-SG3210/TL-SG3216/TL-SG3424:  
Name  
Status  
On  
Indication  
Power is on.  
Power  
(PWR)  
Flashing  
Off  
Power supply is abnormal.  
Power is off or power supply is abnormal.  
The switch is working abnormally.  
The switch is working normally.  
The switch is working abnormally.  
On  
System  
(SYS)  
Flashing  
Off  
A 1000Mbps device is connected to the corresponding  
port.  
On  
Off  
On  
1000Mbps  
A 10/100Mbps device or no device is connected to the  
corresponding port.  
A device is connected to the corresponding port, but not  
activity.  
Link/Act  
Flashing  
Off  
Data is being transmitted or received.  
No device is connected to the corresponding port.  
Note:  
There is no Link/Act LED on TL-SG3210.  
For TL-SG3424P:  
TL-SG3424P has a LED mode switch button which is for switching the LED status indication.  
When the Speed LED is on, the port LED is indicating the data transmission rate. When the PoE  
LED is on, the port LED is indicating the power supply status. By default the Speed LED is on.  
Pressing the mode switch button, the Speed LED will turn off and the PoE LED will light up. Then  
the PoE LED will turn off after being on for 60 seconds and the Speed LED will light up again.  
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
When the Speed LED is on, the port LED is indicating the data transmission rate.  
Name  
Status  
On  
Indication  
The switch is powered on.  
Power  
Off  
The switch is powered off or power supply is abnormal.  
Power supply is abnormal.  
The switch works properly.  
The switch works improperly.  
Flashing  
Flashing  
On/Off  
System  
A 1000Mbps device is connected to the corresponding  
port, but no activity.  
On  
Green  
Flashing Data is being transmitted or received.  
10/100/1000Mbps  
A
10/100Mbps device is connected to the  
On  
corresponding port, but no activity.  
Yellow  
Off  
Flashing Data is being transmitted or received.  
No device is connected to the corresponding port.  
When the PoE LED is on, the port LED is indicating the power supply status.  
Name  
Status  
On  
Indication  
The switch is powered on.  
Power  
Off  
The switch is powered off or power supply is abnormal.  
Power supply is abnormal.  
Flashing  
Flashing  
On/Off  
On  
The switch works properly.  
The switch works improperly.  
The remaining PoE power≤7W.  
System  
Flashing  
The remaining PoE power keeps ≤7W after this LED is  
on for 2 minutes.  
PoE Max  
Off  
The remaining PoE power≥7W.  
On  
Flashing  
On  
The port is supplying power normally.  
Green  
The supply power exceeds the corresponding port’s  
maximum power.  
10/100/1000Mbps  
Overload or short circuit is detected.  
Yellow  
Off  
Flashing Power-on self-test has failed.  
No PoE power supply is provided on the port.  
2.3.2 Rear Panel  
The rear panel of the switch features a power socket and a Grounding Terminal (marked with ).  
Figure 2-5 Rear Panel  
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Grounding Terminal: The switch already comes with Lightning Protection Mechanism. You  
can also ground the switch through the PE (Protecting Earth) cable of AC cord or with Ground  
Cable.  
AC Power Socket: Connect the female connector of the power cord here, and the male  
connector to the AC power outlet. Make sure the voltage of the power supply meets the  
requirement of the input voltage (100-240V~ 50/60Hz 0.6A for TL-SG3210, 100-240V~ 50/60Hz 0.4A  
TL-SG3216, 100-240V~ 50/60Hz 0.5ATL-SG3424 and 100-240V~ 50/60Hz 5A for TL-SG3424P).  
Return to CONTENTS  
10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 3 Login to the Switch  
3.1 Login  
To access the configuration utility, open a web-browser and type in the default address  
http://192.168.0.1 in the address field of the browser, then press the Enter key.  
Figure 3-1 Web-browser  
Tips:  
To log in to the switch, the IP address of your PC should be set in the same subnet addresses of  
the switch. The IP address is 192.168.0.x ("x" is any number from 2 to 254), Subnet Mask is  
255.255.255.0. For the detailed instructions as to how to do this, please refer to Appendix B.  
3.2 Configuration  
After a successful login, the main page will appear as Figure 3-6, and you can configure the  
function by clicking the setup menu on the left side of the screen.  
Figure 3-6 Main Setup-Menu  
11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Note:  
Clicking Apply can only make the new configurations effective before the switch is rebooted. If  
you want to keep the configurations effective even the switch is rebooted, please click Save  
Config. You are suggested to click Save Config before cutting off the power or rebooting the  
switch to avoid losing the new configurations.  
Return to CONTENTS  
12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 4 System  
The System module is mainly for system configuration of the switch, including four submenus:  
System Info, User Management, System Tools and Access Security.  
4.1 System Info  
The System Info, mainly for basic properties configuration, can be implemented on System  
Summary, Device Description, System Time, Daylight Saving Time, System IP and System  
IPv6 pages.  
4.1.1 System Summary  
On this page you can view the port connection status and the system information.  
The port status diagram shows the working status of 24 10/100/1000Mbps RJ45 ports and 4 SFP  
ports of the switch. Ports 1-20 and ports 21T-24T are 10/100/1000Mbps ports and ports 21T-24T  
are Combo ports with SFP ports labeled as 21F-24F.  
Choose the menu System →System Info →System Summary to load the following page.  
Figure 4-1 System Summary  
The following entries are displayed on this screen:  
Port Status  
Indicates the 1000Mbps port is not connected to a device.  
Indicates the 1000Mbps port is at the speed of 1000Mbps.  
Indicates the 1000Mbps port is at the speed of 10Mbps or 100Mbps.  
13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Indicates the SFP port is not connected to a device.  
Indicates the SFP port is at the speed of 1000Mbps.  
Indicates the SFP port is at the speed of 100Mbps.  
When the cursor moves on the port, the detailed information of the port will be displayed.  
Figure 4-2 Port Information  
Port Info  
Port:  
Displays the port number of the switch.  
Displays the type of the port.  
Type:  
Speed:  
Status:  
Displays the maximum transmission rate of the port.  
Displays the connection status of the port.  
Click a port to display the bandwidth utilization on this port. The actual rate divided by theoretical  
maximum rate is the bandwidth utilization. The following figure displays the bandwidth utilization  
monitored every four seconds. Monitoring the bandwidth utilization on each port facilitates you to  
monitor the network traffic and analyze the network abnormities.  
Figure 4-3 Bandwidth Utilization  
14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Bandwidth Utilization  
Rx:  
Select Rx to display the bandwidth utilization of receiving packets  
on this port.  
Tx:  
Select Tx to display the bandwidth utilization of sending packets  
on this port.  
4.1.2 Device Description  
On this page you can configure the description of the switch, including device name, device location  
and system contact.  
Choose the menu System →System Info →Device Description to load the following page.  
Figure 4-4 Device Description  
The following entries are displayed on this screen:  
Device Description  
Device Name:  
Enter the name of the switch.  
Enter the location of the switch.  
Enter your contact information.  
Device Location:  
System Contact:  
4.1.3 System Time  
System Time is the time displayed while the switch is running. On this page you can configure the  
system time and the settings here will be used for other time-based functions like ACL.  
You can manually set the system time, get time from NTP server automatically if it has connected to  
an NTP server or synchronize with PC’s clock as the system time.  
15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Choose the menu System →System Info →System Time to load the following page.  
Figure 4-5 System Time  
The following entries are displayed on this screen:  
Time Info  
Current System  
Date:  
Displays the current date and time of the switch.  
Displays the current time Source of the switch.  
Current Time  
Source:  
Time Config  
Manual:  
When this option is selected, you can set the date and time  
manually.  
Get time from NTP  
Server:  
When this option is selected, you can configure the time zone and  
the IP Address for the NTP server. The switch will get time from  
NTP server automatically if it has connected to an NTP server.  
Time Zone: Select your local time.  
Primary/Secondary NTP Server: Enter the IP Address for the  
NTP server.  
Update Rate: Specify the rate fetching time from NTP server.  
Synchronize  
PC’S Clock:  
with  
When this option is selected, the administrator PC’s clock is  
utilized.  
Note:  
1. The system time will be restored to the default when the switch is restarted and you need to  
reconfigure the system time of the switch.  
2. When Get time from NTP Server is selected and no time server is configured, the switch will  
get time from the time server of the Internet if it has connected to the Internet.  
4.1.4 Daylight Saving Time  
Here you can configure the Daylight Saving Time of the switch.  
16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Choose the menu System →System Info →Daylight Saving Time to load the following page.  
Figure 4-6 Daylight Saving Time  
The following entries are displayed on this screen:  
DST Config  
DST Status:  
Enable or disable the DST.  
Predefined Mode:  
Select a predefined DST configuration:  
USA: Second Sunday in March, 02:00 ~ First Sunday in  
November, 02:00.  
Australia: First Sunday in October, 02:00 ~ First Sunday in  
April, 03:00.  
Europe: Last Sunday in March, 01:00 ~ Last Sunday in  
October, 01:00.  
New Zealand: Last Sunday in September, 02:00 ~ First  
Sunday in April, 03:00.  
Recurring Mode:  
Specify the DST configuration in recurring mode. This  
configuration is recurring in use.  
Offset: Specify the time adding in minutes when Daylight  
Saving Time comes.  
Start/End Time: Select starting time and ending time of  
Daylight Saving Time.  
Date Mode:  
Specify the DST configuration in Date mode. This configuration is  
one-off in use.  
Offset: Specify the time adding in minutes when Daylight  
Saving Time comes.  
Start/End Time: Select starting time and ending time of  
Daylight Saving Time.  
17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Note:  
1. When the DST is disabled, the predefined mode, recurring mode and date mode cannot be  
configured.  
2. When the DST is enabled, the default daylight saving time is of Europe in predefined mode.  
4.1.5 System IP  
Each device in the network possesses a unique IP Address. You can log on to the Web  
management page to operate the switch using this IP Address. The switch supports three modes  
to obtain an IP address: Static IP, DHCP and BOOTP. The IP address obtained using a new mode  
will replace the original IP address. On this page you can configure the system IP of the switch.  
Choose the menu System →System Info →System IP to load the following page.  
Figure 4-7 System IP  
The following entries are displayed on this screen:  
IP Config  
MAC Address:  
Displays MAC Address of the switch.  
IP Address Mode:  
Select the mode to obtain IP Address for the switch.  
Static IP: When this option is selected, you should enter IP  
Address, Subnet Mask and Default Gateway manually.  
DHCP: When this option is selected, the switch will obtain  
network parameters from the DHCP Server.  
BOOTP: When this option is selected, the switch will obtain  
network parameters from the BOOTP Server.  
IP Address:  
Enter the system IP of the switch. The default system IP is  
192.168.0.1 and you can change it appropriate to your needs.  
Subnet Mask:  
Enter the subnet mask of the switch.  
Enter the default gateway of the switch.  
Default Gateway:  
Note:  
1. Changing the IP address to a different IP segment will interrupt the network communication,  
so please keep the new IP address in the same IP segment with the local network.  
2. The switch only possesses an IP address. The IP address configured will replace the original  
IP address.  
18  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
3. If the switch gets the IP address from DHCP server, you can see the configuration of the  
switch in the DHCP server; if DHCP option is selected but no DHCP server exists in the  
network, a few minutes later, the switch will restore the setting to the default.  
4. If DHCP or BOOTP option is selected, the switch will get network parameters dynamically  
from the Internet, which means that its IP address, subnet mask and default gateway cannot  
be configured.  
5. By default, the default IP address is 192.168.0.1.  
4.1.6 System IPv6  
IPv6 (Internet Protocol version 6), also called IPng (IP next generation), was developed by the  
IETF (Internet Engineering Task Force) as the successor to IPv4 (Internet Protocol version 4).  
Compared with IPv4, IPv6 increases the IP address size from 32 bits to 128 bits; this solves the  
IPv4 address exhaustion problem.  
IPv6 features  
IPv6 has the following features:  
1. Adequate address space: The source and destination IPv6 addresses are both 128 bits (16  
bytes) long. IPv6 can provide 3.4 x 1038 addresses to completely meet the requirements of  
hierarchical address division as well as allocation of public and private addresses.  
2. Header format simplification: IPv6 cuts down some IPv4 header fields or move them to IPv6  
extension headers to reduce the load of basic IPv6 headers, thus making IPv6 packet handling  
simple and improving the forwarding efficiency. Although the IPv6 address size is four times  
that of IPv4 addresses, the size of basic IPv6 headers is 40 bytes and is only twice that of IPv4  
headers (excluding the Options field).  
3. Flexible extension headers: IPv6 cancels the Options field in IPv4 packets but introduces  
multiple extension headers. In this way, IPv6 enhances the flexibility greatly to provide  
scalability for IP while improving the handling efficiency. The Options field in IPv4 packets  
contains 40 bytes at most, while the size of IPv6 extension headers is restricted by that of IPv6  
packets.  
4. Built-in security: IPv6 uses IPSec as its standard extension header to provide end-to-end  
security. This feature provides a standard for network security solutions and improves the  
interoperability between different IPv6 applications.  
5. Automatic address configuration: To simplify the host configuration, IPv6 supports stateful  
and stateless address configuration.  
Stateful address configuration means that a host acquires an IPv6 address and related  
information from a server (for example, DHCP server).  
Stateless address configuration means that a host automatically configures an IPv6  
address and related information on basis of its own link-layer address and the prefix  
information advertised by a router.  
In addition, a host can generate a link-local address on basis of its own link-layer address and  
the default prefix (FE80::/64) to communicate with other hosts on the link.  
19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
6. Enhanced neighbor discovery mechanism: The IPv6 neighbor discovery protocol is a  
group of Internet control message protocol version 6 (ICMPv6) messages that manages the  
information exchange between neighbor nodes on the same link. The group of ICMPv6  
messages takes the place of Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) message, Internet Control  
Message Protocol version 4 (ICMPv4) router discovery message, and ICMPv4 redirection  
message to provide a series of other functions.  
Introduction to IPv6 address  
1. IPv6 address format  
An IPv6 address is represented as a series of 16-bit hexadecimals, separated by colons (:).  
An IPv6 address is divided into eight groups, and the 16 bits of each group are represented by  
four hexadecimal numbers which are separated by colons, for example,  
2001:0d02:0000:0000:0014: 0000:0000:0095. The hexadecimal letters in IPv6 addresses are  
not case-sensitive.  
To simplify the representation of IPv6 addresses, zeros in IPv6 addresses can be handled as  
follows:  
Leading zeros in each group can be removed. For example, the above-mentioned address  
can be represented in shorter format as 2001:d02:0:0:14:0:0:95.  
Two colons (::) may be used to compress successive hexadecimal fields of zeros at the  
beginning, middle, or end of an IPv6 address. For example, the above-mentioned address  
can be represented in the shortest format as 2001:d02::14:0:0:95.  
Note:  
Two colons (::) can be used only once in an IPv6 address, usually to represent the longest  
successive hexadecimal fields of zeros. If two colons are used more than once, the device is  
unable to determine how many zeros double-colons represent when converting them to zeros to  
restore a 128-bit IPv6 address.  
An IPv6 address consists of two parts: address prefix and interface ID. The address prefix and  
the interface ID are respectively equivalent to the network ID and the host ID in an IPv4  
address.  
An IPv6 address prefix is represented in "IPv6 address/prefix length" format, where "IPv6  
address" is an IPv6 address in any of the above-mentioned formats and "prefix length" is a  
decimal number indicating how many leftmost bits from the preceding IPv6 address are used  
as the address prefix.  
2. IPv6 address classification  
IPv6 addresses fall into three types: unicast address, multicast address, and anycast address.  
Unicast address: An identifier for a single interface, on a single node. A packet that is sent  
to a unicast address is delivered to the interface identified by that address.  
20  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Multicast address: An identifier for a set of interfaces (typically belonging to different nodes),  
similar to an IPv4 multicast address. A packet sent to a multicast address is delivered to all  
interfaces identified by that address. There are no broadcast addresses in IPv6. Their  
function is superseded by multicast addresses.  
Anycast address: An identifier for a set of interfaces (typically belonging to different nodes).  
A packet sent to an anycast address is delivered to one of the interfaces identified by that  
address (the nearest one, according to the routing protocols’ measure of distance).  
The type of an IPv6 address is designated by the first several bits called format prefix. The  
following table lists the mappings between address types and format prefixes.  
Type  
Format Prefix (binary)  
00…0 (128 bits)  
00…1 (128 bits)  
1111111010  
IPv6 Prefix ID  
::/128  
Unassigned address  
Loopback address  
Link-local address  
Site-local address  
::1/128  
FE80::/10  
Unicast  
address  
1111111011  
FEC0::/10  
Global unicast address  
(currently assigned)  
001  
2xxx::/4 or 3xxx::/4  
Reserved type  
Other formats  
11111111  
(to be assigned in future)  
Multicast address  
Anycast address  
FF00::/8  
Anycast addresses are taken from unicast  
address space and are not syntactically  
distinguishable from unicast addresses.  
Table 4-1 Mappings between address types and format prefixes  
3. IPv6 Unicast Address：  
IPv6 unicast address is an identifier for a single interface. It consists of a subnet prefix and an  
interface ID.  
Subnet Prefix: This section is allocated by the IANA (The Internet Assigned Numbers  
Authority), the ISP (Internet Service Provider) or the organizations.  
Interface ID: An interface ID is used to identify interfaces on a link. The interface ID must be  
unique to the link.  
There are several ways to form interface IDs. The IPv6 addresses with format prefixes 001  
through 111, except for multicast addresses (1111 1111), are all required to have 64-bit  
interface IDs in EUI-64 format.  
21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
For all IEEE 802 interface types (for example, Ethernet and FDDI interfaces), Interface IDs in  
the modified EUI-64 format are constructed in the following way:  
The first three octets (24 bits) are taken from the Organizationally Unique Identifier (OUI) of the  
48-bit link-layer address (the MAC address) of the interface, the fourth and fifth octets (16 bits)  
are a fixed hexadecimal value of FFFE, and the last three octets (24 bits) are taken from the  
last three octets of the MAC address. The construction of the interface ID is completed by  
setting the universal/local (U/L) bit--the seventh bit of the first octet--to a value of 0 or 1. A  
value of 0 indicates a locally administered identifier; a value of 1 indicates a globally unique  
IPv6 interface identifier.  
Take MAC address 0012:0B0A:2D51 as an example. Insert FFFE to the middle of the address  
to get 0012:0BFF:FE0A:2D51. Then set the U/L bit to 1 to obtain an interface ID in EUI-64  
format as 0212:0BFF:FE0A:2D51.  
IPv6 unicast address can be classified into several types, as shown in Table 4-1. The two  
most common types are introduced below:  
Global unicast address  
A Global unicast address is an IPv6 unicast address that is globally unique and is routable on  
the global Internet.  
Global unicast addresses are defined by a global routing prefix, a subnet ID, and an interface  
ID. The IPv6 global unicast address starts with binary value 001 (2000::/3). The global routing  
prefix is a value assigned to a site (a cluster of subnets/links) by IANA. The subnet ID is an  
identifier of a subnet within the site.  
The figure below shows the structure of a global unicast address.  
Figure 4-8 Global Unicast Address Format  
Link-local address  
A link-local address is an IPv6 unicast address that can be automatically configured on any  
interface using the link-local prefix FE80::/10 (1111 1110 10) and the interface identifier in the  
modified EUI-64 format. Link-local addresses are used in the neighbor discovery protocol and  
the stateless autoconfiguration process. Nodes on a local link can use link-local addresses to  
communicate. The figure below shows the structure of a link-local address.  
22  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Figure 4-9 Link-local Address Format  
IPv6 devices must not forward packets that have link-local source or destination addresses to  
other links.  
Note:  
You can configure multiple IPv6 addresses per interface, but only one link-local address.  
IPv6 Neighbor Discovery  
The IPv6 neighbor discovery process uses ICMP messages and solicited-node multicast  
addresses to determine the link-layer address of a neighbor on the same network (local link),  
verify the reachability of a neighbor, and track neighboring devices.  
1. IPv6 Neighbor Solicitation Message and Neighbor Advertisement Message  
A value of 135 in the Type field of the ICMP packet header identifies a neighbor solicitation  
(NS) message. Neighbor solicitation messages are sent on the local link when a node wants  
to determine the link-layer address of another node on the same local link.  
After receiving the neighbor solicitation message, the destination node replies by sending a  
neighbor advertisement (NA) message, which has a value of 136 in the Type field of the ICMP  
packet header, on the local link. After the source node receives the neighbor advertisement,  
the source node and destination node can communicate.  
Neighbor advertisement messages are also sent when there is a change in the link-layer  
address of a node on a local link.  
Address Resolution  
The address resolution procedure is as follows:  
Node A multicasts an NS message. The source address of the NS message is the IPv6  
address of an interface of node A and the destination address is the solicited-node multicast  
address of node B. The NS message contains the link-layer address of node A.  
After receiving the NS message, node B judges whether the destination address of the  
packet corresponds to the solicited-node multicast address. If yes, node B can learn the  
link-layer address of node A, and unicasts an NA message containing its link-layer address.  
Node A acquires the link-layer address of node B from the NA message.  
23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Neighbor Reachability Detection  
After node A acquires the link-layer address of its neighbor node B, node A can verify whether  
node B is reachable according to NS and NA messages.  
Node A sends an NS message whose destination address is the IPv6 address of node B.  
If node A receives an NA message from node B, node A considers that node B is reachable.  
Otherwise, node B is unreachable.  
Duplicate Address Detection  
Neighbor solicitation messages are used in the stateless autoconfiguration process to verify  
the uniqueness of unicast IPv6 addresses before the addresses are assigned to an interface.  
After node A acquires an IPv6 address, it will perform duplicate address detection (DAD) to  
determine whether the address is being used by other nodes (similar to the gratuitous ARP  
function of IPv4). DAD is accomplished through NS and NA messages. The DAD procedure is  
as follows:  
Node A sends an NS message whose source address is the unassigned address :: and  
destination address is the corresponding solicited-node multicast address of the IPv6  
address to be detected. The NS message contains the IPv6 address.  
If node B uses this IPv6 address, node B returns an NA message. The NA message  
contains the IPv6 address of node B.  
Node A learns that the IPv6 address is being used by node B after receiving the NA  
message from node B. Otherwise, node B is not using the IPv6 address and node A can  
use it.  
2. IPv6 Router Advertisement Message  
Router advertisement (RA) messages, which have a value of 134 in the Type field of the ICMP  
packet header, are periodically sent out each configured interface of an IPv6 router.  
RA messages typically include the following information:  
One or more onlink IPv6 prefixes that nodes on the local link can use to automatically  
configure their IPv6 addresses.  
Lifetime information for each prefix included in the advertisement.  
Sets of flags that indicate the type of autoconfiguration (stateless or stateful) that can be  
completed.  
Default router information (whether the device sending the advertisement should be used  
as a default router and, if so, the amount of time, in seconds, the device should be used as  
a default router).  
Additional information for hosts, such as the hop limit and maximum transmission unit (MTU)  
a host should use in packets that it originates.  
24  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
RAs are also sent in response to device solicitation messages. Device solicitation messages,  
which have a value of 133 in the Type field of the ICMP packet header, are sent by hosts at  
system startup or anytime needed so that the host can immediately autoconfigure without  
needing to wait for the next scheduled RA message.  
Hosts discover and select default devices by listening to Router Advertisements (RAs).  
Stateless address autoconfiguration means that the node automatically configures an IPv6  
address and other information for its interface according to the address prefix and other  
configuration parameters in the received RA messages.  
3. IPv6 Neighbor Redirect Message  
A value of 137 in the type field of the ICMP packet header identifies an IPv6 neighbor redirect  
message. Devices send neighbor redirect messages to inform hosts of better first-hop nodes  
on the path to a destination.  
A device will send an IPv6 ICMP redirect message when the following conditions are satisfied:  
The receiving interface is the forwarding interface.  
The selected route itself is not created or modified by an IPv6 ICMP redirect message.  
The selected route is not the default route.  
The forwarded IPv6 packet does not contain any routing header.  
25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
You can configure the system’s administrative IPv6 address on this page.  
Choose the menu System →System Info →System IPv6 to load the following page.  
Figure 4-10 System IPv6  
The following entries are displayed on this screen:  
Global Config  
IPv6:  
Enable/Disable IPv6 function globally on the switch.  
Select the link-local address configuration mode.  
Link-local Address Config  
Config Mode:  
Manual: When this option is selected, you should assign a  
link-local address manually.  
Auto: When this option is selected, the switch will generate a  
link-local address automatically.  
Link-local Address:  
Enter a link-local address.  
26  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Status:  
Displays the status of the link-local address.  
Normal: Indicates that the link-local address is normal.  
Try: Indicates that the link-local address may be newly  
configured.  
Repeat: Indicates that the link-local address is duplicate. It is  
illegal to access the switch using the IPv6 address(including  
link-local and global address).  
Global Address Autoconfig via RA Message  
Enable global  
address auto  
configuration via RA  
message:  
When this option is enabled, the switch automatically configures a  
global address and other information according to the address  
prefix and other configuration parameters from the received  
RA(Router Advertisement) message.  
Global Address Autoconfig via DHCPv6 Server  
Enable Global  
Address Autoconfig  
via DHCPv6 Server:  
When this option is enabled, the system will try to obtain the  
global address from the DHCPv6 Server.  
Add a global address manually  
Address Format: You can select the global address format according to your  
requirements.  
EUI-64: Indicates that you only need to specify an address  
prefix, and then the system will create a global address  
automatically.  
Not EUI-64: Indicates that you have to specify an intact global  
address.  
Global Address:  
When selecting the mode of EUI-64, please input the address  
prefix here, otherwise, please input an intact IPv6 address here.  
Global address Table  
Select:  
Select the desired entry to delete or modify the corresponding  
global address.  
Global Address:  
Prefix Length:  
Type:  
Modify the global address.  
Modify the prefix length of the global address.  
Displays the configuration mode of the global address.  
Manual: Indicates that the corresponding address is  
configured manually.  
Auto: Indicates that the corresponding address is created  
automatically using the RA message or obtained from the  
DHCPv6 Server.  
Preferred  
Displays the preferred time and valid time of the global address.  
Lifetime/Valid  
Lifetime:  
27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Status:  
Displays the status of the global address.  
Normal: Indicates that the global address is normal.  
Try: Indicates that the global address may be newly  
configured.  
Repeat: Indicates that the corresponding address is duplicate.  
It is illegal to access the switch using this address.  
Tips:  
After adding a global IPv6 address to your switch manually here, you can configure your PC’s  
global IPv6 address in the same subnet with the switch and login to the switch via its global IPv6  
address. For the detailed instructions, please refer to Appendix B.  
4.2 User Management  
User Management functions to configure the user name and password for users to log on to the  
Web management page with a certain access level so as to protect the settings of the switch from  
being randomly changed.  
The User Management function can be implemented on User Table and User Config pages.  
4.2.1 User Table  
On this page you can view the information about the current users of the switch.  
Choose the menu System →User Management →User Table to load the following page.  
Figure 4-11 User Table  
4.2.2 User Config  
On this page you can configure the access level of the user to log on to the Web management  
page. The switch provides two access levels: Guest and Admin. The guest only can view the  
settings without the right to configure the switch; the admin can configure all the functions of the  
switch. The Web management pages contained in this guide are subject to the admin’s login  
without any explanation.  
28  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Choose the menu System →User Management →User Config to load the following page.  
Figure 4-12 User Config  
The following entries are displayed on this screen:  
User Info  
User Name:  
Create a name for users’ login.  
Select the access level to login.  
Access Level:  
Admin: Admin can edit, modify and view all the settings of  
different functions.  
Guest: Guest only can view the settings without the right to edit  
and modify.  
User Status:  
Select Enable/Disable the user configuration.  
Type a password for users’ login.  
Retype the password.  
Password:  
Confirm Password:  
User Table  
Select:  
Select the desired entry to delete the corresponding user  
information. It is multi-optional The current user information cannot  
be deleted.  
User  
ID,  
Name,  
Displays the current user ID, user name, access level and user  
status.  
Access Level and  
status:  
Operation:  
Click the Edit button of the desired entry, and you can edit the  
corresponding user information. After modifying the settings,  
please click the Modify button to make the modification effective.  
Access level and user status of the current user information  
cannot be modified.  
29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4.3 System Tools  
The System Tools function, allowing you to manage the configuration file of the switch, can be  
implemented on Config Restore, Config Backup, Firmware Upgrade, System Reboot and  
System Reset pages.  
4.3.1 Config Restore  
On this page you can upload a backup configuration file to restore your switch to this previous  
configuration.  
Choose the menu System →System Tools →Config Restore to load the following page.  
Figure 4-13 Config Restore  
The following entries are displayed on this screen:  
Config Restore  
Restore Config:  
Click the Restore Config button to restore the backup  
configuration file. It will take effect after the switch automatically  
reboots.  
Note:  
1. It will take a few minutes to restore the configuration. Please wait without any operation.  
2. To avoid any damage, please do not power down the switch while it’s being restored.  
3. After being restored, the current settings of the switch will be lost. Wrong uploaded  
configuration file may cause the switch unmanaged.  
4.3.2 Config Backup  
On this page you can download the current configuration and save it as a file to your computer for  
your future configuration restore.  
30  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Choose the menu System →System Tools →Config Backup to load the following page.  
Figure 4-14 Config Backup  
The following entries are displayed on this screen:  
Config Backup  
Backup Config:  
Click the Backup Config button to save the current configuration  
as a file to your computer. You are suggested to take this measure  
before upgrading.  
Note:  
It will take a few minutes to backup the configuration. Please wait without any operation.  
4.3.3 Firmware Upgrade  
The switch system can be upgraded via the Web management page. To upgrade the system is to  
get more functions and better performance. Go to http:// www.tp-link.com to download the updated  
firmware.  
Choose the menu System →System Tools →Firmware Upgrade to load the following page.  
Figure 4-15 Firmware Upgrade  
Note:  
1. Do not interrupt the upgrade.  
2. Please select the proper software version matching with your hardware to upgrade.  
3. To avoid damage, please do not turn off the device while upgrading.  
4. After upgrading, the device will reboot automatically.  
5. You are suggested to backup the configuration before upgrading.  
31  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
4.3.4 System Reboot  
On this page you can reboot the switch and return to the login page. Please save the current  
configuration before rebooting to avoid losing the configuration unsaved  
Choose the menu System →System Tools →System Reboot to load the following page.  
Figure 4-16 System Reboot  
Note:  
To avoid damage, please do not turn off the device while rebooting.  
4.3.5 System Reset  
On this page you can reset the switch to the default. All the settings will be cleared after the switch  
is reset.  
Choose the menu System →System Tools →System Reset to load the following page.  
Figure 4-17 System Reset  
Note:  
After the system is reset, the switch will be reset to the default and all the settings will be cleared.  
4.4 Access Security  
Access Security provides different security measures for the remote login so as to enhance the  
configuration management security. It can be implemented on Access Control, SSL Config and  
SSH Config pages.  
4.4.1 Access Control  
On this page you can control the users logging on to the Web management page to enhance the  
configuration management security. The definitions of Admin and Guest refer to 4.2 User  
Management.  
32  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Choose the menu System →Access Security →Access Control to load the following page.  
Figure 4-18 Access Control  
The following entries are displayed on this screen:  
Access Control Config  
Control Mode:  
Select the control mode for users to log on to the Web  
management page.  
IP-based: Select this option to limit the IP-range of the users for  
login.  
MAC-based: Select this option to limit the MAC Address of the  
users for login.  
Port-based: Select this option to limit the ports for login.  
IP Address & Mask  
MAC Address:  
Port:  
These fields can be available for configuration only when IP-based  
mode is selected. Only the users within the IP-range you set here  
is allowed for login.  
The field can be available for configuration only when MAC-based  
mode is selected. Only the user with this MAC Address you set  
here is allowed for login.  
The field can be available for configuration only when Port-based  
mode is selected. Only the users connected to these ports you set  
here is allowed for login.  
33  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Session Config  
Session Timeout:  
If you do nothing with the Web management page within the  
timeout time, the system will log out automatically. If you want to  
reconfigure, please login again.  
Access User Number  
Select Enable/Disable the Number Control function.  
Number Control；  
Admin Number:  
Enter the maximum number of the users logging on to the Web  
management page as Admin.  
Guest Number:  
Enter the maximum number of the users logging on to the Web  
management page as Guest.  
4.4.2 SSL Config  
SSL (Secure Sockets Layer), a security protocol, is to provide a secure connection for the  
application layer protocol (e.g. HTTP) communication based on TCP. SSL is widely used to secure  
the data transmission between the Web browser and servers. It is mainly applied through  
ecommerce and online banking.  
SSL mainly provides the following services:  
1. Authenticate the users and the servers based on the certificates to ensure the data are  
transmitted to the correct users and servers;  
2. Encrypt the data transmission to prevent the data being intercepted;  
3. Maintain the integrality of the data to prevent the data being altered in the transmission.  
Adopting asymmetrical encryption technology, SSL uses key pair to encrypt/decrypt information. A  
key pair refers to a public key (contained in the certificate) and its corresponding private key. By  
default the switch has a certificate (self-signed certificate) and a corresponding private key. The  
Certificate/Key Download function enables the user to replace the default key pair.  
After SSL is effective, you can log on to the Web management page via https://192.168.0.1. For  
the first time you use HTTPS connection to log into the switch with the default certificate, you will  
be prompted that “The security certificate presented by this website was not issued by a trusted  
certificate authority” or “Certificate Errors”. Please add this certificate to trusted certificates or  
continue to this website.  
The switch also supports HTTPS connection for IPv6. After configuring an IPv6 address (for  
example, 3001::1) for the switch, you can log on to the switch’s Web management page via  
https://[3001::1].  
On this page you can configure the SSL function.  
34  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Choose the menu System → Access Security → SSL Config to load the following page.  
Figure 4-19 SSL Config  
The following entries are displayed on this screen:  
Global Config  
SSL:  
Select Enable/Disable the SSL function on the switch.  
Certificate Download  
Certificate File:  
Select the desired certificate to download to the switch. The  
certificate must be BASE64 encoded.  
Key Download  
Key File:  
Select the desired SSL Key to download to the switch. The key  
must be BASE64 encoded.  
Note:  
1. The SSL certificate and key downloaded must match each other; otherwise the HTTPS  
connection will not work.  
2. The SSL certificate and key downloaded will not take effect until the switch is rebooted.  
3. To establish a secured connection using https, please enter https:// into the URL field of the  
browser.  
4. It may take more time for https connection than that for http connection, because https  
connection involves authentication, encryption and decryption etc.  
4.4.3 SSH Config  
As stipulated by IETF (Internet Engineering Task Force), SSH (Secure Shell) is a security protocol  
established on application and transport layers. SSH-encrypted-connection is similar to a telnet  
connection, but essentially the old telnet remote management method is not safe, because the  
password and data transmitted with plain-text can be easily intercepted. SSH can provide  
information security and powerful authentication when you log on to the switch remotely through  
35  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
an insecure network environment. It can encrypt all the transmission data and prevent the  
information in a remote management being leaked.  
Comprising server and client, SSH has two versions, V1 and V2 which are not compatible with  
each other. In the communication, SSH server and client can auto-negotiate the SSH version and  
the encryption algorithm. After getting a successful negotiation, the client sends authentication  
request to the server for login, and then the two can communicate with each other after successful  
authentication. This switch supports SSH server and you can log on to the switch via SSH  
connection using SSH client software.  
SSH key can be downloaded into the switch. If the key is successfully downloaded, the certificate  
authentication will be preferred for SSH access to the switch.  
Choose the menu System → Access Security → SSH Config to load the following page.  
Figure 4-20 SSH Config  
The following entries are displayed on this screen:  
Global Config  
SSH:  
Select Enable/Disable SSH function.  
Protocol V1:  
Protocol V2:  
Idle Timeout:  
Select Enable/Disable SSH V1 to be the supported protocol.  
Select Enable/Disable SSH V2 to be the supported protocol.  
Specify the idle timeout time. The system will automatically  
release the connection when the time is up. The default time is  
120 seconds.  
Max Connect:  
Specify the maximum number of the connections to the SSH  
server. No new connection will be established when the number of  
the connections reaches the maximum number you set. The  
default value is 5.  
36  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Key Download  
Key Type:  
Select the type of SSH Key to download. The switch supports  
three types: SSH-1 RSA, SSH-2 RSA and SSH-2 DSA.  
Key File:  
Select the desired key file to download.  
Download:  
Click the Download button to download the desired key file to the  
switch.  
Note:  
1. Please ensure the key length of the downloaded file is in the range of 256 to 3072 bits.  
2. After the Key File is downloaded, the user’s original key of the same type will be replaced.  
The wrong uploaded file will result in the SSH access to the switch via Password  
authentication.  
Application Example 1 for SSH:  
Network Requirements  
1. Log on to the switch via password authentication using SSH and the SSH function is enabled  
on the switch.  
2. PuTTY client software is recommended.  
Configuration Procedure  
1. Open the software to log on to the interface of PuTTY. Enter the IP address of the switch into  
Host Name field; keep the default value 22 in the Port field; select SSH as the Connection  
type.  
37  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2. Click the Open button in the above figure to log on to the switch. Enter the login user name and  
password, and then you can continue to configure the switch.  
Application Example 2 for SSH:  
Network Requirements  
1. Log on to the switch via password authentication using SSH and the SSH function is enabled  
on the switch.  
2. PuTTY client software is recommended.  
Configuration Procedure  
1. Select the key type and key length, and generate SSH key.  
Note:  
1. The key length is in the range of 256 to 3072 bits.  
2. During the key generation, randomly moving the mouse quickly can accelerate the key  
generation.  
38  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2. After the key is successfully generated, please save the public key and private key to the  
computer.  
3. On the Web management page of the switch, download the public key file saved in the  
computer to the switch.  
Note:  
1. The key type should accord with the type of the key file.  
2. The SSH key downloading cannot be interrupted.  
39  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4. After the public key is downloaded, please log on to the interface of PuTTY and enter the IP  
address for login.  
5. Click Browse to download the private key file to SSH client software and click Open.  
40  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
After successful authentication, please enter the login user name. If you log on to the switch  
without entering password, it indicates that the key has been successfully downloaded.  
Note:  
Following the steps above, you have already entered the User EXEC Mode of the switch. However,  
to configure the switch, you need a password to enter the Privileged EXEC Mode first. For a switch  
with factory settings, the Privileged EXEC Mode password can only be configured through the  
console connection. For how to configure the Privileged EXEC Mode password, please refer to the  
1.1.2 Configuring the Privileged EXEC Mode Password in CLI Reference Guide.  
Return to CONTENTS  
41  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 5 Switching  
Switching module is used to configure the basic functions of the switch, including four submenus:  
Port, LAG, Traffic Monitor and MAC Address.  
5.1 Port  
The Port function, allowing you to configure the basic features for the port, is implemented on the  
Port Config, Port Mirror, Port Security, Port Isolation and Loopback Detection pages.  
5.1.1 Port Config  
On this page, you can configure the basic parameters for the ports. When the port is disabled, the  
packets on the port will be discarded. Disabling the port which is vacant for a long time can reduce  
the power consumption effectively. And you can enable the port when it is in need.  
The parameters will affect the working mode of the port, please set the parameters appropriate to  
your needs.  
Choose the menu Switching → Port → Port Config to load the following page.  
Figure 5-1 Port Config  
Here you can view and configure the port parameters.  
Port Config  
Port Select:  
Click the Select button to quick-select the corresponding port  
based on the port number you entered.  
Select:  
Select the desired port for configuration. It is multi-optional.  
42  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Port:  
Displays the port number.  
Description:  
Status:  
Give a description to the port for identification.  
Allows you to Enable/Disable the port. When Enable is  
selected, the port can forward the packets normally.  
Speed and Duplex:  
Select the Speed and Duplex mode for the port. The device  
connected to the switch should be in the same Speed and  
Duplex mode with the switch. When “Auto” is selected, the  
Speed and Duplex mode will be determined by  
auto-negotiation. For the SFP port, this switch does not support  
auto-negotiation.  
Flow Control:  
Allows you to Enable/Disable the Flow Control feature. When  
Flow Control is enabled, the switch can synchronize the speed  
with its peer to avoid the packet loss caused by congestion.  
LAG:  
Note:  
Displays the LAG number which the port belongs to.  
1.  
The switch cannot be managed through the disabled port. Please enable the port which is  
used to manage the switch.  
2.  
3.  
The parameters of the port members in a LAG should be set as the same.  
When using the SFP port with a 100M module or a gigabit module, you need to configure its  
corresponding Speed and Duplex mode. For 100M module, please select 100MFD while  
select 1000MFD for gigabit module. By default, the Speed and Duplex mode of SFP port is  
1000MFD.  
5.1.2 Port Mirror  
Port Mirror, the packets obtaining technology, functions to forward copies of packets from  
one/multiple ports (mirrored port) to a specific port (mirroring port). Usually, the mirroring port is  
connected to a data diagnose device, which is used to analyze the mirrored packets for monitoring  
and troubleshooting the network.  
43  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Choose the menu Switching → Port → Port Mirror to load the following page.  
Figure 5-2 Mirror Group List  
The following entries are displayed on this screen.  
Mirror Group List  
Group:  
Displays the mirror group number.  
Mirroring:  
Mode:  
Displays the mirroring port number.  
Displays the mirror mode, the value will be "Ingress" or "Egress".  
Displays the mirrored ports.  
Mirrored Port:  
Operation:  
Click Edit to configure the mirror group.  
44  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Click Edit to display the following figure.  
Figure 5-3 Port Mirror Config  
The following entries are displayed on this screen.  
Mirror Group  
Number:  
Select the mirror group number you want to configure.  
Select the mirroring port number.  
Mirroring Port  
Mirroring Port:  
Mirrored Port  
Port Select:  
Click the Select button to quick-select the corresponding port  
based on the port number you entered.  
Select:  
Port:  
Select the desired port as a mirrored port. It is multi-optional.  
Displays the port number.  
Ingress:  
Select Enable/Disable the Ingress feature. When the Ingress is  
enabled, the incoming packets received by the mirrored port will  
be copied to the mirroring port.  
45  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Egress:  
LAG:  
Select Enable/Disable the Egress feature. When the Egress is  
enabled, the outgoing packets sent by the mirrored port will be  
copied to the mirroring port.  
Displays the LAG number which the port belongs to. The LAG  
member cannot be selected as the mirrored port or mirroring  
port.  
Note:  
1. The LAG member cannot be selected as the mirrored port or mirroring port.  
2. A port cannot be set as the mirrored port and the mirroring port simultaneously.  
3. The Port Mirror function can span the multiple VLANs.  
5.1.3 Port Security  
MAC Address Table maintains the mapping relationship between the port and the MAC address of  
the connected device, which is the base of the packet forwarding. The capacity of MAC Address  
Table is fixed. MAC Address Attack is the attack method that the attacker takes to obtain the  
network information illegally. The attacker uses tools to generate the cheating MAC address and  
quickly occupy the MAC Address Table. When the MAC Address Table is full, the switch will  
broadcast the packets to all the ports. At this moment, the attacker can obtain the network  
information via various sniffers and attacks. When the MAC Address Table is full, the packets  
traffic will flood to all the ports, which results in overload, lower speed, packets drop and even  
breakdown of the system.  
Port Security is to protect the switch from the malicious MAC Address Attack by limiting the  
maximum number of MAC addresses that can be learned on the port. The port with Port Security  
feature enabled will learn the MAC address dynamically. When the learned MAC address number  
reaches the maximum, the port will stop learning. Thereafter, the other devices with the MAC  
address unlearned cannot access to the network via this port.  
46  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Choose the menu Switching → Port → Port Security to load the following page.  
Figure 5-4 Port Security  
The following entries are displayed on this screen:  
Port Security  
Select:  
Select the desired port for Port Security configuration. It is  
multi-optional.  
Port:  
Displays the port number.  
Max Learned MAC:  
Specify the maximum number of MAC addresses that can be  
learned on the port.  
Learned Num:  
Learn Mode:  
Displays the number of MAC addresses that have been learned  
on the port.  
Select the Learn Mode for the port.  
•
Dynamic: When Dynamic mode is selected, the learned  
MAC address will be deleted automatically after the aging  
time.  
•
Static: When Static mode is selected, the learned MAC  
address will be out of the influence of the aging time and  
can only be deleted manually. The learned entries will be  
cleared after the switch is rebooted.  
•
Permanent: When Permanent mode is selected, the  
learned MAC address will be out of the influence of the  
aging time and can only be deleted manually. The learned  
entries will be saved even the switch is rebooted.  
Status:  
Select Enable/Disable the Port Security feature for the port.  
47  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Note:  
1. The Port Security function is disabled for the LAG port member. Only the port is removed from  
the LAG, will the Port Security function be available for the port.  
2. The Port Security function is disabled when the 802.1X function is enabled.  
5.1.4 Port Isolation  
Port Isolation provides a method of restricting traffic flow to improve the network security by  
forbidding the port to forward packets to the ports that are not on its forward portlist.  
Choose the menu Switching → Port → Port Isolation to load the following page.  
Figure 5-5 Port Isolation Config  
The following entries are displayed on this screen:  
Port Isolation Config  
From/To Port:  
Select the port number range to set its Forward Portlist.  
Select the ports to be forwarded to.  
Forward Portlist:  
48  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Port Isolation List  
Port:  
Display the port number.  
Forward Portlist:  
Display the Forward Portlist.  
5.1.5 Loopback Detection  
With loopback detection feature enabled, the switch can detect loops using loopback detection  
packets. When a loop is detected, the switch will display an alert or further block the corresponding  
port according to the port configuration.  
Choose the menu Switching → Port → Loopback Detection to load the following page.  
Figure 5-1 Loopback Detection Config  
49  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
The following entries are displayed on this screen:  
Global Config  
LoopbackDetection  
Status:  
Here you can enable or disable Loopback Detection function  
globally.  
Detection Interval:  
Set a Loopback Detection interval between 1 and 1000 seconds.  
By default, it’s 30 seconds.  
Automatic Recovery  
Time:  
Time after which the blocked port would automatically recover to  
normal status. It can be set as integral times of detection interval.  
Web Refresh Status:  
Here you can enable or disable web automatic refresh.  
Web Refresh  
Interval:  
Set a web refresh interval between 3 and 100 seconds. By default,  
it is 3 seconds.  
Port Config  
Port Select:  
Click the Select button to quick-select the corresponding port  
based on the port number you entered.  
Select:  
Select the desired port for Loopback Detection configuration. It is  
multi-optional.  
Port  
Displays the port number.  
Status  
Enable or disable Loopback Detection function for the port.  
Operation Mode  
Select the mode how the switch processes the detected loops.  
Alert: When a loop is detected, display an alert.  
Port based: When a loop is detected, display an alert and  
block the port.  
Recovery Mode  
Select the mode how the blocked port recovers to normal status.  
Auto: Block status can be automatically removed after  
recovery time.  
Manual: Block status only can be removed manually.  
Loop Status  
Block Status  
LAG  
Displays the port status whether a loopback is detected.  
Displays the port status about block or unblock.  
Displays the LAG number the port belongs to.  
Manually remove the block status of selected ports.  
Manual Recover  
Note:  
1. Recovery Mode is not selectable when Alert is chosen in Operation Mode.  
2. Loopback Detection must coordinate with storm control.  
5.2 LAG  
LAG (Link Aggregation Group) is to combine a number of ports together to make a single  
high-bandwidth data path, so as to implement the traffic load sharing among the member ports in  
the group and to enhance the connection reliability.  
50  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
For the member ports in an aggregation group, their basic configuration must be the same. The  
basic configuration includes STP, QoS, GVRP, VLAN, port attributes, MAC Address Learning  
mode and other associated settings. More details are explained below:  
If the ports, which are enabled for the GVRP, 802.1Q VLAN, Voice VLAN, STP, QoS, DHCP  
Snooping and Port Configuration (Speed and Flow Control), are in a LAG, their  
configurations should be the same.  
The ports, which are enabled for the half-duplex, Port Security, Port Mirror, MAC Address  
Filtering, Static MAC Address Binding and 802.1X Authentication, cannot be added to the  
LAG.  
It’s not suggested to add the ports with ARP Inspection and DoS Defend enabled to the  
LAG.  
If the LAG is needed, you are suggested to configure the LAG function here before configuring the  
other functions for the member ports.  
Tips:  
1. Calculate the bandwidth for a LAG: If a LAG consists of the four ports in the speed of  
1000Mbps Full Duplex, the whole bandwidth of the LAG is up to 8000Mbps (2000Mbps * 4)  
because the bandwidth of each member port is 2000Mbps counting the up-linked speed of  
1000Mbps and the down-linked speed of 1000Mbps.  
2. The traffic load of the LAG will be balanced among the ports according to the Aggregate  
Arithmetic. If the connections of one or several ports are broken, the traffic of these ports will  
be transmitted on the normal ports, so as to guarantee the connection reliability.  
Depending on different aggregation modes, aggregation groups fall into two types: Static LAG  
and LACP Config. The LAG function is implemented on the LAG Table, Static LAG and LACP  
Config configuration pages.  
5.2.1 LAG Table  
On this page, you can view the information of the current LAG of the switch.  
Choose the menu Switching → LAG → LAG Table to load the following page.  
Figure 5-6 LAG Table  
51  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
The following entries are displayed on this screen:  
Global Config  
Hash Algorithm:  
Select the applied scope of Aggregate Arithmetic, which  
results in choosing a port to transfer the packets.  
• SRC MAC + DST MAC: When this option is selected,  
the Aggregate Arithmetic will apply to the source and  
destination MAC addresses of the packets.  
• SRC IP + DST IP: When this option is selected, the  
Aggregate Arithmetic will apply to the source and  
destination IP addresses of the packets.  
LAG Table  
Select:  
Select the desired LAG. It is multi-optional.  
Displays the LAG number here.  
Group Number:  
Description:  
Member:  
Displays the description of LAG.  
Displays the LAG member.  
Operation:  
Allows you to view or modify the information for each LAG.  
•
•
Edit: Click to modify the settings of the LAG.  
Detail: Click to get the information of the LAG.  
Click the Detail button for the detailed information of your selected LAG.  
Figure 5-7 Detail Information  
5.2.2 Static LAG  
On this page, you can manually configure the LAG. The LACP feature is disabled for the member  
ports of the manually added Static LAG.  
52  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Choose the menu Switching → LAG → Static LAG to load the following page.  
Figure 5-8 Static LAG Config  
The following entries are displayed on this screen:  
LAG Config  
Group Number:  
Description:  
LAG Table  
Select a Group Number for the LAG.  
Give a description to the LAG for identification.  
Member Port:  
Select the port as the LAG member. Clearing all the ports of  
the LAG will delete this LAG.  
Tips:  
1. The LAG can be deleted by clearing its all member ports.  
2. A port can only be added to a LAG. If a port is the member of a LAG or is dynamically  
aggregated as the LACP member, the port number will be displayed in gray and cannot be  
selected.  
5.2.3 LACP Config  
LACP (Link Aggregation Control Protocol) is defined in IEEE802.3ad and enables the dynamic link  
aggregation and disaggregation by exchanging LACP packets with its partner. The switch can  
dynamically group similarly configured ports into a single logical link, which will highly extend the  
bandwidth and flexibly balance the load.  
With the LACP feature enabled, the port will notify its partner of the system priority, system MAC,  
port priority, port number and operation key (operation key is determined by the physical  
properties of the port, upper layer protocol and admin key). The device with higher priority will lead  
the aggregation and disaggregation. System priority and system MAC decide the priority of the  
device. The smaller the system priority, the higher the priority of the device is. With the same  
system priority, the device owning the smaller system MAC has the higher priority. The device with  
the higher priority will choose the ports to be aggregated based on the port priority, port number  
and operation key. Only the ports with the same operation key can be selected into an aggregation  
53  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
group. In an aggregation group, the port with smaller port priority will be considered as the  
preferred one. If the two port priorities are equal; the port with smaller port number is preferred.  
After an aggregation group is established, the selected ports can be aggregated together as one  
port to transmit packets.  
On this page, you can configure the LACP feature of the switch.  
Choose the menu Switching → LAG → LACP Config to load the following page.  
Figure 5-9 LACP Config  
The following entries are displayed on this screen:  
Global Config  
System Priority:  
Specify the system priority for the switch. The system priority and  
MAC address constitute the system identification (ID). A lower system  
priority value indicates a higher system priority. When exchanging  
information between systems, the system with higher priority  
determines which link aggregation a link belongs to, and the system  
with lower priority adds the proper links to the link aggregation  
according to the selection of its partner.  
LACP Config  
Port Select:  
Click the Select button to quick-select the corresponding port based  
on the port number you entered.  
54  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Select:  
Select the desired port for LACP configuration. It is multi-optional.  
Displays the port number.  
Port:  
Admin Key:  
Specify an Admin Key for the port. The member ports in a dynamic  
aggregation group must have the same Admin Key.  
Port Priority:  
Specify a Port Priority for the port. This value determines the priority  
of the port to be selected as the dynamic aggregation group  
member. The port with smaller Port Priority will be considered as the  
preferred one. If the two port priorities are equal; the port with  
smaller port number is preferred.  
Mode:  
Status:  
LAG:  
Specify LACP mode for your selected port.  
Enable/Disable the LACP feature for your selected port.  
Displays the LAG number which the port belongs to.  
5.3 Traffic Monitor  
The Traffic Monitor function, monitoring the traffic of each port, is implemented on the Traffic  
Summary and Traffic Statistics pages.  
5.3.1 Traffic Summary  
Traffic Summary screen displays the traffic information of each port, which facilitates you to  
monitor the traffic and analyze the network abnormity.  
55  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Choose the menu Switching → Traffic Monitor → Traffic Summary to load the following page.  
Figure 5-10 Traffic Summary  
The following entries are displayed on this screen:  
Auto Refresh  
Auto Refresh:  
Allows you to Enable/Disable refreshing the Traffic Summary  
automatically.  
Refresh Rate:  
Traffic Summary  
Port Select:  
Enter a value in seconds to specify the refresh interval.  
Click the Select button to quick-select the corresponding port based  
on the port number you entered.  
Port:  
Displays the port number.  
Packets Rx:  
Displays the number of packets received on the port. The error  
packets are not counted in.  
Packets Tx:  
Octets Rx:  
Displays the number of packets transmitted on the port.  
Displays the number of octets received on the port. The error octets  
are counted in.  
Octets Tx:  
Displays the number of octets transmitted on the port.  
56  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Statistics:  
Click the Statistics button to view the detailed traffic statistics of the  
port.  
5.3.2 Traffic Statistics  
Traffic Statistics screen displays the detailed traffic information of each port, which facilitates you to  
monitor the traffic and locate faults promptly.  
Choose the menu Switching → Traffic Monitor → Traffic Statistics to load the following page.  
Figure 5-11 Traffic Statistics  
The following entries are displayed on this screen:  
Auto Refresh  
Auto Refresh:  
Allows you to Enable/Disable refreshing the Traffic Summary  
automatically.  
Refresh Rate:  
Statistics  
Port:  
Enter a value in seconds to specify the refresh interval.  
Enter a port number and click the Select button to view the traffic  
statistics of the corresponding port.  
Received:  
Sent:  
Displays the details of the packets received on the port.  
Displays the details of the packets transmitted on the port.  
Displays the number of good broadcast packets received or  
Broadcast:  
57  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
transmitted on the port. The error frames are not counted in.  
Multicast:  
Displays the number of good multicast packets received or  
transmitted on the port. The error frames are not counted in.  
Unicast:  
Displays the number of good unicast packets received or  
transmitted on the port. The error frames are not counted in.  
Alignment Errors:  
Displays the number of the received packets that have a bad  
Frame Check Sequence (FCS) with a non-integral octet  
(Alignment Error). The length of the packet is between 64 bytes  
and 1518 bytes.  
UndersizePkts:  
Displays the number of the received packets (excluding error  
packets) that are less than 64 bytes long.  
Pkts64Octets:  
Displays the number of the received packets (including error  
packets) that are 64 bytes long.  
Pkts65to127Octets:  
Pkts128to255Octets:  
Pkts256to511Octets:  
Pkts512to1023Octets:  
PktsOver1023Octets:  
Collisions:  
Displays the number of the received packets (including error  
packets) that are between 65 and 127 bytes long.  
Displays the number of the received packets (including error  
packets) that are between 128 and 255 bytes long.  
Displays the number of the received packets (including error  
packets) that are between 256 and 511 bytes long.  
Displays the number of the received packets (including error  
packets) that are between 512 and 1023 bytes long.  
Displays the number of the received packets (including error  
packets) that are over 1023 bytes.  
Displays the number of collisions experienced by a port during  
packet transmissions.  
5.4 MAC Address  
The main function of the switch is forwarding the packets to the correct ports based on the  
destination MAC address of the packets. Address Table contains the port-based MAC address  
information, which is the base for the switch to forward packets quickly. The entries in the Address  
Table can be updated by auto-learning or configured manually. Most entries are generated and  
updated by auto-learning. In the stable networks, the static MAC address entries can enhance the  
efficiency of packets forwarding remarkably, and the address filtering feature allows the switch to  
filter the undesired packets and forbid its forwarding so as to improve the network security.  
The types and the features of the MAC Address Table are listed as the following:  
Relationship between the address  
and the port  
after  
reboot  
Type  
Configuration Way Aging out  
Static  
Manually binding  
Auto-learning  
No  
Yes  
No  
Being kept The MAC address cannot be learned  
by the other ports in the same VLAN.  
Dynamic  
Filtering  
Clear  
The MAC address can be learned by  
the other ports in the same VLAN.  
Manually binding  
Being kept  
58  
-
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Table 5-1 Types and features of Address Table  
This function includes four submenus: Address Table, Static Address, Dynamic Address and  
Filtering Address.  
5.4.1 Address Table  
On this page, you can view all the information of the Address Table.  
Choose the menu Switching → MAC Address → Address Table to load the following page.  
Figure 5-12 Address Table  
The following entries are displayed on this screen:  
Search Option  
MAC Address:  
Enter the MAC address of your desired entry.  
Enter the VLAN ID of your desired entry.  
VLAN ID:  
Port:  
Select the corresponding port number of your desired entry.  
Select the type of your desired entry.  
Type:  
All: This option allows the address table to display all the  
address entries.  
Static: This option allows the address table to display the static  
address entries only.  
59  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Dynamic: This option allows the address table to display the  
dynamic address entries only.  
Filtering: This option allows the address table to display the  
filtering address entries only.  
Address Table  
MAC Address:  
VLAN ID:  
Port:  
Displays the MAC address learned by the switch.  
Displays the corresponding VLAN ID of the MAC address.  
Displays the corresponding Port number of the MAC address.  
Displays the Type of the MAC address.  
Type:  
Aging Status:  
Displays the Aging status of the MAC address.  
5.4.2 Static Address  
The static address table maintains the static address entries which can be added or removed  
manually, independent of the aging time. In the stable networks, the static MAC address entries  
can facilitate the switch to reduce broadcast packets and remarkably enhance the efficiency of  
packets forwarding without learning the address. The static MAC address learned by the port with  
Port Security enabled in the static learning mode will be displayed in the Static Address Table.  
Choose the menu Switching → MAC Address → Static Address to load the following page.  
Figure 5-13 Static Address  
The following entries are displayed on this screen:  
Create Static Address  
MAC Address:  
Enter the static MAC Address to be bound.  
60  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
VLAN ID:  
Port:  
Enter the corresponding VLAN ID of the MAC address.  
Select a port from the pull-down list to be bound.  
Search Option  
Search Option:  
Select a Search Option from the pull-down list and click the Search  
button to find your desired entry in the Static Address Table.  
•
•
•
MAC: Enter the MAC address of your desired entry.  
VLAN ID: Enter the VLAN ID number of your desired entry.  
Port: Enter the Port number of your desired entry.  
Static Address Table  
Select:  
Select the entry to delete or modify the corresponding port number. It  
is multi-optional.  
MAC Address:  
VLAN ID:  
Port:  
Displays the static MAC Address.  
Displays the corresponding VLAN ID of the MAC address.  
Displays the corresponding Port number of the MAC address. Here  
you can modify the port number to which the MAC address is bound.  
The new port should be in the same VLAN.  
Type:  
Displays the Type of the MAC address.  
Aging Status:  
Displays the Aging Status of the MAC address.  
Note:  
1. If the corresponding port number of the MAC address is not correct, or the connected port (or  
the device) has been changed, the switch cannot forward the packets correctly. Please reset  
the static address entry appropriately.  
2. If the MAC address of a device has been added to the Static Address Table, connecting the  
device to another port will cause its address not to be recognized dynamically by the switch.  
Therefore, please ensure the entries in the Static Address Table are correct and valid.  
3. The MAC address in the Static Address Table cannot be added to the Filtering Address Table  
or bound to a port dynamically.  
5.4.3 Dynamic Address  
The dynamic address can be generated by the auto-learning mechanism of the switch. The  
Dynamic Address Table can update automatically by auto-learning or the MAC address aging out  
mechanism.  
To fully utilize the MAC address table, which has a limited capacity, the switch adopts an aging  
mechanism for updating the table. That is, the switch removes the MAC address entries related to  
a network device if no packet is received from the device within the aging time.  
On this page, you can configure the dynamic MAC address entry.  
61  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Choose the menu Switching → MAC Address → Dynamic Address to load the following page.  
Figure 5-14 Dynamic Address  
The following entries are displayed on this screen:  
Aging Config  
Auto Aging:  
Aging Time:  
Search Option  
Allows you to Enable/Disable the Auto Aging feature.  
Enter the Aging Time for the dynamic address.  
Search Option:  
Select a Search Option from the pull-down list and click the Search  
button to find your desired entry in the Dynamic Address Table.  
•
•
•
•
MAC: Enter the MAC address of your desired entry.  
VLAN ID: Enter the VLAN ID number of your desired entry.  
Port: Enter the Port number of your desired entry.  
LAG ID: Enter the LAG ID number of your desired entry.  
62  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Dynamic Address Table  
Select:  
Select the entry to delete the dynamic address or to bind the MAC  
address to the corresponding port statically. It is multi-optional.  
MAC Address:  
VLAN ID:  
Port:  
Displays the dynamic MAC Address.  
Displays the corresponding VLAN ID of the MAC address.  
Displays the corresponding port number of the MAC address.  
Displays the Type of the MAC address.  
Type:  
Aging Status:  
Bind:  
Displays the Aging Status of the MAC address.  
Click the Bind button to bind the MAC address of your selected entry to  
the corresponding port statically.  
Tips:  
Setting aging time properly helps implement effective MAC address aging. The aging time that is  
too long or too short results in a decrease the performance of the switch. If the aging time is too  
long, excessive invalid MAC address entries maintained by the switch may fill up the MAC address  
table. This prevents the MAC address table from updating with network changes in time. If the  
aging time is too short, the switch may remove valid MAC address entries. This decreases the  
forwarding performance of the switch. It is recommended to keep the default value.  
5.4.4 Filtering Address  
The filtering address is to forbid the undesired packets to be forwarded. The filtering address can  
be added or removed manually, independent of the aging time. The filtering MAC address allows  
the switch to filter the packets which includes this MAC address as the source address or  
destination address, so as to guarantee the network security. The filtering MAC address entries  
act on all the ports in the corresponding VLAN.  
63  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Choose the menu Switching → MAC Address → Filtering Address to load the following page.  
Figure 5-15 Filtering Address  
The following entries are displayed on this screen:  
Create Filtering Address  
MAC Address:  
VLAN ID:  
Enter the MAC Address to be filtered.  
Enter the corresponding VLAN ID of the MAC address.  
Search Option  
Search Option:  
Select a Search Option from the pull-down list and click the Search  
button to find your desired entry in the Filtering Address Table.  
•
•
MAC: Enter the MAC address of your desired entry.  
VLAN ID: Enter the VLAN ID number of your desired entry.  
Filtering Address Table  
Select:  
Select the entry to delete the corresponding filtering address. It is  
multi-optional.  
MAC Address:  
VLAN ID:  
Port:  
Displays the filtering MAC Address.  
Displays the corresponding VLAN ID.  
Here the symbol “__” indicates no specified port.  
Displays the Type of the MAC address.  
Displays the Aging Status of the MAC address.  
Type:  
Aging Status:  
64  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Note:  
1. The MAC address in the Filtering Address Table cannot be added to the Static Address Table  
or bound to a port dynamically.  
2. This MAC address filtering function is not available if the 802.1X feature is enabled.  
Return to CONTENTS  
65  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 6 VLAN  
The traditional Ethernet is a data network communication technology based on CSMA/CD (Carrier  
Sense Multiple Access/Collision Detect) via shared communication medium. Through the  
traditional Ethernet, the overfull hosts in LAN will result in serious collision, flooding broadcasts,  
poor performance or even breakdown of the Internet. Though connecting the LANs through  
switches can avoid the serious collision, the flooding broadcasts cannot be prevented, which will  
occupy plenty of bandwidth resources, causing potential serious security problems.  
A Virtual Local Area Network (VLAN) is a network topology configured according to a logical  
scheme rather than the physical layout. The VLAN technology is developed for switches to control  
broadcast in LANs. By creating VLANs in a physical LAN, you can divide the LAN into multiple  
logical LANs, each of which has a broadcast domain of its own. Hosts in the same VLAN  
communicate with one another as if they are in a LAN. However, hosts in different VLANs cannot  
communicate with one another directly. Therefore, broadcast packets are limited in a VLAN. Hosts  
in the same VLAN communicate with one another via Ethernet whereas hosts in different VLANs  
communicate with one another through the Internet devices such as router, the Layer 3 switch, etc.  
The following figure illustrates a VLAN implementation.  
Figure 6-1 VLAN implementation  
Compared with the traditional Ethernet, VLAN enjoys the following advantages.  
（1） Broadcasts are confined to VLANs. This decreases bandwidth utilization and improves  
network performance.  
（2） Network security is improved. VLANs cannot communicate with one another directly. That  
is, a host in a VLAN cannot access resources in another VLAN directly, unless routers or  
Layer 3 switches are used.  
（3） Network configuration workload for the host is reduced. VLAN can be used to group  
specific hosts. When the physical position of a host changes within the range of the VLAN,  
you need not to change its network configuration.  
A VLAN can span across multiple switches, or even routers. This enables hosts in a VLAN to be  
dispersed in a looser way. That is, hosts in a VLAN can belong to different physical network  
segments. This switch supports three ways, namely, 802.1Q VLAN, MAC VLAN and Protocol  
VLAN, to classify VLANs. VLAN tags in the packets are necessary for the switch to identify  
66  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
packets of different VLANs. The switch can analyze the received untagged packets on the port and  
match the packets with the MAC VLAN, Protocol VLAN and 802.1Q VLAN in turn. If a packet is  
matched, the switch will add a corresponding VLAN tag to it and forward it in the corresponding  
VLAN.  
6.1 802.1Q VLAN  
VLAN tags in the packets are necessary for the switch to identify packets of different VLANs. The  
switch works at the data link layer in OSI model and it can identify the data link layer encapsulation  
of the packet only, so you can add the VLAN tag field into the data link layer encapsulation for  
identification.  
In 1999, IEEE issues the IEEE 802.1Q protocol to standardize VLAN implementation, defining the  
structure of VLAN-tagged packets. IEEE 802.1Q protocol defines that a 4-byte VLAN tag is  
encapsulated after the destination MAC address and source MAC address to show the information  
about VLAN.  
As shown in the following figure, a VLAN tag contains four fields, including TPID (Tag Protocol  
Identifier), Priority, CFI (Canonical Format Indicator), and VLAN ID.  
Figure 6-2 Format of VLAN Tag  
（1） TPID: TPID is a 16-bit field, indicating that this data frame is VLAN-tagged. By default, it is  
0x8100 in this switch.  
（2） Priority: Priority is a 3-bit field, referring to 802.1p priority. Refer to section “QoS & QoS  
profile” for details.  
（3） CFI: CFI is a 1-bit field, indicating whether the MAC address is encapsulated in the  
standard format in different transmission media. This field is not described in detail in this  
chapter.  
（4） VLAN ID: VLAN ID is a 12-bit field, indicating the ID of the VLAN to which this packet  
belongs. It is in the range of 0 to 4,095. Generally, 0 and 4,095 is not used, so the field is in  
the range of 1 to 4,094.  
VLAN ID identifies the VLAN to which a packet belongs. When the switch receives an untagged  
packet, it will encapsulate a VLAN tag with the default VLAN ID of the inbound port for the packet,  
and the packet will be assigned to the default VLAN of the inbound port for transmission.  
In this User Guide, the tagged packet refers to the packet with VLAN tag whereas the untagged  
packet refers to the packet without VLAN tag, and the priority-tagged packet refers to the packet  
with VLAN tag whose VLAN ID is 0.  
Link Types of ports  
When creating the 802.1Q VLAN, you should set the link type for the port according to its  
connected device. The link types of port including the following three types:  
（1） ACCESS: The ACCESS port can be added in a single VLAN, and the egress rule of the  
port is UNTAG. The PVID is same as the current VLAN ID. If the ACCESS port is added to  
another VLAN, it will be removed from the current VLAN automatically.  
67  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
（2） TRUNK: The TRUNK port can be added in multiple VLANs, and the egress rule of the port  
is TAG. The TRUNK port is generally used to connect the cascaded network devices for it  
can receive and forward the packets of multiple VLANs. When the packets are forwarded  
by the TRUNK port, its VLAN tag will not be changed.  
（3） GENERAL: The GENERAL port can be added in multiple VLANs and set various egress  
rules according to the different VLANs. The default egress rule is UNTAG. The PVID can  
be set as the VID number of any VLAN the port belongs to.  
PVID  
PVID (Port VLAN ID) is the default VID of the port. When the switch receives an untagged packet,  
it will add a VLAN tag to the packet according to the PVID of its received port and forward the  
packets.  
When creating VLANs, the PVID of each port, indicating the default VLAN to which the port  
belongs, is an important parameter with the following two purposes:  
（1） When the switch receives an untagged packet, it will add a VLAN tag to the packet  
according to the PVID of its received port  
（2） PVID determines the default broadcast domain of the port, i.e. when the port receives UL  
packets or broadcast packets, the port will broadcast the packets in its default VLAN.  
Different packets, tagged or untagged, will be processed in different ways, after being received by  
ports of different link types, which is illustrated in the following table.  
Receiving Packets  
Port Type  
Forwarding Packets  
Untagged Packets  
Tagged Packets  
If the VID of packet is  
the same as the PVID  
of the port, the packet  
will be received.  
The  
packet  
will  
be  
Access  
Trunk  
forwarded after removing its  
VLAN tag.  
If the VID of packet is  
not the same as the  
PVID of the port, the  
packet will be dropped.  
When  
packets  
untagged  
are  
received, the port  
will add the default  
VLAN tag, i.e. the  
PVID of the ingress  
port, to the packets.  
The  
packet  
will  
be  
forwarded with its current  
VLAN tag.  
If the VID of packet is  
allowed by the port, the  
packet will be received.  
If the egress rule of port is  
TAG, the packet will be  
forwarded with its current  
VLAN tag.  
If the VID of packet is  
forbidden by the port,  
the packet will be  
dropped.  
General  
If the egress rule of port is  
UNTAG, the packet will be  
forwarded after removing its  
VLAN tag.  
Table 6-1 Relationship between Port Types and VLAN Packets Processing  
68  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
IEEE 802.1Q VLAN function is implemented on the VLAN Config and Port Config pages.  
6.1.1 VLAN Config  
On this page, you can view the current created 802.1Q VLAN.  
Choose the menu VLAN → 802.1Q VLAN → VLAN Config to load the following page.  
Figure 6-3 VLAN Table  
To ensure the normal communication of the factory switch, the default VLAN of all ports is set to  
VLAN1. VLAN1 cannot be modified or deleted.  
The following entries are displayed on this screen:  
VLAN Table  
Click the Select button to quick-select the corresponding entry  
VLAN ID Select：  
based on the VLAN ID number you entered.  
Select the desired entry to delete the corresponding VLAN. It is  
multi-optional.  
Select：  
Displays the ID number of VLAN.  
VLAN ID：  
Displays the user-defined description of VLAN.  
Displays the port members in the VLAN.  
Description：  
Members：  
Operation：  
Allows you to view or modify the information for each entry.  
•
•
Edit: Click to modify the settings of VLAN.  
Detail: Click to get the information of VLAN.  
69  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Click Edit button to modify the settings of the corresponding VLAN. Click Create button to create a  
new VLAN.  
Figure 6-4 Create or Modify 802.1Q VLAN  
The following entries are displayed on this screen:  
VLAN Config  
VLAN ID:  
Description:  
Check:  
Enter the ID number of VLAN.  
Give a description to the VLAN for identification.  
Click the Check button to check whether the VLAN ID you entered  
is valid or not.  
VLAN Members  
Port Select:  
Click the Select button to quick-select the corresponding entry  
based on the port number you entered.  
Select:  
Port:  
Select the desired port to be a member of VLAN or leave it blank.  
It's multi-optional.  
Displays the port number.  
70  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Link Type:  
Displays the Link Type of the port. It can be reset on Port Config  
screen.  
Egress Rule:  
Select the Egress Rule for the VLAN port member. The default  
egress rule is UNTAG.  
•
TAG: All packets forwarded by the port are tagged. The  
packets contain VLAN information.  
•
UNTAG: Packets forwarded by the port are untagged.  
LAG:  
Displays the LAG to which the port belongs.  
6.1.2 Port Config  
Before creating the 802.1Q VLAN, please acquaint yourself with all the devices connected to the  
switch in order to configure the ports properly.  
Choose the menu VLAN→ 802.1Q VLAN → Port Config to load the following page.  
Figure 6-5 802.1Q VLAN – Port Config  
The following entries are displayed on this screen:  
VLAN Port Config  
Port Select:  
Click the Select button to quick-select the corresponding entry  
based on the port number you entered.  
Select the desired port for configuration. It is multi-optional.  
Displays the port number.  
Select:  
Port:  
71  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Select the Link Type from the pull-down list for the port.  
Link Type:  
•
ACCESS: The ACCESS port can be added in a single VLAN,  
and the egress rule of the port is UNTAG. The PVID is same  
as the current VLAN ID. If the current VLAN is deleted, the  
PVID will be set to 1 by default.  
•
•
TRUNK: The TRUNK port can be added in multiple VLANs,  
and the egress rule of the port is TAG. The PVID can be set as  
the VID number of any VLAN the port belongs to.  
GENERAL: The GENERAL port can be added in multiple  
VLANs and set various egress rules according to the different  
VLANs. The default egress rule is UNTAG. The PVID can be  
set as the VID number of any VLAN the port belongs to.  
PVID:  
LAG:  
Enter the PVID number of the port.  
Displays the LAG to which the port belongs.  
VLAN:  
Click the Detail button to view the information of the VLAN to  
which the port belongs.  
Click the Detail button to view the information of the corresponding VLAN  
Figure 6-6 View the Current VLAN of Port  
The following entries are displayed on this screen:  
VLAN of Port  
VLAN ID Select:  
Click the Select button to quick-select the corresponding entry  
based on the VLAN ID number you entered.  
Displays the ID number of VLAN.  
VLAN ID：  
VLAN Name:  
Operation:  
Displays the user-defined description of VLAN.  
Allows you to remove the port from the current VLAN.  
Configuration Procedure:  
Step Operation  
Description  
1
Set the link type for Required. On the VLAN→802.1Q VLAN→Port Config page, set  
port.  
the link type for the port based on its connected device.  
2
Create VLAN.  
Required. On the VLAN→802.1Q VLAN→VLAN Config page,  
click the Create button to create a VLAN. Enter the VLAN ID and  
the description for the VLAN. Meanwhile, specify its member  
ports.  
72  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Step Operation  
Description  
3
Modify/View VLAN.  
Optional. On the VLAN→802.1Q VLAN→VLAN Config page,  
click the Edit/Detail button to modify/view the information of the  
corresponding VLAN.  
4
Delete VLAN  
Optional. On the VLAN→802.1Q VLAN→VLAN Config page,  
select the desired entry to delete the corresponding VLAN by  
clicking the Delete button.  
6.2 MAC VLAN  
MAC VLAN technology is the way to classify VLANs according to the MAC addresses of Hosts. A  
MAC address corresponds to a single VLAN ID. For the device in a MAC VLAN, if its MAC address  
is bound to VLAN, the device can be connected to another member port in this VLAN and still  
takes its member role effect without changing the configuration of VLAN members.  
The packet in MAC VLAN is processed in the following way:  
1. When receiving an untagged packet, the switch matches the packet with the current MAC  
VLAN. If the packet is matched, the switch will add a corresponding MAC VLAN tag to it. If no  
MAC VLAN is matched, the switch will add a tag to the packet according to the PVID of the  
received port. Thus, the packet is assigned automatically to the corresponding VLAN for  
transmission.  
2. When receiving tagged packet, the switch will process it based on the 802.1Q VLAN. If the  
received port is the member of the VLAN to which the tagged packet belongs, the packet will  
be forwarded normally. Otherwise, the packet will be discarded.  
3. If the MAC address of a Host is classified into 802.1Q VLAN, please set its connected port of  
switch to be a member of this 802.1Q VLAN so as to ensure the packets forwarded normally.  
On this page, you can create MAC VLAN and view the current MAC VLANs in the table.  
Choose the menu VLAN → MAC VLAN to load the following page.  
Figure 6-7 Create and View MAC VLAN  
73  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
The following entries are displayed on this screen:  
VLAN Table  
MAC Address:  
Description:  
VLAN ID:  
Enter the MAC address.  
Give a description to the MAC address for identification.  
Enter the ID number of the MAC VLAN. This VLAN should be one of the  
802.1Q VLANs the ingress port belongs to.  
MAC VLAN Table  
MAC Select:  
Click the Select button to quick-select the corresponding entry based  
on the MAC address you entered.  
Select:  
Select the desired entry. It is multi-optional.  
Displays the MAC address.  
MAC Address:  
Description:  
VLAN ID:  
Displays the user-defined description of the MAC address.  
Displays the corresponding VLAN ID of the MAC address.  
Operation:  
Click the Edit button to modify the settings of the entry. And click the  
Modify button to apply your settings.  
Configuration Procedure:  
Step Operation  
Description  
1
Set the link type for Required. On the VLAN→802.1Q VLAN→Port Config page, set  
port  
the link type for the port based on its connected device.  
2
Create VLAN  
Required. On the VLAN→802.1Q VLAN→VLAN Config page,  
click the Create button to create a VLAN. Enter the VLAN ID and  
the description for the VLAN. Meanwhile, specify its member  
ports.  
3
Create MAC VLAN  
Required. On the VLAN→MAC VLAN page, create the MAC  
VLAN. For the device in a MAC VLAN, it’s required to set its  
connected port of switch to be a member of this VLAN so as to  
ensure the normal communication.  
6.3 Protocol VLAN  
Protocol VLAN is another way to classify VLANs based on network protocol. Protocol VLANs can  
be sorted by IP, IPX, DECnet, AppleTalk, Banyan and so on. Through the Protocol VLANs, the  
broadcast domain can span over multiple switches and the Host can change its physical position  
in the network with its VLAN member role always effective. By creating Protocol VLANs, the  
network administrator can manage the network clients based on their actual applications and  
services effectively.  
Protocol VLAN, another way to classify VLANs based on network protocol, can bind ToS provided  
in the network to VLAN to realize the specific service. Through protocol VLAN, the switch can  
analyze the received untagged packets on the port and match the packets with the user-defined  
protocol template according to different encapsulation formats and the values of the special fields.  
If a packet is matched, the switch will add a corresponding VLAN tag to it automatically and thus  
74  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
the data of specific protocol can be automatically assigned to the corresponding VLAN for  
transmission. The network administrator can manage network clients based on their specific  
applications and services through protocol VLAN.  
Encapsulation Format of Ethernet Data  
This section simply introduces the common used encapsulation format of Ethernet data to  
understand the procedure for the switch to identify the protocol of packets. At present there are  
two encapsulation formats of Ethernet data, Ethernet II encapsulation and 802.2/802.3  
encapsulation, shown as follows:  
Ethernet II encapsulation  
802.2/802.3 encapsulation  
DA and SA respectively refer to destination MAC address and source MAC address. The  
number indicates the length of the field in bytes, for example, the length of source MAC  
address is 12 bytes.  
As the maximum length of Ethernet data is 1500 bytes, that is, 0x05DC in hexadecimal, the  
Length field in 802.2/802.3 encapsulation ranges from 0x0000 to 0x05DC, but the Type field  
in Ethernet II encapsulation ranges from 0x0600 to 0xFFF. The Type or Length field in the  
range of 0x05DD to 0x05FF is recognized as illegal and will be directly discarded. The switch  
identifies whether a packet is Ethernet II packet or 802.2/802.3 packet according to the  
ranges of the two fields.  
802.2/802.3 encapsulation contains the following three extended formats:  
802.3 raw encapsulation  
Only the Length field is encapsulated after source MAC address field and destination MAC  
address field, followed by DATA field without other fields. Currently only IPX protocol supports  
802.3 raw encapsulation format. The last two bytes of the Length field in 802.3 raw  
encapsulation is 0xFFFF.  
802.2LLC (Logic Link Control) encapsulation  
The Length field, DSAP (Destination Service Access Point) field, SSAP (Source Service  
Access Point) field and Control field are encapsulated after source MAC address field and  
destination MAC address field. The value of Control field is always 3. DSAP field and SSAP  
field in 802.2 LLC encapsulation are used to identify the upper layer protocol, for example,  
when both the two fields are 0xE0, it indicates the upper layer protocol is IPX.  
802.2 SNAP (Sub-Network Access Protocol) is encapsulated based on 802.3 standard  
packets. In 802.2 SNAP encapsulation, the values of both DSAP field and SSAP field are  
always 0XAA, and the value of Control field is 3. The switch differentiates 802.2 LLC and  
802.2 SNAP encapsulation formats according to the values of DSAP field and SSAP field.  
The device determines the encapsulation format of its sending packets, and a device can send out  
packets of two encapsulation formats. Ethernet II encapsulation format is the most common used  
one currently.  
802.3 and Ethernet II encapsulation formats are supported in IP protocol, ARP protocol and RARP  
protocol, but not supported in all protocols. The switch identifies the protocol of the packets by  
matching eigenvalues of two encapsulation formats.  
75  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The Procedure for the Switch to Identify Packet Protocol  
The Implementation of Protocol VLAN  
This switch can match packets through protocol template and transmit packets in the specific  
VLAN according to the protocol. Protocol template, comprising encapsulation format and protocol  
type, is the standard to determine the protocol which a packet belongs to. The following table  
shows the common used encapsulation formats supported in network layer protocol and the  
protocol templates are for reference. Meanwhile some protocol templates has been preset in the  
switch, you can create protocol VLAN according to the corresponding protocol template.  
Encapsulation  
Ethernet II  
802.3 raw  
802.2 LLC 802.2 SNAP  
Protocol  
Not  
supported  
Not  
IP（0x0800）  
Supported  
Supported  
Supported  
Supported  
supported  
IPX（0x8137）  
Supported  
Supported  
Supported  
Supported  
Not  
supported  
Not  
supported  
AppleTalk（0x809B）  
Table 6-2 Protocol types in common use  
76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The packet in Protocol VLAN is processed in the following way:  
VLAN packets are processed in the following way:  
1. When receiving an untagged packet, the switch matches the packet with the current Protocol  
VLAN. If the packet is matched, the switch will add a corresponding Protocol VLAN tag to it. If  
no Protocol VLAN is matched, the switch will add a tag to the packet according to the PVID of  
the received port. Thus, the packet is assigned automatically to the corresponding VLAN for  
transmission.  
2. When receiving tagged packet, the switch will process it based on the 802.1Q VLAN. If the  
received port is the member of the VLAN to which the tagged packet belongs, the packet will  
be forwarded normally. Otherwise, the packet will be discarded.  
3. If the Protocol VLAN is created, please set its enabled port to be the member of  
corresponding 802.1Q VLAN so as to ensure the packets forwarded normally.  
6.3.1 Protocol Group Table  
On this page, you can create Protocol VLAN and view the information of the current defined  
Protocol VLANs.  
Choose the menu VLAN → Protocol VLAN → Protocol Group Table to load the following page.  
Figure 6-8 Protocol Group Table  
The following entries are displayed on this screen:  
Protocol Group Table  
Select:  
Select the desired entry. It is multi-optional.  
Displays the protocol of the protocol group.  
Displays the corresponding VLAN ID of the protocol group.  
Displays the member of the protocol group.  
Protocol:  
VLAN ID:  
Member:  
Operation:  
Click the Edit button to modify the settings of the entry. And click the  
Modify button to apply your settings.  
6.3.2 Protocol Group  
On this page, you can create Protocol VLAN and view the information of the current defined  
Protocol VLANs.  
77  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Choose the menu VLAN → Protocol VLAN → Protocol Group to load the following page.  
Figure 6-9 Create Protocol VLAN  
The following entries are displayed on this screen:  
Protocol Group Config  
Protocol:  
VLAN ID:  
Select the defined protocol template.  
Enter the ID number of the Protocol VLAN. This VLAN should be one  
of the 802.1Q VLANs the ingress port belongs to.  
Protocol Group Member  
Select your desired port for Protocol VLAN Group.  
6.3.3 Protocol Template  
The Protocol Template should be created before configuring the Protocol VLAN. By default, the  
switch has defined the IP Template, ARP Template, RARP Template, etc. You can add more  
Protocol Template on this page.  
Choose the menu VLAN → Protocol VLAN → Protocol Template to load the following page.  
Figure 6-10 Create and View Protocol Template  
78  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
The following entries are displayed on this screen:  
Create Protocol Template  
Protocol Name:  
Ether Type:  
Give a name for the Protocol Template.  
Enter the Ethernet protocol type field in the protocol template.  
Select a Frame Type for the Protocol Template.  
Frame Type:  
Protocol Template Table  
Select:  
Select the desired entry. It is multi-optional.  
ID  
Displays the index of the protocol template.  
Protocol Name:  
Ether Type:  
Frame Type  
Displays the name of the protocol template.  
Displays the Ethernet protocol type field in the protocol template.  
Displays the Frame type field for the protocol template.  
Note:  
The Protocol Template bound to VLAN cannot be deleted.  
Configuration Procedure:  
Step Operation  
Description  
1
2
Set the link type for port.  
Required. On the VLAN →802.1Q VLAN →Port Config  
page, set the link type for the port based on its connected  
device.  
Create VLAN.  
Required. On the VLAN →802.1Q VLAN →VLAN Config  
page, click the Create button to create a VLAN. Enter the  
VLAN ID and the description for the VLAN. Meanwhile,  
specify its member ports.  
3
4
5
6
Create Protocol Template.  
Create Protocol VLAN.  
Modify/View VLAN.  
Delete VLAN.  
Required. On the VLAN →Protocol VLAN →Protocol  
Template page, create the Protocol Template before  
configuring Protocol VLAN.  
Required. On the VLAN →Protocol VLAN →Protocol  
VLAN page, select the protocol type and enter the VLAN ID  
to create a Protocol VLAN.  
Optional. On the VLAN →Protocol VLAN →Protocol  
VLAN page, click the Edit button to modify/view the  
information of the corresponding VLAN.  
Optional. On the VLAN →Protocol VLAN →Protocol  
VLAN page, select the desired entry to delete the  
corresponding VLAN by clicking the Delete button.  
6.4 Application Example for 802.1Q VLAN  
Network Requirements  
Switch A is connecting to PC A and Server B;  
79  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Switch B is connecting to PC B and Server A;  
PC A and Server A is in the same VLAN;  
PC B and Server B is in the same VLAN;  
PCs in the two VLANs cannot communicate with each other.  
Network Diagram  
Configuration Procedure  
Configure Switch A  
Step  
Operation  
Description  
1
Configure  
the Required. On VLAN→802.1Q VLAN →Port Config page, configure  
Link Type of the the link type of Port 2, Port 3 and Port 4 as ACCESS, TRUNK and  
ports  
ACCESS respectively  
2
3
Create VLAN10  
Required. On VLAN→802.1Q VLAN→VLAN Config page, create a  
VLAN with its VLAN ID as 10, owning Port 2 and Port 3.  
Create VLAN20  
Required. On VLAN→802.1Q VLAN→VLAN Config page, create a  
VLAN with its VLAN ID as 20, owning Port 3 and Port 4.  
Configure Switch B  
Step  
Operation  
Description  
1
Configure  
the Required. On VLAN→802.1Q VLAN →Port Config page, configure  
Link Type of the the link type of Port 7, Port 6 and Port 8 as ACCESS, TRUNK and  
ports  
ACCESS respectively.  
2
3
Create VLAN10  
Required. On VLAN→802.1Q VLAN→VLAN Config page, create a  
VLAN with its VLAN ID as 10, owning Port 6 and Port 8.  
Create VLAN20  
Required. On VLAN→802.1Q VLAN→VLAN Config page, create a  
VLAN with its VLAN ID as 20, owning Port 6 and Port 7.  
80  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6.5 Application Example for MAC VLAN  
Network Requirements  
Switch A and switch B are connected to meeting room A and meeting room B respectively, and  
the two rooms are for all departments;  
Notebook A and Notebook B, special for meeting room, are of two different departments;  
The two departments are in VLAN10 and VLAN20 respectively. The two notebooks can just  
access the server of their own departments, that is, Server A and Server B, in the two meeting  
rooms;  
The MAC address of Notebook A is 00-19-56-8A-4C-71, Notebook B’s MAC address is  
00-19-56-82-3B-70.  
Network Diagram  
Configuration Procedure  
Configure Switch A  
Step Operation  
Description  
Configure  
the Required. On VLAN→802.1Q VLAN →Port Config page, configure  
1
2
3
Link Type of the the link type of Port 11 and Port 12 as GENERAL and TRUNK  
ports  
respectively.  
Create VLAN10  
Required. On VLAN→802.1Q VLAN→VLAN Config page, create a  
VLAN with its VLAN ID as 10, owning Port 11 and Port 12, and  
configure the egress rule of Port 11 as Untag.  
Create VLAN20  
Required. On VLAN→802.1Q VLAN→VLAN Config page, create a  
VLAN with its VLAN ID as 20, owning Port 11 and Port 12, and  
configure the egress rule of Port 11 as Untag.  
Configure MAC On VLAN→MAC VLAN page, create MAC VLAN10 with the MAC  
VLAN 10 address as 00-19-56-8A-4C-71.  
Configure MAC On VLAN→MAC VLAN page, create MAC VLAN10 with the MAC  
4
5
VLAN 20  
address as 00-19-56-82-3B-70.  
81  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Configure Switch B  
Step Operation  
Description  
1
2
3
Configure  
the Required. On VLAN→802.1Q VLAN →Port Config page, configure  
Link Type of the the link type of Port 21 and Port 22 as GENERAL and TRUNK  
ports  
respectively.  
Create VLAN10  
Required. On VLAN→802.1Q VLAN→VLAN Config page, create a  
VLAN with its VLAN ID as 10, owning Port 21 and Port 22, and  
configure the egress rule of Port 21 as Untag.  
Create VLAN20  
Required. On VLAN→802.1Q VLAN→VLAN Config page, create a  
VLAN with its VLAN ID as 20, owning Port 21 and Port 22, and  
configure the egress rule of Port 21 as Untag.  
4
5
Configure MAC On VLAN→MAC VLAN page, create MAC VLAN10 with the MAC  
VLAN 10 address as 00-19-56-8A-4C-71.  
Configure MAC On VLAN→MAC VLAN page, create MAC VLAN10 with the MAC  
VLAN 20  
address as 00-19-56-82-3B-70.  
Configure Switch C  
Step Operation  
Description  
1
Configure  
the Required. On VLAN→802.1Q VLAN →Port Config page, configure  
Link Type of the the link type of Port 2 and Port 3 as GENERAL, and configure the link  
ports  
type of Port 4 and Port 5 as ACCESS.  
2
3
Create VLAN10  
Required. On VLAN→802.1Q VLAN→VLAN Config page, create a  
VLAN with its VLAN ID as 10, owning Port 2, Port 3 and Port 5,  
Create VLAN20  
Required. On VLAN→802.1Q VLAN→VLAN Config page, create a  
VLAN with its VLAN ID as 20, owning Port 2, Port 3 and Port 4,  
6.6 Application Example for Protocol VLAN  
Network Requirements  
Department A is connected to the company LAN via Port12 of switch A;  
Department A has IP host and AppleTalk host;  
IP host, in VLAN10, is served by IP server while AppleTalk host is served by AppleTalk server;  
Switch B is connected to IP server and AppleTalk server.  
82  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Network Diagram  
Configuration Procedure  
Configure Switch A  
Step Operation  
Description  
1
2
3
Configure  
the Required. On VLAN→802.1Q VLAN →Port Config page, configure  
Link Type of the the link type of Port 11 and Port 13 as ACCESS, and configure the link  
ports  
type of Port 12 as GENERAL.  
Create VLAN10  
Required. On VLAN→802.1Q VLAN→VLAN Config page, create a  
VLAN with its VLAN ID as 10, owning Port 12 and Port 13, and  
configure the egress rule of Port 12 as Untag.  
Create VLAN20  
Required. On VLAN→802.1Q VLAN→VLAN Config page, create a  
VLAN with its VLAN ID as 20, owning Port 11 and Port 12, and  
configure the egress rule of Port 12 as Untag.  
Configure Switch B  
Step Operation  
Description  
1
2
3
Configure  
the Required. On VLAN→802.1Q VLAN →Port Config page, configure  
Link Type of the the link type of Port 4 and Port 5 as ACCESS, and configure the link  
ports  
type of Port 3 as GENERAL.  
Create VLAN10  
Required. On VLAN→802.1Q VLAN→VLAN Config page, create a  
VLAN with its VLAN ID as 10, owning Port 3 and Port 4, and configure  
the egress rule of Port 3 as Untag.  
Create VLAN20  
Required. On VLAN→802.1Q VLAN→VLAN Config page, create a  
VLAN with its VLAN ID as 20, owning Port 3 and Port 5, and configure  
the egress rule of Port 3 as Untag.  
83  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Step Operation  
Description  
4
Create Protocol Required. On VLAN →Protocol VLAN →Protocol Template page,  
Template  
configure the protocol template practically. E.g. the IP network packets  
are encapsulated in Ethernet II format and its Ether Type is 0800; the  
AppleTalk network packets are encapsulated in SNAP format and its  
PID is 809B.  
5
6
Create Protocol On VLAN →Protocol VLAN →Protocol Group page, create protocol  
VLAN 10 VLAN 10 with Protocol as IP and tick Port 3.  
Create Protocol On VLAN →Protocol VLAN →Protocol Group page, create protocol  
VLAN 20 VLAN 20 with Protocol as AppleTalk and tick Port 3.  
6.7 GVRP  
GVRP (GARP VLAN Registration Protocol) is an implementation of GARP (generic attribute  
registration protocol). GVRP allows the switch to automatically add or remove the VLANs via the  
dynamic VLAN registration information and propagate the local VLAN registration information to  
other switches, without having to individually configure each VLAN.  
GARP  
GARP provides the mechanism to assist the switch members in LAN to deliver, propagate and  
register the information among the members. GARP itself does not work as the entity among the  
devices. The application complied with GARP is called GARP implementation, and GVRP is the  
implementation of GARP. When GARP is implemented on a port of device, the port is called  
GARP entity.  
The information exchange between GARP entities is completed by messages. GARP defines the  
messages into three types: Join, Leave and LeaveAll.  
•
•
•
Join Message: When a GARP entity expects other switches to register certain attribute  
information of its own, it sends out a Join message. And when receiving the Join message  
from the other entity or configuring some attributes statically, the device also sends out a Join  
message in order to be registered by the other GARP entities.  
Leave Message: When a GARP entity expects other switches to deregister certain attribute  
information of its own, it sends out a Leave message. And when receiving the Leave message  
from the other entity or deregistering some attributes statically, the device also sends out a  
Leave message.  
LeaveAll Message: Once a GARP entity starts up, it starts the LeaveAll timer. After the timer  
times out, the GARP entity sends out a LeaveAll message. LeaveAll message is to deregister  
all the attribute information so as to enable the other GARP entities to re-register attribute  
information of their own.  
Through message exchange, all the attribute information to be registered can be propagated to all  
the switches in the same switched network.  
The interval of GARP messages is controlled by timers. GARP defines the following timers:  
•
Hold Timer: When a GARP entity receives a piece of registration information, it does not  
send out a Join message immediately. Instead, to save the bandwidth resources, it starts the  
Hold timer, puts all registration information it receives before the timer times out into one Join  
message and sends out the message after the timer times out.  
84  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
•
•
Join Timer: To transmit the Join messages reliably to other entities, a GARP entity sends  
each Join message two times. The Join timer is used to define the interval between the two  
sending operations of each Join message.  
Leave Timer: When a GARP entity expects to deregister a piece of attribute information, it  
sends out a Leave message. Any GARP entity receiving this message starts its Leave timer,  
and deregisters the attribute information if it does not receives a Join message again before  
the timer times out.  
•
LeaveAll Timer: Once a GARP entity starts up, it starts the LeaveAll timer, and sends out a  
LeaveAll message after the timer times out, so that other GARP entities can re-register all the  
attribute information on this entity. After that, the entity restarts the LeaveAll timer to begin a  
new cycle.  
GVRP  
GVRP, as an implementation of GARP, maintains dynamic VLAN registration information and  
propagates the information to other switches by adopting the same mechanism of GARP.  
After the GVRP feature is enabled on a switch, the switch receives the VLAN registration  
information from other switches to dynamically update the local VLAN registration information,  
including VLAN members, ports through which the VLAN members can be reached, and so on.  
The switch also propagates the local VLAN registration information to other switches so that all the  
switching devices in the same switched network can have the same VLAN information. The VLAN  
registration information includes not only the static registration information configured locally, but  
also the dynamic registration information, which is received from other switches.  
In this switch, only the port with TRUNK link type can be set as the GVRP application entity to  
maintain the VLAN registration information. GVRP has the following three port registration modes:  
Normal, Fixed, and Forbidden.  
•
•
Normal: In this mode, a port can dynamically register/deregister a VLAN and propagate the  
dynamic/static VLAN information.  
Fixed: In this mode, a port cannot register/deregister a VLAN dynamically. It only propagates  
static VLAN information. That is, the port in Fixed mode only permits the packets of its static  
VLAN to pass.  
•
Forbidden: In this mode, a port cannot register/deregister VLANs. It only propagates VLAN 1  
information. That is, the port in Forbidden mode only permits the packets of the default VLAN  
(namely VLAN 1) to pass.  
85  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Choose the menu VLAN →GVRP to load the following page.  
Figure 6-11 GVRP Config  
Note:  
If the GVRP feature is enabled for a member port of LAG, please ensure all the member ports of  
this LAG are set to be in the same status and registration mode.  
The following entries are displayed on this screen:  
Global Config  
GVRP:  
Allows you to Enable/Disable the GVRP function.  
Port Config  
Port Select:  
Click the Select button to quick-select the corresponding entry based  
on the port number you entered.  
Select:  
Port:  
Select the desired port for configuration. It is multi-optional.  
Displays the port number.  
Status:  
Enable/Disable the GVRP feature for the port. The port type should be  
set to TRUNK before enabling the GVRP feature.  
Registration  
Mode:  
Select the Registration Mode for the port.  
•
Normal: In this mode, a port can dynamically register/deregister  
a VLAN and propagate the dynamic/static VLAN information.  
•
Fixed: In this mode, a port cannot register/deregister a VLAN  
dynamically. It only propagates static VLAN information.  
86  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
•
Forbidden: In this mode, a port cannot register/deregister  
VLANs. It only propagates VLAN 1 information.  
LeaveAll Timer:  
Once the LeaveAll Timer is set, the port with GVRP enabled can send  
a LeaveAll message after the timer times out, so that other GARP  
ports can re-register all the attribute information. After that, the  
LeaveAll timer will start to begin a new cycle. The LeaveAll Timer  
ranges from 1000 to 30000 centiseconds.  
Join Timer:  
To guarantee the transmission of the Join messages, a GARP port  
sends each Join message two times. The Join Timer is used to define  
the interval between the two sending operations of each Join  
message. The Join Timer ranges from 20 to 1000 centiseconds.  
Leave Timer:  
Once the Leave Timer is set, the GARP port receiving a Leave  
message will start its Leave timer, and deregister the attribute  
information if it does not receive a Join message again before the  
timer times out. The Leave Timer ranges from 60 to 3000  
centiseconds.  
LAG:  
Note:  
Displays the LAG to which the port belongs.  
LeaveAll Timer >= 10* Leave Timer, Leave Timer >= 2*Join Timer  
Configuration Procedure:  
Step Operation  
Description  
1
2
3
Set the link type for port.  
Required. On the VLAN →802.1Q VLAN →Port Config  
page, set the link type of the port to be TRUNK.  
Enable GVRP function.  
Required. On the VLAN →GVRP page, enable GVRP  
function.  
Configure the registration Required. On the VLAN →GVRP page, configure the  
mode and the timers for the parameters of ports based on actual applications.  
port.  
Return to CONTENTS  
87  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 7 Spanning Tree  
STP (Spanning Tree Protocol), subject to IEEE 802.1D standard, is to disbranch a ring network in  
the Data Link layer in a local network. Devices running STP discover loops in the network and block  
ports by exchanging information, in that way, a ring network can be disbranched to form a  
tree-topological ring-free network to prevent packets from being duplicated and forwarded endlessly  
in the network.  
BPDU (Bridge Protocol Data Unit) is the protocol data that STP and RSTP use. Enough  
information is carried in BPDU to ensure the spanning tree generation. STP is to determine the  
topology of the network via transferring BPDUs between devices.  
To implement spanning tree function, the switches in the network transfer BPDUs between each  
other to exchange information and all the switches supporting STP receive and process the  
received BPDUs. BPDUs carry the information that is needed for switches to figure out the  
spanning tree.  
STP Elements  
Bridge ID（Bridge Identifier）: Indicates the value of the priority and MAC address of the bridge.  
Bridge ID can be configured and the switch with the lower bridge ID has the higher priority.  
Root Bridge: Indicates the switch has the lowest bridge ID. Configure the best PC in the ring  
network as the root bridge to ensure best network performance and reliability.  
Designated Bridge: Indicates the switch has the lowest path cost from the switch to the root  
bridge in each network segment. BPDUs are forwarded to the network segment through the  
designated bridge. The switch with the lowest bridge ID will be chosen as the designated bridge.  
Root Path Cost: Indicates the sum of the path cost of the root port and the path cost of all the  
switches that packets pass through. The root path cost of the root bridge is 0.  
Bridge Priority: The bridge priority can be set to a value in the range of 0~32768. The lower value  
priority has the higher priority. The switch with the higher priority has more chance to be chosen as  
the root bridge.  
Root Port: Indicates the port that has the lowest path cost from this bridge to the Root Bridge and  
forwards packets to the root.  
Designated Port: Indicates the port that forwards packets to a downstream network segment or  
switch.  
Port Priority: The port priority can be set to a value in the range of 0~255. The lower value priority  
has the higher priority. The port with the higher priority has more chance to be chosen as the root  
port.  
Path Cost: Indicates the parameter for choosing the link path by STP. By calculating the path cost,  
STP chooses the better links and blocks the redundant links so as to disbranch the ring-network to  
form a tree-topological ring-free network.  
The following network diagram shows the sketch map of spanning tree. Switch A, B and C are  
connected together in order. After STP generation, switch A is chosen as root bridge, the path from  
port 2 to port 6 is blocked.  
Bridge: Switch A is the root bridge in the whole network; switch B is the designated bridge of  
switch C.  
Port: Port 3 is the root port of switch B and port 5 is the root port of switch C; port 1 is the  
designated port of switch A and port 4 is the designated port of switch B; port 6 is the blocked  
port of switch C.  
88  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Figure 7-1 Basic STP diagram  
STP Timers  
Hello Time:  
Hello Time ranges from 1 to 10 seconds. It specifies the interval to send BPDU packets. It is used  
to test the links.  
Max. Age:  
Max. Age ranges from 6 to 40 seconds. It specifies the maximum time the switch can wait without  
receiving a BPDU before attempting to reconfigure.  
Forward Delay:  
Forward Delay ranges from 4 to 30 seconds. It specifies the time for the port to transit its state  
after the network topology is changed.  
When the STP regeneration caused by network malfunction occurs, the STP structure will get  
some corresponding change. However, as the new configuration BPDUs cannot be spread in the  
whole network at once, the temporal loop will occur if the port transits its state immediately.  
Therefore, STP adopts a state transit mechanism, that is, the new root port and the designated  
port begins to forward data after twice forward delay, which ensures the new configuration BPDUs  
are spread in the whole network.  
BPDU Comparing Principle in STP mode  
Assuming two BPDUs: BPDU X and BPDU Y  
If the root bridge ID of X is smaller than that of Y, X is superior to Y.  
If the root bridge ID of X equals that of Y, but the root path cost of X is smaller than that of Y, X is  
superior to Y.  
If the root bridge ID and the root path cost of X equal those of Y, but the bridge ID of X is smaller  
than that of Y, X is superior to Y.  
If the root bridge ID, the root path cost and bridge ID of X equal those of Y, but the port ID of X is  
smaller than that of Y, X is superior to Y.  
STP Generation  
In the beginning  
In the beginning, each switch regards itself as the root, and generates a configuration BPDU for  
each port on it as a root, with the root path cost being 0, the ID of the designated bridge being that  
of the switch, and the designated port being itself.  
89  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Comparing BPDUs  
Each switch sends out configuration BPDUs and receives a configuration BPDU on one of its ports  
from another switch. The following table shows the comparing operations.  
Step Operation  
1
2
If the priority of the BPDU received on the port is lower than that of the BPDU if of  
the port itself, the switch discards the BPDU and does not change the BPDU of  
the port.  
If the priority of the BPDU is higher than that of the BPDU of the port itself, the  
switch replaces the BPDU of the port with the received one and compares it with  
those of other ports on the switch to obtain the one with the highest priority.  
Table 7-1 Comparing BPDUs  
Selecting the root bridge  
The root bridge is selected by BPDU comparing. The switch with the smallest root ID is chosen as  
the root bridge.  
Selecting the root port and designate port  
The operation is taken in the following way:  
Step Operation  
1
2
For each switch (except the one chosen as the root bridge) in a network, the port  
that receives the BPDU with the highest priority is chosen as the root port of the  
switch.  
Using the root port BPDU and the root path cost, the switch generates a  
designated port BPDU for each of its ports.  
Root ID is replaced with that of the root port;  
Root path is replaced with the sum of the root path cost of the root port and  
the path cost between this port and the root port;  
The ID of the designated bridge is replaced with that of the switch;  
The ID of the designated port is replaced with that of the port.  
3
The switch compares the resulting BPDU with the BPDU of the desired port  
whose role you want to determine.  
If the resulting BPDU takes the precedence over the BPDU of the port, the  
port is chosen as the designated port and the BPDU of this port is replaced  
with the resulting BPDU. The port regularly sends out the resulting BPDU;  
If the BPDU of this port takes the precedence over the resulting BPDU, the  
BPDU of this port is not replaced and the port is blocked. The port only can  
receive BPDUs.  
Table 7-2 Selecting root port and designated port  
Tips：  
In a STP with stable topology, only the root port and designated port can forward data, and the  
other ports are blocked. The blocked ports only can receive BPDUs.  
RSTP (Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol), evolved from the 802.1D STP standard, enable Ethernet  
ports to transit their states rapidly. The premises for the port in the RSTP to transit its state rapidly  
are as follows.  
90  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The condition for the root port to transit its port state rapidly: The old root port of the switch  
stops forwarding data and the designated port of the upstream switch begins to forward  
data.  
The condition for the designated port to transit its port state rapidly: The designated port is  
an edge port or connecting to a point-to-point link. If the designated port is an edge port, it  
can directly transit to forwarding state; if the designated port is connecting to a  
point-to-point link, it can transit to forwarding state after getting response from the  
downstream switch through handshake.  
RSTP Elements  
Edge Port: Indicates the port connected directly to terminals.  
P2P Link: Indicates the link between two switches directly connected.  
MSTP (Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol), compatible with both STP and RSTP and subject to IEEE  
802.1s standard, not only enables spanning trees to converge rapidly, but also enables packets of  
different VLANs to be forwarded along their respective paths so as to provide redundant links  
with a better load-balancing mechanism.  
Features of MSTP:  
MSTP combines VLANs and spanning tree together via VLAN-to-instance mapping table. It  
binds several VLANs to an instance to save communication cost and network resources.  
MSTP divides a spanning tree network into several regions. Each region has several  
internal spanning trees, which are independent of each other.  
MSTP provides a load-balancing mechanism for the packets transmission in the VLAN.  
MSTP is compatible with both STP and RSTP.  
MSTP Elements  
MST Region (Multiple Spanning Tree Region): An MST Region comprises switches with the same  
region configuration and VLAN-to-Instances mapping relationship.  
IST (Internal Spanning Tree): An IST is a spanning tree in an MST.  
CST (Common Spanning Tree): A CST is the spanning tree in a switched network that connects all  
MST regions in the network.  
CIST (Common and Internal Spanning Tree): A CIST, comprising IST and CST, is the spanning  
tree in a switched network that connects all switches in the network.  
91  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The following figure shows the network diagram in MSTP.  
Figure 7-2 Basic MSTP diagram  
MSTP  
MSTP divides a network into several MST regions. The CST is generated between these MST  
regions, and multiple spanning trees can be generated in each MST region. Each spanning tree is  
called an instance. As well as STP, MSTP uses BPDUs to generate spanning tree. The only  
difference is that the BPDU for MSTP carries the MSTP configuration information on the switches.  
Port States  
In an MSTP, ports can be in the following four states:  
Forwarding: In this status the port can receive/forward data, receive/send BPDU packets as  
well as learn MAC address.  
Learning: In this status the port can receive/send BPDU packets and learn MAC address.  
Blocking: In this status the port can only receive BPDU packets.  
Disconnected: In this status the port is not participating in the STP.  
Port Roles  
In an MSTP, the following roles exist:  
Root Port: Indicates the port that has the lowest path cost from this bridge to the Root Bridge  
and forwards packets to the root.  
Designated Port: Indicates the port that forwards packets to a downstream network segment  
or switch.  
Master Port: Indicates the port that connects a MST region to the common root. The path  
from the master port to the common root is the shortest path between this MST region and  
the common root.  
Alternate Port: Indicates the port that can be a backup port of a root or master port.  
Backup Port: Indicates the port that is the backup port of a designated port.  
Disabled: Indicates the port that is not participating in the STP.  
92  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The following diagram shows the different port roles.  
Figure 7-3 Port roles  
The Spanning Tree module is mainly for spanning tree configuration of the switch, including four  
submenus: STP Config, Port Config, MSTP Instance and STP Security.  
7.1 STP Config  
The STP Config function, for global configuration of spanning trees on the switch, can be  
implemented on STP Config and STP Summary pages.  
7.1.1 STP Config  
Before configuring spanning trees, you should make clear the roles each switch plays in each  
spanning tree instance. Only one switch can be the root bridge in each spanning tree instance. On  
this page you can globally configure the spanning tree function and related parameters.  
93  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Choose the menu Spanning Tree →STP Config →STP Config to load the following page.  
Figure 7-4 STP Config  
The following entries are displayed on this screen:  
Global Config  
STP:  
Select Enable/Disable STP function globally on the switch.  
Select the desired STP version on the switch.  
Version:  
STP: Spanning Tree Protocol.  
RSTP: Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol.  
MSTP: Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol.  
Parameters Config  
CIST Priority:  
Enter a value from 0 to 61440 to specify the priority of the switch  
for comparison in the CIST. CIST priority is an important criterion  
on determining the root bridge. In the same condition, the switch  
with the highest priority will be chosen as the root bridge. The  
lower value has the higher priority. The default value is 32768 and  
should be exact divisor of 4096.  
Hello Time  
Enter a value from 1 to 10 in seconds to specify the interval to  
send BPDU packets. It is used to test the links. 2*(Hello Time + 1)  
≤ Max Age. The default value is 2 seconds.  
Max Age:  
Enter a value from 6 to 40 in seconds to specify the maximum  
time the switch can wait without receiving a BPDU before  
attempting to reconfigure. The default value is 20 seconds.  
Forward Delay:  
TxHold Count:  
Enter a value from 4 to 30 in seconds to specify the time for the  
port to transit its state after the network topology is changed.  
2*(Forward Delay-1) ≥ Max Age. The default value is 15 seconds.  
Enter a value from 1 to 20 to set the maximum number of BPDU  
packets transmitted per Hello Time interval. The default value is  
5pps.  
94  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Max Hops:  
Note:  
Enter a value from 1 to 40 to set the maximum number of hops  
that occur in a specific region before the BPDU is discarded. The  
default value is 20 hops.  
1. The forward delay parameter and the network diameter are correlated. A too small forward  
delay parameter may result in temporary loops. A too large forward delay may cause a  
network unable to resume the normal state in time. The default value is recommended.  
2. An adequate hello time parameter can enable the switch to discover the link failures occurred  
in the network without occupying too much network resources. A too large hello time  
parameter may result in normal links being regarded as invalid when packets drop occurred in  
the links, which in turn result in spanning tree being regenerated. A too small hello time  
parameter may result in duplicated configuration being sent frequently, which increases the  
network load of the switches and wastes network resources. The default value is  
recommended.  
3. A too small max age parameter may result in the switches regenerating spanning trees  
frequently and cause network congestions to be falsely regarded as link problems. A too large  
max age parameter result in the switches unable to find the link problems in time, which in  
turn handicaps spanning trees being regenerated in time and makes the network less  
adaptive. The default value is recommended.  
4. If the TxHold Count parameter is too large, the number of MSTP packets being sent in each  
hello time may be increased with occupying too much network resources. The default value is  
recommended.  
7.1.2 STP Summary  
On this page you can view the related parameters for Spanning Tree function.  
95  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Choose the menu Spanning Tree →STP Config →STP Summary to load the following page.  
Figure 7-5 STP Summary  
7.2 Port Config  
On this page you can configure the parameters of the ports for CIST  
96  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Choose the menu Spanning Tree →Port Config to load the following page.  
Figure 7-6 Port Config  
The following entries are displayed on this screen:  
Port Config  
Port Select:  
Click the Select button to quick-select the corresponding port based  
on the port number you entered.  
Select:  
Port:  
Select the desired port for STP configuration. It is multi-optional.  
Displays the port number of the switch.  
Status:  
Priority:  
Select Enable /Disable STP function for the desired port.  
Enter a value from 0 to 240 divisible by 16. Port priority is an important  
criterion on determining if the port connected to this port will be chosen  
as the root port. The lower value has the higher priority.  
ExtPath:  
IntPath:  
ExtPath Cost is used to choose the path and calculate the path costs  
of ports in different MST regions. It is an important criterion on  
determining the root port. The lower value has the higher priority.  
IntPath Cost is used to choose the path and calculate the path costs of  
ports in an MST region. It is an important criterion on determining the  
root port. The lower value has the higher priority.  
Edge Port:  
P2P Link:  
Select Enable/Disable Edge Port. The edge port can transit its state  
from blocking to forwarding rapidly without waiting for forward delay.  
Select the P2P link status. If the two ports in the P2P link are root port  
or designated port, they can transit their states to forwarding rapidly to  
reduce the unnecessary forward delay.  
MCheck:  
Select Enable to perform MCheck operation on the port. Unchange  
means no MCheck operation.  
STP Version:  
Port Role:  
Displays the STP version of the port.  
Displays the role of the port played in the STP Instance.  
Root Port: Indicates the port that has the lowest path cost from  
this bridge to the Root Bridge and forwards packets to the root.  
97  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Designated Port: Indicates the port that forwards packets to a  
downstream network segment or switch.  
Master Port: Indicates the port that connects a MST region to the  
common root. The path from the master port to the common root  
is the shortest path between this MST region and the common  
root.  
Alternate Port: Indicates the port that can be a backup port of a  
root or master port.  
Backup Port: Indicates the port that is the backup port of a  
designated port.  
Disabled: Indicates the port that is not participating in the STP.  
Displays the working status of the port.  
Port Status:  
Forwarding: In this status the port can receive/forward data,  
receive/send BPDU packets as well as learn MAC address.  
Learning: In this status the port can receive/send BPDU packets  
and learn MAC address.  
Blocking: In this status the port can only receive BPDU packets.  
Disconnected: In this status the port is not participating in the STP.  
LAG:  
Note:  
Displays the LAG number which the port belongs to.  
1. Configure the ports connected directly to terminals as edge ports and enable the BPDU  
protection function as well. This not only enables these ports to transit to forwarding state  
rapidly but also secures your network.  
2. All the links of ports in a LAG can be configured as point-to-point links.  
3. When the link of a port is configured as a point-to-point link, the spanning tree instances  
owning this port are configured as point-to-point links. If the physical link of a port is not a  
point-to-point link and you forcibly configure the link as a point-to-point link, temporary loops  
may be incurred.  
7.3 MSTP Instance  
MSTP combines VLANs and spanning tree together via VLAN-to-instance mapping table  
(VLAN-to-spanning-tree mapping). By adding MSTP instances, it binds several VLANs to an  
instance to realize the load balance based on instances.  
Only when the switches have the same MST region name, MST region revision and  
VLAN-to-Instance mapping table, the switches can be regarded as in the same MST region.  
The MSTP Instance function can be implemented on Region Config, Instance Config and  
Instance Port Config pages.  
7.3.1 Region Config  
On this page you can configure the name and revision of the MST region  
98  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Choose the menu Spanning Tree → MSTP Instance → Region Config to load the following  
page.  
Figure 7-7 Region Config  
The following entries are displayed on this screen:  
Region Config  
Region Name:  
Revision:  
Create a name for MST region identification using up to 32 characters.  
Enter the revision from 0 to 65535 for MST region identification.  
7.3.2 Instance Config  
Instance Configuration, a property of MST region, is used to describe the VLAN to Instance  
mapping configuration. You can assign VLAN to different instances appropriate to your needs.  
Every instance is a VLAN group independent of other instances and CIST.  
99  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Choose the menu Spanning Tree → MSTP Instance → Instance Config to load the following  
page.  
Figure 7-8 Instance Config  
The following entries are displayed on this screen:  
Instance Table  
Instance ID Select: Click the Select button to quick-select the corresponding Instance ID  
based on the ID number you entered.  
Select:  
Select the desired Instance ID for configuration. It is multi-optional.  
Displays Instance ID of the switch.  
Instance:  
Status:  
Displays status of the instance.  
Priority:  
Enter the priority of the switch in the instance. It is an important  
criterion on determining if the switch will be chosen as the root bridge  
in the specific instance.  
VLAN ID:  
Clear:  
Enter the VLAN ID which belongs to the corresponding instance ID.  
After modification here, the previous VLAN ID will be cleared and  
mapped to the CIST.  
Click the Clear button to clear up all VLAN IDs from the instance ID.  
The cleared VLAN ID will be automatically mapped to the CIST.  
100  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
VLAN-Instance Mapping  
VLAN ID:  
Enter the desired VLAN ID. After modification here, the new VLAN ID  
will be added to the corresponding instance ID and the previous VLAN  
ID won’t be replaced.  
Instance ID:  
Note:  
Enter the corresponding instance ID.  
In a network with both GVRP and MSTP enabled, GVRP packets are forwarded along the CIST. If  
you want to broadcast packets of a specific VLAN through GVRP, please be sure to map the VLAN  
to the CIST when configuring the MSTP VLAN-instance mapping table. For detailed introduction of  
GVRP, please refer to GVRP function page.  
7.3.3 Instance Port Config  
A port can play different roles in different spanning tree instance. On this page you can configure  
the parameters of the ports in different instance IDs as well as view status of the ports in the  
specified instance.  
Choose the menu Spanning Tree → MSTP Instance → Instance Port Config to load the  
following page.  
Figure 7-9 Instance Port Config  
101  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
The following entries are displayed on this screen:  
Port Config  
Instance ID:  
Port Select:  
Select the desired instance ID for its port configuration.  
Click the Select button to quick-select the corresponding port based  
on the port number you entered.  
Select:  
Select the desired port to specify its priority and path cost. It is  
multi-optional.  
Port:  
Displays the port number of the switch.  
Priority:  
Enter the priority of the port in the instance. It is an important criterion  
on determining if the port connected to this port will be chosen as the  
root port.  
Path Cost:  
Path Cost is used to choose the path and calculate the path costs of  
ports in an MST region. It is an important criterion on determining the  
root port. The lower value has the higher priority.  
Port Role:  
Port Status:  
LAG:  
Displays the role of the port played in the MSTP Instance.  
Displays the working status of the port.  
Displays the LAG number which the port belongs to.  
Note:  
The port status of one port in different spanning tree instances can be different.  
Global configuration Procedure for Spanning Tree function:  
Step Operation  
Description  
Make clear roles the switches Preparation.  
play in spanning tree  
1
instances: root bridge or  
designated bridge  
2
Globally configure  
parameters  
MSTP Required. Enable Spanning Tree function on the switch  
and configure MSTP parameters on Spanning Tree →  
STP Config → STP Config page.  
3
4
Configure MSTP parameters Required. Configure MSTP parameters for ports on  
for ports  
Spanning Tree → Port Config → Port Config page.  
Configure the MST region  
Required. Create MST region and configure the role the  
switch plays in the MST region on Spanning Tree →  
MSTP Instance → Region Config and Instance Config  
page.  
5
Configure MSTP parameters Optional. Configure different instances in the MST region  
for instance ports  
and configure MSTP parameters for instance ports on  
Spanning Tree → MSTP Instance → Instance Port  
Config page.  
102  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7.4 STP Security  
Configuring protection function for devices can prevent devices from any malicious attack against  
STP features. The STP Security function can be implemented on Port Protect and TC Protect  
pages.  
Port Protect function is to prevent the devices from any malicious attack against STP features.  
7.4.1 Port Protect  
On this page you can configure loop protect feature, root protect feature, TC protect feature,  
BPDU protect feature and BPDU filter feature for ports. You are suggested to enable  
corresponding protection feature for the qualified ports.  
Loop Protect  
In a stable network, a switch maintains the states of ports by receiving and processing BPDU  
packets from the upstream switch. However, when link congestions or link failures occurred to the  
network, a down stream switch does not receive BPDU packets for certain period, which results in  
spanning trees being regenerated and roles of ports being reselected, and causes the blocked  
ports to transit to forwarding state. Therefore, loops may be incurred in the network.  
The loop protect function can suppresses loops. With this function enabled, a port, regardless of  
the role it plays in instances, is always set to blocking state, when the port does not receive BPDU  
packets from the upstream switch and spanning trees are regenerated, and thereby loops can be  
prevented.  
Root Protect  
A CIST and its secondary root bridges are usually located in the high-bandwidth core region.  
Wrong configuration or malicious attacks may result in configuration BPDU packets with higher  
priorities being received by the legal root bridge, which causes the current legal root bridge to lose  
its position and network topology jitter to occur. In this case, flows that should travel along  
high-speed links may lead to low-speed links, and network congestion may occur.  
To avoid this, MSTP provides root protect function. Ports with this function enabled can only be set  
as designated ports in all spanning tree instances. When a port of this type receives BDPU  
packets with higher priority, it transits its state to blocking state and stops forwarding packets (as if  
it is disconnected from the link). The port resumes the normal state if it does not receive any  
configuration BPDU packets with higher priorities for a period of two times of forward delay.  
TC Protect  
A switch removes MAC address entries upon receiving TC-BPDU packets. If a user maliciously  
sends a large amount of TC-BPDU packets to a switch in a short period, the switch will be busy  
with removing MAC address entries, which may decrease the performance and stability of the  
network.  
To prevent the switch from frequently removing MAC address entries, you can enable the TC  
protect function on the switch. With TC protect function enabled, if the account number of the  
received TC-BPDUs exceeds the maximum number you set in the TC threshold field, the switch  
will not performs the removing operation in the TC protect cycle. Such a mechanism prevents the  
switch from frequently removing MAC address entries.  
BPDU Protect  
Ports of the switch directly connected to PCs or servers are configured as edge ports to rapidly  
transit their states. When these ports receive BPDUs, the system automatically configures these  
ports as non-edge ports and regenerates spanning trees, which may cause network topology jitter.  
103  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Normally these ports do not receive BPDUs, but if a user maliciously attacks the switch by sending  
BPDUs, network topology jitter occurs.  
To prevent this attack, MSTP provides BPDU protect function. With this function enabled on the  
switch, the switch shuts down the edge ports that receive BPDUs and reports these cases to the  
administrator. If a port is shut down, only the administrator can restore it.  
BPDU Filter  
BPDU filter function is to prevent BPDUs flood in the STP network. If a switch receives malicious  
BPDUs, it forwards these BPDUs to the other switched in the network, which may result in  
spanning trees being continuously regenerated. In this case, the switch occupying too much CPU  
or the protocol status of BPDUs is wrong.  
With BPDU filter function enabled, a port does not receive or forward BPDUs, but it sends out its  
own BPDUs. Such a mechanism prevents the switch from being attacked by BPDUs so as to  
guarantee generation the spanning trees correct.  
Choose the menu Spanning Tree → STP Security → Port Protect to load the following page.  
Figure 7-10 Port Protect  
The following entries are displayed on this screen:  
Port Protect  
Port Select:  
Click the Select button to quick-select the corresponding port based  
on the port number you entered.  
Select:  
Select the desired port for port protect configuration. It is  
multi-optional.  
104  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Port:  
Displays the port number of the switch.  
Loop Protect:  
Loop Protect is to prevent the loops in the network brought by  
recalculating STP because of link failures and network congestions.  
Root Protect:  
TC Protect:  
Root Protect is to prevent wrong network topology change caused by  
the role change of the current legal root bridge.  
TC Protect is to prevent the decrease of the performance and stability  
of the switch brought by continuously removing MAC address entries  
upon receiving TC-BPDUs in the STP network.  
BPDU Protect:  
BPDU Protect is to prevent the edge port from being attacked by  
maliciously created BPDUs  
BPDU Filter:  
LAG:  
BPDU Filter is to prevent BPDUs flood in the STP network.  
Displays the LAG number which the port belongs to.  
7.4.2 TC Protect  
When TC Protect is enabled for the port on Port Protect page, the TC threshold and TC protect  
cycle need to be configured on this page.  
Choose the menu Spanning Tree → STP Security → TC Protect to load the following page.  
Figure 7-11 TC Protect  
The following entries are displayed on this screen:  
TC Protect  
TC Threshold:  
Enter a number from 1 to 100. It is the maximum number of the  
TC-BPDUs received by the switch in a TC Protect Cycle. The  
default value is 20.  
TC Protect Cycle:  
Enter a value from 1 to 10 to specify the TC Protect Cycle. The  
default value is 5.  
7.5 Application Example for STP Function  
Network Requirements  
Switch A, B, C, D and E all support MSTP function.  
A is the central switch.  
B and C are switches in the convergence layer. D, E and F are switches in the access layer.  
There are 6 VLANs labeled as VLAN101-VLAN106 in the network.  
All switches run MSTP and belong to the same MST region.  
The data in VLAN101, 103 and 105 are transmitted in the STP with B as the root bridge. The  
data in VLAN102, 104 and 106 are transmitted in the STP with C as the root bridge.  
105  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Network Diagram  
Configuration Procedure  
Configure Switch A:  
Step Operation  
Description  
1
Configure ports  
On VLAN→802.1Q VLAN page, configure the link type  
of the related ports as Trunk, and add the ports to  
VLAN101-VLAN106. The detailed instructions can be  
found in the section 802.1Q VLAN.  
2
Enable STP function  
On Spanning Tree→STP Config→STP Config page,  
enable STP function and select MSTP version.  
On Spanning Tree→STP Config→Port Config page,  
enable MSTP function for the port.  
3
4
Configure the region name and On Spanning Tree→MSTP Instance→Region Config  
the revision of MST region  
page, configure the region as TP-LINK and keep the  
default revision setting.  
Configure  
VLAN-to-Instance On Spanning Tree→MSTP Instance→Instance  
mapping table of the MST region Config page, configure VLAN-to-Instance mapping  
table. Map VLAN 101, 103 and 105 to Instance 1; map  
VLAN 102, 104 and 106 to Instance 2.  
Configure Switch B:  
Step Operation  
Description  
1
Configure ports  
On VLAN→802.1Q VLAN page, configure the link  
type of the related ports as Trunk, and add the ports  
to VLAN101-VLAN106. The detailed instructions  
can be found in the section 802.1Q VLAN.  
2
Enable STP function  
On Spanning Tree→STP Config→STP Config  
page, enable STP function and select MSTP  
version.  
On Spanning Tree→STP Config→Port Config  
page, enable MSTP function for the port.  
106  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Step Operation  
Description  
3
Configure the region name and On Spanning Tree→MSTP Instance→Region  
the revision of MST region  
Config page, configure the region as TP-LINK and  
keep the default revision setting.  
4
Configure  
VLAN-to-Instance On Spanning Tree→MSTP Instance→Instance  
mapping table of the MST Config page, configure VLAN-to-Instance mapping  
region  
table. Map VLAN 101, 103 and 105 to Instance 1;  
map VLAN 102, 104 and 106 to Instance 2.  
5
6
Configure switch B as the root On Spanning Tree→MSTP Instance→Instance  
bridge of Instance 1  
Config page, configure the priority of Instance 1 to  
be 0.  
Configure switch B as the On Spanning Tree→MSTP Instance→Instance  
designated bridge of Instance 2 Config page, configure the priority of Instance 2 to  
be 4096.  
Configure Switch C:  
Step Operation  
Description  
1
Configure ports  
On VLAN→802.1Q VLAN page, configure the link  
type of the related ports as Trunk, and add the ports  
to VLAN101-VLAN106. The detailed instructions  
can be found in the section 802.1Q VLAN.  
2
Enable STP function  
On Spanning Tree→STP Config→STP Config  
page, enable STP function and select MSTP  
version.  
On Spanning Tree→STP Config→Port Config  
page, enable MSTP function for the port.  
3
4
Configure the region name and On Spanning Tree→MSTP Instance→Region  
the revision of MST region  
Config page, configure the region as TP-LINK and  
keep the default revision setting.  
Configure  
VLAN-to-Instance On Spanning Tree→MSTP Instance→Instance  
mapping table of the MST Config page, configure VLAN-to-Instance mapping  
region  
table. Map VLAN 101, 103 and 105 to Instance 1;  
map VLAN 102, 104 and 106 to Instance 2.  
5
6
Configure switch C as the root On Spanning Tree→MSTP Instance→Instance  
bridge of Instance 1  
Config page, configure the priority of Instance 1 to  
be 4096.  
Configure switch C as the root On Spanning Tree→MSTP Instance→Instance  
bridge of Instance 2  
Config page, configure the priority of Instance 2 to  
be 0.  
107  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Configure Switch D:  
Step Operation  
Description  
1
Configure ports  
On VLAN→802.1Q VLAN page, configure the link  
type of the related ports as Trunk, and add the ports  
to VLAN101-VLAN106. The detailed instructions  
can be found in the section 802.1Q VLAN.  
2
Enable STP function  
On Spanning Tree→STP Config→STP Config  
page, enable STP function and select MSTP  
version.  
On Spanning Tree→STP Config→Port Config  
page, enable MSTP function for the port.  
3
4
Configure the region name and On Spanning Tree→MSTP Instance→Region  
the revision of MST region  
Config page, configure the region as TP-LINK and  
keep the default revision setting.  
Configure  
VLAN-to-Instance On Spanning Tree→MSTP Instance→Instance  
mapping table of the MST Config page, configure VLAN-to-Instance mapping  
region  
table. Map VLAN 101, 103 and 105 to Instance 1;  
map VLAN 102, 104 and 106 to Instance 2.  
The configuration procedure for switch E and F is the same with that for switch D.  
The topology diagram of the two instances after the topology is stable  
For Instance 1 (VLAN 101, 103 and 105), the red paths in the following figure are connected  
links; the gray paths are the blocked links.  
For Instance 2 (VLAN 102, 104 and 106), the blue paths in the following figure are connected  
links; the gray paths are the blocked links.  
108  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Suggestion for Configuration  
Enable TC Protect function for all the ports of switches.  
Enable Root Protect function for all the ports of root bridges.  
Enable Loop Protect function for the non-edge ports.  
Enable BPDU Protect function or BPDU Filter function for the edge ports which are connected to  
the PC and server.  
Return to CONTENTS  
109  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 8 Multicast  
Multicast Overview  
In the network, packets are sent in three modes: unicast, broadcast and multicast. In unicast, the  
source server sends separate copy information to each receiver. When a large number of users  
require this information, the server must send many pieces of information with the same content to  
the users. Therefore, large bandwidth will be occupied. In broadcast, the system transmits  
information to all users in a network. Any user in the network can receive the information, no  
matter the information is needed or not.  
Point-to-multipoint multimedia business, such as video conferences and VoD (video-on-demand),  
plays an important part in the information transmission field. Suppose a point to multi-point service  
is required, unicast is suitable for networks with sparsely users, whereas broadcast is suitable for  
networks with densely distributed users. When the number of users requiring this information is  
not certain, unicast and broadcast deliver a low efficiency. Multicast solves this problem. It can  
deliver a high efficiency to send data in the point to multi-point service, which can save large  
bandwidth and reduce the network load. In multicast, the packets are transmitted in the following  
way as shown in Figure 8-1.  
Figure 8-1 Information transmission in the multicast mode  
Features of multicast:  
1. The number of receivers is not certain. Usually point-to-multipoint transmission is needed;  
2. Multiple users receiving the same information form a multicast group. The multicast  
information sender just need to send the information to the network device once;  
3. Each user can join and leave the multicast group at any time;  
4. Real time is highly demanded and certain packets drop is allowed.  
110  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
IPv4 Multicast Address  
1. IPv4 Multicast IP Address:  
As specified by IANA (Internet Assigned Numbers Authority), Class D IP addresses are used as  
destination addresses of multicast packets. The multicast IP addresses range from  
224.0.0.0~239.255.255.255. The following table displays the range and description of several  
special multicast IP addresses.  
Multicast IP address range Description  
Reserved multicast addresses for routing protocols  
and other network protocols  
224.0.0.0～224.0.0.255  
Addresses for video conferencing  
224.0.1.0～224.0.1.255  
Local management multicast addresses, which are  
used in the local network only  
239.0.0.0～239.255.255.255  
Table 8-1 Range of the special multicast IP  
2. IPv4 Multicast MAC Address:  
When a unicast packet is transmitted in an Ethernet network, the destination MAC address is the  
MAC address of the receiver. When a multicast packet is transmitted in an Ethernet network, the  
destination is not a receiver but a group with uncertain number of members, so a multicast MAC  
address, a logical MAC address, is needed to be used as the destination address.  
As stipulated by IANA, the high-order 24 bits of a multicast MAC address begins with 01-00-5E  
while the low-order 23 bits of a multicast MAC address are the low-order 23 bits of the multicast IP  
address. The mapping relationship is described as Figure 8-2.  
Figure 8-2 Mapping relationship between multicast IPv4 address and multicast MAC address  
The high-order 4 bits of the IP multicast address are 1110, identifying the multicast group. Only 23  
bits of the remaining low-order 28 bits are mapped to a multicast MAC address. In that way, 5 bits  
of the IP multicast address is not utilized. As a result, 32 IP multicast addresses are mapped to the  
same MAC addresses.  
IPv6 Multicast Address  
1. IPv6 Multicast Address  
An IPv6 multicast address is an identifier for a group of interfaces, and has the following format:  
111  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
0XFF at the start of the address identifies the address as being a multicast address.  
Flags have 4 bits:  
(1) The high-order flag is reserved, and must be initialized to 0.  
(2) R: Set to 0 to indicate this IPv6 multicast address does not contain an embedded RP  
address; set to 1 to indicate this IPv6 multicast address contains an embedded RP address.  
When this bit is set to 1, the P and T bits must also be set to 1.  
(3) P: Set to 0 to indicate this IPv6 multicast address is not based on a unicast prefix; set to 1 to  
indicate this IPv6 multicast address is based on a unicast prefix. When this bit is set to 1,  
the T bit must also be set to 1.  
(4) T: Set to 0 to indicate that this address is an IPv6 multicast address permanently assigned  
by the Internet Assigned Numbers Authority (IANA); set to 1 to indicate that this address is  
a transient, or dynamically assigned IPv6 multicast address.  
Scope is a 4-bit value used to limit the scope of the multicast group. The values are as follows:  
Value  
Indication  
reserved  
0、3、F  
1
Interface-Local scope  
Link-Local scope  
Admin-Local scope  
Site-Local scope  
unassigned  
2
4
5
6、7、9～D  
8
Organization-local scope  
Global scope  
E
Table 8-2 Indications of the Scope  
Group ID: 112 bits, IPv6 multicast group identifier that uniquely identifies an IPv6 multicast  
group in the scope defined by the Scope field.  
112  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Reserved Multicast Addresses:  
Address  
FF01::1  
FF02::1  
FF01::2  
FF02::2  
FF05::2  
FF0X::  
Indication  
All interface-local IPv6 nodes  
All link-local IPv6 nodes  
All interface-local IPv6 routers  
All link-local IPv6 routers  
All site-local IPv6 routers  
X ranges from 0 to F. These multicast addresses are  
reserved and shall never be assigned to any multicast  
group.  
Table 8-3 Reserved IPv6 Multicast Addresses  
The solicited-node multicast address is a multicast group that corresponds to an IPv6 unicast or  
anycast address. It is usually used for obtaining the Layer 2 link-layer addresses of neighboring  
nodes within the local-link or applied in IPv6 Duplicate Address Detection. A node is required to  
join the associated Solicited-Node multicast addresses for all unicast and anycast addresses that  
have been configured for the node's interfaces.  
IPv6 Solicited-Node Multicast Address Format:  
FF02:0:0:0:0:1:FFXX:XXXX  
The IPv6 solicited-node multicast address has the prefix FF02:0:0:0:0:1:FF00:0000/104  
concatenated with the 24 low-order bits of a corresponding IPv6 unicast or anycast address.  
2. IPv6 Multicast MAC Address  
The high-order 16 bits of an IPv6 multicast MAC address begins with 0x3333 while the low-order  
32 bits of an IPv6 multicast MAC address are the low-order 32 bits of the IPv6 multicast IP address.  
The mapping relationship is described as the following figure:  
Figure 8-3 Mapping relationship between multicast IPv6 address and multicast IPv6 MAC address  
The high-order 16 bits of the IP multicast address are 0x3333, identifying the IPv6 multicast group.  
The low-order 32 bits of the IPv6 multicast IP address are mapped to the multicast MAC address.  
113  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Multicast Address Table  
The switch is forwarding multicast packets based on the multicast address table. As the  
transmission of multicast packets cannot span the VLAN, the first part of the multicast address  
table is VLAN ID, based on which the received multicast packets are forwarded in the VLAN  
owning the receiving port. The multicast address table is not mapped to an egress port but a group  
port list. When forwarding a multicast packet, the switch looks up the multicast address table  
based on the destination multicast address of the multicast packet. If the corresponding entry  
cannot be found in the table, the switch will broadcast the packet in the VLAN owning the receiving  
port. If the corresponding entry can be found in the table, it indicates that the destination address  
should be a group port list, so the switch will deliver this multicast data to each port. The general  
format of the multicast address table is described as Figure 8-4 below.  
VLAN ID  
Multicast IP  
Port  
Figure 8-4 Multicast Address Table  
IGMP Snooping  
In the network, the hosts apply to the near router for joining (leaving) a multicast group by sending  
IGMP (Internet Group Management Protocol) messages. When the up-stream device forwards  
down the multicast data, the switch is responsible for sending them to the hosts. IGMP Snooping is  
a multicast control mechanism, which can be used on the switch for dynamic registration of the  
multicast group. The switch, running IGMP Snooping, manages and controls the multicast group via  
listening to and processing the IGMP messages transmitted between the hosts and the multicast  
router, thereby effectively prevents multicast groups being broadcasted in the network.  
MLD Snooping  
Multicast Listener Discovery（MLD）snooping is applied for efficient distribution of IPv6 multicast  
data to clients and routers in a Layer 2 network. With MLD snooping, IPv6 multicast data is  
selectively forwarded to a list of ports that want to receive the data, instead of being flooded to all  
ports in a VLAN. The list is constructed and maintained by snooping IPv6 multicast control packets.  
MLD snooping performs a similar function in IPv6 as IGMP snooping in IPv4.  
The Multicast module is mainly for multicast management configuration of the switch, including  
three submenus: IGMP Snooping, MLD Snooping and Multicast Table.  
8.1 IGMP Snooping  
IGMP Snooping Process  
The switch, running IGMP Snooping, listens to the IGMP messages transmitted between the host  
and the router, and tracks the IGMP messages and the registered port. When receiving IGMP  
report message, the switch adds the port to the multicast address table; when the switch listens to  
IGMP leave message from the host, the router sends the Group-Specific Query message of the  
port to check if other hosts need this multicast, if yes, the router will receive IGMP report message;  
if no, the router will receive no response from the hosts and the switch will remove the port from  
the multicast address table. The router regularly sends IGMP query messages. After receiving the  
IGMP query messages, the switch will remove the port from the multicast address table if the  
switch receives no IGMP report message from the host within a period of time.  
IGMP Messages  
The switch, running IGMP Snooping, processes the IGMP messages of different types as follows.  
1. IGMP Query Message  
IGMP query message, sent by the router, falls into two types, IGMP general query message and  
IGMP group-specific-query message. The router regularly sends IGMP general message to query  
114  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
if the multicast groups contain any member. When receiving IGMP leave message, the receiving  
port of the router will send IGMP group-specific-query message to the multicast group and the  
switch will forward IGMP group-specific-query message to check if other members in the multicast  
group of the port need this multicast.  
When receiving IGMP general query message, the switch will forward them to all other ports in the  
VLAN owning the receiving port. The receiving port will be processed: if the receiving port is not a  
router port yet, it will be added to the router port list with its router port time specified; if the  
receiving port is already a router port, its router port time will be directly reset.  
When receiving IGMP group-specific-query message, the switch will send the group-specific query  
message to the members of the multicast group being queried.  
2. IGMP Report Message  
IGMP report message is sent by the host when it applies for joining a multicast group or responses  
to the IGMP query message from the router.  
When receiving IGMP report message, the switch will send the report message via the router port  
in the VLAN as well as analyze the message to get the address of the multicast group the host  
applies for joining. The receiving port will be processed: if the receiving port is a new member port,  
it will be added to the multicast address table with its member port time specified; if the receiving  
port is already a member port, its member port time will be directly reset.  
3. IGMP Leave Message  
The host, running IGMPv1, does not send IGMP leave message when leaving a multicast group,  
as a result, the switch cannot get the leave information of the host momentarily. However, after  
leaving the multicast group, the host does not send IGMP report message any more, so the switch  
will remove the port from the corresponding multicast address table when its member port time  
times out. The host, running IGMPv2 or IGMPv3, sends IGMP leave message when leaving a  
multicast group to inform the multicast router of its leaving.  
When receiving IGMP leave message, the switch will forward IGMP group-specific-query message  
to check if other members in the multicast group of the port need this multicast and reset the  
member port time to the leave time. When the leave time times out, the switch will remove the port  
from the corresponding multicast group. If no other member is in the group after the port is  
removed, the switch will send IGMP leave message to the router and remove the whole multicast  
group.  
IGMP Snooping Fundamentals  
1. Ports  
Router Port: Indicates the switch port directly connected to the multicast router.  
Member Port: Indicates a switch port connected to a multicast group member.  
2. Timers  
Router Port Time: Within the time, if the switch does not receive IGMP query message from the  
router port, it will consider this port is not a router port any more. The default value is 300 seconds.  
Member Port Time: Within the time, if the switch does not receive IGMP report message from the  
member port, it will consider this port is not a member port any more. The default value is 260  
seconds.  
Leave Time: Indicates the interval between the switch receiving a leave message from a host and  
the switch removing the host from the multicast groups. The default value is 1 second.  
115  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The IGMP Snooping function can be implemented on the following pages: Snooping Config,  
VLAN Config, Port Config, IP-Range, Multicast VLAN, Static Multicast IP and Packet  
Statistics.  
8.1.1 Snooping Config  
To configure the IGMP Snooping on the switch, please firstly configure IGMP global configuration  
and related parameters on this page.  
If the multicast address of the received multicast data is not in the multicast address table, the  
switch will broadcast the data in the VLAN. When Unknown Multicast Discard feature is enabled,  
the switch drops the received unknown multicast so as to save the bandwidth and enhance the  
process efficiency of the system. Please configure this feature appropriate to your needs.  
Choose the menu Multicast →IGMP Snooping →Snooping Config to load the following page.  
Figure 8-5 Basic Config  
The following entries are displayed on this screen:  
Global Config  
IGMP Snooping:  
Select Enable/Disable IGMP Snooping function globally on the  
switch.  
Unknown Multicast:  
Select the operation for the switch to process unknown multicast,  
Forward or Discard.  
IGMP Snooping Status  
Description:  
Member:  
Displays IGMP Snooping status.  
Displays the member of the corresponding status.  
8.1.2 VLAN Config  
Multicast groups established by IGMP Snooping are based on VLANs. On this page you can  
configure different IGMP parameters for different VLANs.  
116  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Choose the menu Multicast→IGMP Snooping→VLAN Config to load the following page.  
Figure 8-6 VLAN Config  
The following entries are displayed on this screen:  
VLAN Config  
VLAN ID:  
Enter the VLAN ID to enable IGMP Snooping for the desired  
VLAN.  
Router Port Time:  
Member Port Time:  
Leave Time:  
Specify the aging time of the router port. Within this time, if the  
switch doesn’t receive IGMP query message from the router port,  
it will consider this port is not a router port any more.  
Specify the aging time of the member port. Within this time, if the  
switch doesn’t receive IGMP report message from the member  
port, it will consider this port is not a member port any more.  
Specify the interval between the switch receiving a leave message  
from a host and the switch removing the host from the multicast  
groups.  
Static Router Ports:  
Enter the static router port which is mainly used in the network  
with stable topology.  
VLAN Table  
VLAN ID Select:  
Click the Select button to quick-select the corresponding VLAN ID  
based on the ID number you entered.  
Select:  
Select the desired VLAN ID for configuration. It is multi-optional.  
Displays the VLAN ID.  
VLAN ID:  
Router Port Time:  
Displays the router port time of the VLAN.  
117  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Member Port Time:  
Leave Time:  
Displays the member port time of the VLAN.  
Displays the leave time of the VLAN.  
Displays the router port of the VLAN.  
Router Port:  
Note:  
The settings here will be invalid when multicast VLAN is enabled  
Configuration procedure:  
Step Operation  
Description  
Enable IGMP Snooping Required. Enable IGMP Snooping globally on the switch  
function and for the port on Multicast→IGMP  
Snooping→Snooping Config and Port Config page.  
Configure the multicast Optional. Configure the multicast parameters for VLANs on  
1
2
parameters for VLANs  
Multicast→IGMP Snooping→VLAN Config page.  
If a VLAN has no multicast parameters configuration, it  
indicates the IGMP Snooping is not enabled in the VLAN,  
thus the multicast data in the VLAN will be broadcasted.  
8.1.3 Port Config  
On this page you can configure the IGMP feature for ports of the switch.  
When the switch receives IGMP report message, it examines the multicast filtering IP ID  
configured on the access port to determine if the port can join the multicast group. If the multicast  
IP is not filtered, the switch will add the port to the forward port list of the multicast group.  
Otherwise, the switch will drop the IGMP report message. In that way, you can control the  
multicast groups that users can access.  
Choose the menu Multicast →IGMP Snooping →Port Config to load the following page.  
Figure 8-7 Port Config  
118  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
The following entries are displayed on this screen:  
Port Config  
Port Select:  
Click the Select button to quick-select the corresponding port  
based on the port number you entered.  
Select:  
Select the desired port for IGMP Snooping feature configuration. It  
is multi-optional.  
Port:  
Displays the port of the switch.  
IGMP Snooping:  
Fast Leave:  
Select Enable/Disable IGMP Snooping for the desired port.  
Select Enable/Disable Fast Leave feature for the desired port. If  
Fast Leave is enabled for a port, the switch will immediately  
remove this port from the multicast group upon receiving IGMP  
leave messages.  
Filter:  
Select Enable/Disable multicast filtering feature on the port.  
Action Mode:  
Select the action mode to process multicast packets when the  
multicast IP is in the filtering IP-range.  
Permit: Only the multicast packets whose multicast IP is in the  
IP-range will be processed.  
Deny: Only the multicast packets whose multicast IP is not in  
the IP-range will be processed.  
Bound IP-Range  
(ID):  
Enter the IP-range ID the port will be bound to. The binding  
IP-range IDs of the port can be cleared by entering null value in  
this field and click Apply button to submit the configuration.  
Max Groups:  
Specify the maximum number of multicast groups to prevent some  
ports taking up too much bandwidth.  
LAG:  
Note:  
Displays the LAG number which the port belongs to.  
1. Fast Leave on the port is effective only when the host supports IGMPv2 or IGMPv3.  
2. When both Fast Leave feature and Unknown Multicast Discard feature are enabled, the  
leaving of a user connected to a port owning multi-user will result in the other users  
intermitting the multicast business.  
3. Multicast Filter feature can only have effect on the VLAN with IGMP Snooping enabled.  
4. Multicast Filter feature has no effect on static multicast IP.  
5. Up to 15 IP-Ranges can be bound to one port.  
8.1.4 IP-Range  
On this page you can figure the desired IP-ranges to be filtered.  
119  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Choose the menu Multicast→IGMP Snooping→IP-Range to load the following page.  
Figure 8-8 Multicast Filter  
The following entries are displayed on this screen:  
Create IP-Range  
IP Range ID:  
Enter the IP-range ID.  
Start Multicast IP:  
End Multicast IP:  
IP-Range Table  
IP-Range ID Select:  
Enter start multicast IP of the IP-range you set.  
Enter end multicast IP of the IP-range you set.  
Click the Select button to quick-select the corresponding IP-range  
ID based on the ID number you entered.  
Select:  
Select the desired entry to delete or modify the corresponding  
IP-range. It is multi-optional.  
IP-Range ID:  
Displays IP-range ID.  
Start Multicast IP:  
End Multicast IP:  
Displays start multicast IP of the IP-range.  
Displays end multicast IP of the IP-range.  
8.1.5 Multicast VLAN  
In old multicast transmission mode, when users in different VLANs apply for join the same  
multicast group, the multicast router will duplicate this multicast information and deliver each  
VLAN owning a receiver one copy. This mode wastes a lot of bandwidth.  
The problem above can be solved by configuring a multicast VLAN. By adding switch ports to the  
multicast VLAN and enabling IGMP Snooping, you can make users in different VLANs share the  
same multicast VLAN. This saves the bandwidth since multicast streams are transmitted only  
within the multicast VLAN and also guarantees security because the multicast VLAN is isolated  
from user VLANS.  
120  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Before configuring a multicast VLAN, you should firstly configure a VLAN as multicast VLAN and  
add the corresponding ports to the VLAN on the 802.1Q VLAN page. If the multicast VLAN is  
enabled, the multicast configuration for other VLANs on the VLAN Config page will be invalid, that  
is, the multicast streams will be transmitted only within the multicast VLAN.  
Choose the menu Multicast→IGMP Snooping→Multicast VLAN to load the following page.  
Figure 8-9 Multicast VLAN  
The following entries are displayed on this screen:  
Multicast VLAN  
Multicast VLAN:  
VLAN ID:  
Select Enable/Disable Multicast VLAN feature.  
Enter the VLAN ID of the multicast VLAN.  
Router Port Time:  
Specify the aging time of the router port. Within this time, if the  
switch doesn’t receive IGMP query message from the router port,  
it will consider this port is not a router port any more.  
Member Port Time:  
Leave Time:  
Specify the aging time of the member port. Within this time, if the  
switch doesn’t receive IGMP report message from the member  
port, it will consider this port is not a member port any more.  
Specify the interval between the switch receiving a leave message  
from a host, and the switch removing the host from the multicast  
groups.  
Router Ports:  
Note:  
Enter the static router port which is mainly used in the network  
with stable topology.  
1. The router port should be in the multicast VLAN, otherwise the member ports cannot receive  
multicast streams.  
2. The Multicast VLAN won't take effect unless you first complete the configuration for the  
corresponding VLAN owning the port on the 802.1Q VLAN page.  
3. It is recommended to choose GENERAL as the link type of the member ports in the multicast  
VLAN.  
121  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4. Configure the link type of the router port in the multicast VLAN as TRUNK or configure the  
egress rule as TAG and the link type as GENERAL otherwise all the member ports in the  
multicast VLAN cannot receive multicast streams.  
5. After a multicast VLAN is created, all the IGMP packets will be processed only within the  
multicast VLAN.  
Configuration procedure:  
Step Operation  
Description  
1
2
Enable IGMP Snooping Required. Enable IGMP Snooping globally on the switch  
function  
and  
for  
the  
port  
on  
Multicast→IGMP  
Snooping→Snooping Config and Port Config page.  
Create a multicast VLAN  
Required. Create a multicast VLAN and add all the member  
ports and router ports to the VLAN on the VLAN→802.1Q  
VLAN page.  
Configure the link type of the member ports as  
GENERAL.  
Configure the link type of the router ports as TRUNK or  
configure the egress rule as tagged GENERAL.  
3
4
Configure parameters for Optional. Enable and configure a multicast VLAN on the  
multicast VLAN  
Multicast→IGMP Snooping→Multicast VLAN page.  
It is recommended to keep the default time parameters.  
Look over the configuration  
If it is successfully configured, the VLAN ID of the multicast  
VLAN will be displayed in the IGMP Snooping Status table  
on the Multicast→IGMP Snooping→Snooping Config  
page.  
Application Example for Multicast VLAN:  
Network Requirements  
Multicast source sends multicast streams via the router, and the streams are transmitted to user A  
and user B through the switch.  
Router: Its WAN port is connected to the multicast source; its LAN port is connected to the switch.  
The multicast packets are transmitted in VLAN3.  
Switch: Port 3 is connected to the router and the packets are transmitted in VLAN3; port 4 is  
connected to user A and the packets are transmitted in VLAN4; port 5 is connected to user B and  
the packets are transmitted in VLAN5.  
User A: Connected to Port 4 of the switch.  
User B: Connected to port 5 of the switch.  
Configure a multicast VLAN, and user A and B receive multicast streams through the multicast  
VLAN.  
122  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Network Diagram  
Configuration Procedure  
Step Operation  
Description  
1
Create VLANs  
Create three VLANs with the VLAN ID 3, 4 and 5 respectively,  
and specify the description of VLAN3 as Multicast VLAN on  
VLAN→802.1Q VLAN page.  
2
Configure ports  
On VLAN→802.1Q VLAN function pages.  
For port 3, configure its link type as GENERAL and its egress rule  
as TAG, and add it to VLAN3, VLAN4 and VLAN5.  
For port 4, configure its link type as GENERAL and its egress rule  
as UNTAG, and add it to VLAN3 and VLAN 4.  
For port 5, configure its link type as GENERAL and its egress rule  
as UNTAG, and add it to VLAN3 and VLAN 5.  
3
Enable  
IGMP Enable IGMP Snooping function globally on Multicast→IGMP  
Snooping function  
Snooping→Snooping Config page. Enable IGMP Snooping  
function for port 3, port4 and port 5 on Multicast→IGMP  
Snooping→Port Config page.  
4
5
Enable  
VLAN  
Multicast Enable Multicast VLAN, configure the VLAN ID of a multicast  
VLAN as 3 and keep the other parameters as default on  
Multicast→IGMP Snooping→Multicast VLAN page.  
Check Multicast VLAN 3-5 and Multicast VLAN 3 will be displayed in the IGMP  
Snooping Status table on the Multicast→IGMP  
Snooping→Snooping Config page.  
8.1.6 Static Multicast IP  
Static Multicast IP table, isolated from dynamic multicast group and multicast filter, is not learned  
by IGMP Snooping. It can enhance the quality and security for information transmission in some  
fixed multicast groups.  
123  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Choose the menu Multicast→IGMP Snooping→Static Multicast IP to load the following page.  
Figure 8-10 Static Multicast IP Table  
The following entries are displayed on this screen:  
Create Static Multicast  
Multicast IP:  
Enter static multicast IP address.  
VLAN ID:  
Enter the VLAN ID of the multicast IP.  
Enter the forward port of the multicast group.  
Forward Port:  
Search Option  
Search Option:  
Select the rules for displaying multicast IP table to find the desired  
entries quickly.  
All: Displays all static multicast IP entries.  
Multicast IP: Enter the multicast IP address the desired entry  
must carry.  
VLAN ID: Enter the VLAN ID the desired entry must carry.  
Port: Enter the port number the desired entry must carry.  
Static Multicast IP Table  
Select:  
Select the desired entry to delete the corresponding static  
multicast IP. It is multi-optional.  
Multicast IP:  
VLAN ID:  
Displays the multicast IP.  
Displays the VLAN ID of the multicast group.  
Displays the forward port of the multicast group.  
Forward Port:  
8.1.7 Packet Statistics  
On this page you can view the multicast data traffic on each port of the switch, which facilitates you  
to monitor the IGMP messages in the network.  
124  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Choose the menu Multicast→IGMP Snooping→Packet Statistics to load the following page.  
Figure 8-11 Packet Statistics  
The following entries are displayed on this screen:  
Auto Refresh  
Auto Refresh:  
Select Enable/Disable auto refresh feature.  
Refresh Period:  
Enter the time from 3 to 300 in seconds to specify the auto refresh  
period.  
IGMP Statistics  
Port Select:  
Click the Select button to quick-select the corresponding port  
based on the port number you entered.  
Port:  
Displays the port number of the switch.  
Query Packet:  
Report Packet (V1):  
Report Packet (V2):  
Report Packet (V3):  
Leave Packet:  
Displays the number of query packets the port received.  
Displays the number of IGMPv1 report packets the port received.  
Displays the number of IGMPv2 report packets the port received.  
Displays the number of IGMPv3 report packets the port received.  
Displays the number of leave packets the port received.  
125  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Error Packet:  
Displays the number of error packets the port received.  
8.2 MLD Snooping  
MLD Snooping  
Multicast Listener Discovery（MLD）snooping is applied for efficient distribution of IPv6 multicast  
data to clients and routers in a Layer 2 network. With MLD snooping, IPv6 multicast data is  
selectively forwarded to a list of ports that want to receive the data, instead of being flooded to all  
ports in a VLAN. The list is constructed and maintained by snooping IPv6 multicast control packets.  
MLD snooping performs a similar function in IPv6 as IGMP snooping in IPv4.  
The switch, running MLD Snooping, listens to the MLD messages transmitted between the host  
and the router, and tracks the MLD messages and the registered port. When receiving MLD report  
message, the switch adds the port to the multicast address table; when the switch listens to MLD  
Done message from the host, the router sends the Multicast-Address-Specific Query message of  
the port to check if other hosts need this multicast, if yes, the switch will receive MLD report  
message; if no, the switch will receive no response from the hosts and the switch will remove the  
port from the multicast address table. The router regularly sends MLD query messages. After  
receiving the MLD query messages, the switch will remove the port from the multicast address  
table if the switch receives no MLD report message from the host within a period of time.  
MLD Snooping Fundamentals  
1. MLD Messages  
MLD Queries：MLD Queries include General Queries and Multicast-Address-Specific Queries  
(MASQs) and are sent out from the MLD router.  
MLD Reports：When a host wants to join a multicast group or responds to the MLD queries, it will  
send out an MLD report.  
MLD Done Messages：When a host wants to leave a multicast group, it will send out an MLD  
Done message to inform the IPv6 multicast routers of its leave.  
2. Relevant Ports of the Switch  
Router Port: Indicates the switch port that links toward the MLD router.  
Member Port: Indicates the switch port that links toward the multicast members.  
3. Timers  
Router Port Aging Time: Within this time, if the switch does not receive MLD queries from the  
router port, it will delete this port from the router port list. The default value is 260 seconds.  
Member Port Aging Time: Within this time, if the switch does not receive MLD reports from the  
member port, it will delete this port from the MLD multicast group. The default value is 260  
seconds.  
General Query Interval: The interval between the multicast router sends out general queries.  
Last Listener Query Interval: The interval between the switch sends out MASQs.  
Last Listener Query Count: The number of MASQs that the switch sends before aging out a  
multicast address when there is no MLD report response.  
126  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
MLD Snooping Process  
1. General Query  
The MLD router regularly sends MLD general queries to query if the multicast groups contain any  
members. When receiving MLD general queries, the switch will forward them to all other ports in  
the VLAN. The receiving port will be processed: if the receiving port is not a router port yet, it will  
be added to the router port list with its router port aging time specified; if the receiving port is  
already a router port, its router port aging time will be directly reset.  
2. Membership Report  
The host will send MLD report messages when it applies for joining a multicast group or responds  
to the MLD query message from the router.  
When receiving MLD report message, the switch will forward the report message via the router  
port in the VLAN, and analyze the message to get the address of the multicast group the host  
applies for joining. If the multicast group does not exist, it will create the group entry. The receiving  
port will be processed: if the receiving port is a new member port, it will be added to the forward list  
of the multicast group with its member port aging time specified; if the receiving port is already a  
member port, its member port aging time will be directly reset.  
3. Member Leave  
The host will send MLD Done message when leaving a multicast group to inform the router of its  
leaving.  
When Immediate Leave is not enabled in a VLAN and a Done message is received on a port of  
this VLAN, the switch will generate MASQs on this port to check if there are other members in this  
multicast group. The user can control when a port membership is removed for an exiting address  
in terms of the number and interval of MASQs. If there is no Report message received from this  
port during the switch maximum response time, the port on which the MASQ was sent is deleted  
from the multicast group. If the deleted port is the last member of the multicast group, the multicast  
group is also deleted. The switch will send Done message to the router ports of the VLAN.  
In IPv6，Layer 2 switches can use Multicast Listener Discovery (MLD) Snooping to limit the  
flooding of multicast traffic by dynamically configuring Layer 2 interfaces so that IPv6 multicast  
data is selectively forwarded to a list of ports that want to receive the data. This list is constructed  
by snooping IPv6 multicast control packets.  
The MLD Snooping function can be implemented on Global Config, VLAN Config, Filter Config,  
Port Config, Static Multicast, Querier Config and Packet Statistics pages.  
8.2.1 Global Config  
To configure the MLD Snooping on the switch, please firstly configure MLD global configuration  
and related parameters on this page.  
127  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chose the menu Multicast→MLD Snooping→Global Config to load the following page.  
The following entries are displayed on this screen:  
Global Config  
MLD Snooping:  
Enable or disable MLD Snooping function globally.  
Report  
Suppression:  
Message  
Enable or disable Report Message Suppression function globally.  
If this function is enabled, the first Report Message from the  
listener will forward to the router ports while the subsequent  
Report Message from the group will be suppressed to reduce the  
MLD traffic in the network.  
Unknown  
Filter:  
Multicast  
Choose to forward or drop unknown multicast data.  
Unknown IPv6 multicast packets refer to those packets without  
corresponding forwarding entries in the IPv6 multicast table:  
When unknown multicast filter is enabled, the switch will discard  
all received unknown IPv6 multicast packets;  
When unknown multicast filer is disabled, all unknown IPv6  
multicast packets are flooded in the ingress VLAN.  
Router Port Aging  
Time:  
Enter the global router port aging time. If the router port does not  
receive Query Message in the aging time, it will be aged.  
Member Port Aging  
Time:  
Enter the global member port aging time. If the member port  
does not receive Report Message in the aging time, it will be  
aged.  
Last Listener Query  
Interval:  
Enter the Last Listener Query interval time. When the multicast  
group has no more member ports, it will send the Specific Query  
Message with this interval time to check whether there is another  
listener.  
Last Listener Query  
Count:  
Enter the Last Listener Query numbers. When the multicast  
group has no more member ports, it will send this numbers of  
Specific Query Message to check whether there is another  
listener.  
128  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Multicast VLAN:  
Enable or disable multicast VLAN function. When multicast  
VLAN is enabled, all multicast data will forward in this VLAN if  
this port belongs to the VLAN.  
Multicast VLAN ID:  
Note:  
Enter the multicast VLAN ID.  
1. When Unknown Multicast Filter is configured, the Unknown Multicast function in IGMP  
Snooping is also configured at the same time.  
2. Configurations of the Router Port Aging Time and Member Port Aging Time in 8.2.2 VLAN  
Config override their global configurations here.  
3. Before creating a Multicast VLAN, you should enable the MLD snooping function in this VLAN  
in 8.2.2 VLAN Config.  
Configuration Procedure of Multicast VLAN:  
Step Operation  
Description  
1
Create VLAN.  
Required. On the VLAN →802.1Q VLAN →VLAN Config  
page, click the Create button to create a VLAN. Enter the  
VLAN ID and the description for the VLAN. Meanwhile,  
specify its member ports.  
2
3
Enable  
globally.  
MLD  
Snooping Required. On the Multicast →MLD Snooping →Global  
Config page, enable the MLD Snooping function globally.  
Enable MLD Snooping in the Required. On the Multicast →MLD Snooping →VLAN  
VLAN.  
Config page, specify the VLAN ID as the VLAN created in  
step 1.  
4
Enable the Multicast VLAN. Required. On the Multicast →MLD Snooping →Global  
Config page, enable the Multicast VLAN function and  
specify the Multicast VLAN ID as the VLAN specified in  
Step 1.  
8.2.2 VLAN Config  
On this page you can configure MLD Snooping function with each single VLAN. You need to  
create VLAN if you want to enable MLD Snooping function in this VLAN.  
Choose the menu Multicast→MLD Snooping→VLAN Config to load the following page.  
129  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
The following entries are displayed on this screen:  
VLAN Config  
VLAN ID:  
Enter the VLAN ID you want to configure.  
Router Port Aging  
Time:  
Enter the router port aging time for this VLAN. It will override the  
global configured aging time.  
Member Port Aging  
Time:  
Enter the member port aging time for this VLAN. It will override  
the global configured aging time.  
Immediate Leave:  
Enable or disable immediate leave function for this VLAN. If this  
function is enabled, the multicast group member port will be  
deleted immediately if Done Message receive, not sending  
Specific Query for listener checking.  
Static Router Ports:  
VLAN Table  
Enter the static router ports for this VLAN. Static router ports will  
not be aged.  
Select:  
Select the VLAN ID you want to change.  
Displays the VLAN ID.  
VLAN ID:  
Router Port Aging  
Time:  
Displays the router port aging time of this VLAN.  
Member Port Aging  
Time:  
Displays the member port aging time of this VLAN.  
Immediate Leave:  
Displays the immediate leave function of this VLAN. You should  
only use the Immediate-Leave feature when there is a single  
receiver present on every port in the VLAN. If the immediate  
leave function is enabled on a port with several listeners in the  
same IPv6 multicast group, these listeners will fail to receive the  
IPv6 multicast packets after one of them leave this group.  
Static Router Ports:  
Displays the static router ports of this VLAN.  
130  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Dynamic Router  
Displays the dynamic router ports of this VLAN.  
Ports：  
Note:  
1. The MLD snooping function in a VLAN will take effect when global MLD Snooping function is  
enabled in 8.2.1 Global Config and the VLAN is created in Chapter 6 VLAN.  
2. When the router port aging time or member port aging time is set for a VLAN, this value  
overrides the value configured globally in 8.2.1 Global Config.  
8.2.3 Filter Config  
When the switch receives MLD report messages, it examines the multicast filtering ID and filter  
mode configured on the access port to determine if the port can join the multicast group. If the port  
can join the multicast group, the switch will add the port to the forward ports list of the multicast  
group. Otherwise, the switch will drop the MLD report messages. In that way, you can control the  
multicast groups that users can join in.  
Choose the menu Multicast→MLD Snooping→Filter Config to load the following page.  
The following entries are displayed on this screen:  
Filter Config  
Filter ID:  
Enter the Filter ID which identifies the filter.  
Enter the start of the IP range.  
Start Multicast IP:  
End Multicast IP:  
Enter the end of the IP range.  
Filter List  
Select:  
Select the filter ID you want to change.  
Displays the filter ID number.  
Filter ID:  
Start Multicast IP:  
End Multicast IP:  
Displays the start of the IP range.  
Displays the end of the IP range.  
Note:  
The max number of filter entries is 30.  
131  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
8.2.4 Port Config  
On this page you can configure MLD Snooping function with each single port.  
Choose the menu Multicast→MLD Snooping→Port Config to load the following page.  
The following entries are displayed on this screen:  
Port Config  
Select:  
Port:  
Select the port you want to configure.  
Displays the port number.  
Filter:  
Choose to enable or disable filter function in this port.  
Filter Mode:  
Choose the filter action mode. You can accept or  
refuse Report message with specific multicast groups  
specify by the filter IDs.  
Filter IDs:  
Enter the filter IDs with this port. The filter IDs are  
configured in Filer Config. The format is 1,4,12.  
The max number of filter entries on each port is 15.  
Max Groups:  
LAG:  
Enter the maximum groups which the port can join as  
the member port. It ranges from 0 to 256.  
Displays the LAG number.  
Note:  
If the Max Groups value is set less than the current value, some groups may be deleted to satisfy  
the restriction.  
8.2.5 Static Multicast  
On this page you can configure static multicast groups. The multicast groups configured here are  
not learned by MLD Snooping and independent of dynamic multicast groups and multicast filters.  
The static multicast member ports won’t age out.  
132  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Choose the menu Multicast→MLD Snooping→Static Multicast to load the following page.  
The following entries are displayed on this screen:  
Static Multicast Config  
VLAN ID:  
Enter the VLAN ID.  
Multicast IP:  
Member Ports:  
Enter the multicast IP address.  
Enter the member ports of the static multicast group.  
Static Multicast List  
Select:  
Select the static multicast group you want to change.  
Displays the VLAN ID.  
VLAN ID:  
Multicast IP:  
Member Ports:  
Displays the multicast group IP address.  
Displays the member ports of the static multicast  
group.  
8.2.6 Querier Config  
In an IPv6 multicast network that runs MLD, a Layer 3 multicast device works as an MLD querier to  
send out MLD queries and manage the multicast table. But MLD is not supported by the devices in  
Layer 2 network. MLD Snooping Querier can act as an MLD Router in Layer 2 network. It can help  
to create and maintain multicast forwarding table on the switch with the Query messages it  
generates.  
Choose the menu Multicast→MLD Snooping→Querier Config to load the following page.  
133  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
The following entries are displayed on this screen:  
Querier Config  
VLAN ID:  
Enter the VLAN ID which you want to start Querier.  
Maximum Response  
Time:  
Enter the value of Maximum Response Time field of  
the Query message.  
Query Interval:  
Enter the Query message interval time. The Querier  
will send General Query Message with this interval.  
Query Source IP:  
Enter the Query Message source IP address. It is  
FE80::02FF:FFFF:FE00:0001 by default.  
Querier List  
Select:  
Select the Querier you want to change.  
Displays the VLAN ID.  
VLAN ID:  
Maximum Response  
Time:  
Displays the value of Maximum Response Time field  
of the Query message.  
Query Interval:  
Displays the Query message interval time.  
Query Source IP:  
Displays the Query message source IP address.  
Note:  
The MLD Snooping Querier doesn’t participate in the MLD Querier Election, but an MLD Snooping  
Querier will affect the MLD Querier Election in the IPv6 network running MLD because of its  
relatively smaller IP address.  
8.2.7 Packet Statistics  
On this page you can view the MLD packets the switch received. It helps you to monitor the MLD  
Snooping function.  
134  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Choose the menu Multicast→MLD Snooping→Packet Statistics to load the following page.  
The following entries are displayed on this screen:  
Auto Fresh  
Auto Fresh:  
Select Enable/Disable auto fresh feature.  
Fresh Period:  
Enter the time from 3 to 300 seconds to specify the  
auto fresh period.  
MLD Packet Statistics  
Received MLD  
Query :  
Displays the number of MLD Query packets the  
switch has received.  
Received MLDv1  
Report:  
Displays the number of MLDv1 Report packets which  
the switch has received.  
Received MLDv2  
Report:  
Displays the number of MLDv2 Report packets which  
the switch has received.  
Received MLD Done:  
Displays the number of MLD Done packets which the  
switch has received.  
Send MLD  
Spec-Query:  
Displays the number of MLD Specific Query packets  
which the switch has sent.  
135  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Error Packet:  
Displays the number of error packets which the switch  
has received.  
8.3 Multicast Table  
In a network, receivers can join different multicast groups appropriate to their needs. The switch  
forwards multicast streams based on IPv4/IPv6 multicast address table.  
The Multicast Table function is implemented on the IPv4 Multicast Table and IPv6 Multicast  
Table pages.  
8.3.1 IPv4 Multicast Table  
On this page you can view the information of the multicast groups already on the switch. Multicast  
IP addresses range from 224.0.0.0 to 239.255.255.255. The range for receivers to join is from  
224.0.1.0 to 239.255.255.255.  
Choose the menu Multicast→Multicast Table→IPv4 Multicast Table to load the following page.  
The following entries are displayed on this screen:  
Search Option  
Multicast IP:  
VLAN ID:  
Port:  
Enter the multicast IP address the desired entry must carry.  
Enter the VLAN ID the desired entry must carry.  
Select the port number the desired entry must carry.  
Select the type the desired entry must carry.  
Type:  
All: Displays all multicast IP entries.  
Static: Displays all static multicast IP entries.  
Dynamic: Displays all dynamic multicast IP entries.  
Multicast IP Table  
Multicast IP:  
VLAN ID:  
Displays multicast IP address.  
Displays the VLAN ID of the multicast group.  
Forward Port:  
Type:  
Displays the forward port of the multicast group.  
Displays the type of the multicast IP.  
136  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
8.3.2 IPv6 Multicast Table  
This page displays the multicast groups which already on the switch.  
Choose the menu Multicast→Multicast Table→IPv6 Multicast Table to load the following page.  
The following entries are displayed on this screen:  
Search Option  
Multicast IP:  
Enter the multicast IP address the desired entry must  
carry.  
VLAN ID:  
Port:  
Enter the VLAN ID the desired entry must carry.  
Select the port number the desired entry must carry.  
Select the type the desired entry must carry.  
Type:  
All: Displays all multicast IP entries.  
Static: Displays all static multicast IP entries.  
Dynamic: Displays all dynamic multicast IP entries.  
Multicast IP Table  
Multicast IP:  
VLAN ID:  
Displays the multicast IP.  
Displays the VLAN ID.  
Forward Ports:  
Type:  
Displays the forward ports of the group.  
Displays the type of the group.  
Note:  
The max number of multicast entries is 256. The IPv4 multicast table and IPv6 multicast table  
share the total entry number of 256.  
Return to CONTENTS  
137  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter 9 QoS  
QoS (Quality of Service) functions to provide different quality of service for various network  
applications and requirements and optimize the bandwidth resource distribution so as to provide a  
network service experience of a better quality.  
QoS  
This switch classifies the ingress packets, maps the packets to different priority queues and then  
forwards the packets according to specified scheduling algorithms to implement QoS function.  
Figure 9-1 QoS function  
Traffic classification: Identifies packets conforming to certain characters according to certain  
rules.  
Map: The user can map the ingress packets to different priority queues based on the priority  
modes. This switch implements three priority modes based on port, on 802.1P and on DSCP.  
Queue scheduling algorithm: When the network is congested, the problem that many packets  
compete for resources must be solved, usually in the way of queue scheduling. The switch  
supports four schedule modes: SP, WRR, SP+WRR and Equ.  
Priority Mode  
This switch implements three priority modes based on port, on 802.1P and on DSCP. By default, the  
priority mode based on port is enabled and the other two modes are optional.  
1. Port Priority  
Port priority is just a property of the port. After port priority is configured, the data stream will be  
mapped to the egress queues according to the CoS of the port and the mapping relationship  
between CoS and queues.  
138  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
2. 802.1P Priority  
Figure 9-2 802.1Q frame  
As shown in the figure above, each 802.1Q Tag has a Pri field, comprising 3 bits. The 3-bit priority  
field is 802.1p priority in the range of 0 to 7. 802.1P priority determines the priority of the packets  
based on the Pri value. On the Web management page of the switch, you can configure different  
priority tags mapping to the corresponding priority levels, and then the switch determine which  
packet is sent preferentially when forwarding packets. The switch processes untagged packets  
based on the default priority mode.  
3. DSCP Priority  
Figure 9-3 IP datagram  
As shown in the figure above, the ToS (Type of Service) in an IP header contains 8 bits. The first  
three bits indicate IP precedence in the range of 0 to 7. RFC2474 re-defines the ToS field in the IP  
packet header, which is called the DS field. The first six bits (bit 0-bit 5) of the DS field indicate  
DSCP precedence in the range of 0 to 63. The last 2 bits (bit 6 and bit 7) are reserved. On the Web  
management page, you can configure different DS field mapping to the corresponding priority  
levels. Non-IP datagram with 802.1Q tag are mapped to different priority levels based on 802.1P  
priority mode; the untagged non-IP datagram are mapped based on port priority mode.  
Schedule Mode  
When the network is congested, the problem that many packets compete for resources must be  
solved, usually in the way of queue scheduling. The switch implements four scheduling queues,  
TC0, TC1, TC2 and TC3. TC0 has the lowest priority while TC3 has the highest priority. The switch  
provides four schedule modes: SP, WRR, SP+WRR and Equ.  
1. SP-Mode: Strict-Priority Mode. In this mode, the queue with higher priority will occupy the  
whole bandwidth. Packets in the queue with lower priority are sent only when the queue with  
higher priority is empty. The switch has four egress queues labeled as TC0, TC1, TC2 and  
TC3. In SP mode, their priorities increase in order. TC3 has the highest priority. The  
disadvantage of SP queue is that: if there are packets in the queues with higher priority for a  
long time in congestion, the packets in the queues with lower priority will be “starved to death”  
because they are not served.  
139  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Figure 9-4 SP-Mode  
2. WRR-Mode: Weight Round Robin Mode. In this mode, packets in all the queues are sent in  
order based on the weight value for each queue and every queue can be assured of a certain  
service time. The weight value indicates the occupied proportion of the resource. WRR queue  
overcomes the disadvantage of SP queue that the packets in the queues with lower priority  
cannot get service for a long time. In WRR mode, though the queues are scheduled in order,  
the service time for each queue is not fixed, that is to say, if a queue is empty, the next queue  
will be scheduled. In this way, the bandwidth resources are made full use of. The default  
weight value ratio of TC0, TC1, TC2 and TC3 is 1:2:4:8.  
Figure 9-5 WRR-Mode  
3. SP+WRR-Mode: Strict-Priority + Weight Round Robin Mode. In this mode, this switch  
provides two scheduling groups, SP group and WRR group. Queues in SP group and WRR  
group are scheduled strictly based on strict-priority mode while the queues inside WRR group  
follow the WRR mode. In SP+WRR mode, TC3 is in the SP group; TC0, TC1 and TC2 belong  
to the WRR group and the weight value ratio of TC0, TC1 and TC2 is 1:2:4. In this way, when  
scheduling queues, the switch allows TC3 to occupy the whole bandwidth following the SP  
mode and the TC0, TC1 and TC2 in the WRR group will take up the bandwidth according to  
their ratio 1:2:4.  
4. Equ-Mode: Equal-Mode. In this mode, all the queues occupy the bandwidth equally. The  
weight value ratio of all the queues is 1:1:1:1.  
140  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The QoS module is mainly for traffic control and priority configuration, including three submenus:  
DiffServ, Bandwidth Control and Voice VLAN.  
9.1 DiffServ  
This switch classifies the ingress packets, maps the packets to different priority queues and then  
forwards the packets according to specified scheduling algorithms to implement QoS function.  
This switch implements three priority modes basing on port, on 802.1P and on DSCP, and supports  
four queue scheduling algorithms. The port priorities are labeled as CoS0, CoS1… CoS7.  
The DiffServ function can be implemented on Port Priority, DSCP Priority, 802.1P/CoS  
mapping and Schedule Mode pages.  
9.1.1 Port Priority  
On this page you can configure the port priority.  
Choose the menu QoS →DiffServ →Port Priority to load the following page.  
Figure 9-6 Port Priority Config  
The following entries are displayed on this screen:  
Port Priority Config  
Select:  
Port:  
Select the desired port to configure its priority. It is multi-optional.  
Displays the physical port number of the switch.  
Specify the priority for the port.  
Priority:  
LAG:  
Displays the LAG number which the port belongs to.  
141  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Configuration Procedure:  
Step Operation  
Description  
1
Select the port priority  
Required. On QoS→DiffServ→Port Priority page,  
configure the port priority.  
2
Configure  
the  
mapping Required. On QoS→DiffServ→802.1P/CoS mapping  
relation between the CoS page, configure the mapping relation between the CoS  
priority and TC  
and TC.  
3
Select a schedule mode  
Required. On QoS→DiffServ→Schedule Mode  
page, select a schedule mode.  
9.1.2 DSCP Priority  
On this page you can configure DSCP priority. DSCP (DiffServ Code Point) is a new definition to IP  
ToS field given by IEEE. This field is used to divide IP datagram into 64 priorities. When DSCP  
Priority is enabled, IP datagram are mapped to different priority levels based on DSCP priority  
mode; non-IP datagram with 802.1Q tag are mapped to different priority levels based on 802.1P  
priority mode if 8021.1P Priority mode is enabled; the untagged non-IP datagram are mapped based  
on port priority mode.  
Choose the menu QoS →DiffServ →DSCP Priority to load the following page.  
Figure 9-7 DSCP Priority  
142  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
The following entries are displayed on this screen:  
DSCP Priority Config  
DSCP Priority:  
Priority Level  
DSCP:  
Select Enable or Disable DSCP Priority.  
Indicates the priority determined by the DS region of IP datagram.  
It ranges from 0 to 63.  
Priority:  
Indicates the 802.1P priority the packets with tag are mapped to.  
The priorities are labeled as CoS0 ~ CoS7.  
Configuration Procedure:  
Step Operation  
Description  
1
2
3
Configure  
the  
mapping Required. On QoS→DiffServ→DSCP Priority page,  
relation between the DSCP enable DSCP Priority and configure the mapping  
priority and 802.1P priority relation between the DSCP priority and CoS.  
Configure the mapping Required. On QoS→DiffServ→802.1P/CoS mapping  
relation between the CoS and page, configure the mapping relation between the CoS  
the TC  
and the TC.  
Select a schedule mode  
Required. On QoS→DiffServ→Schedule Mode  
page, select a schedule mode.  
9.1.3 802.1P/CoS mapping  
On this page you can configure the mapping relation between the 802.1P priority tag-id/CoS-id and  
the TC-id.  
802.1P gives the Pri field in 802.1Q tag a recommended definition. This field, ranging from 0-7, is  
used to divide packets into 8 priorities. 802.1P Priority is enabled by default, so the packets with  
802.1Q tag are mapped to different priority levels based on 802.1P priority mode but the untagged  
packets are mapped based on port priority mode. With the same value, the 802.1P priority tag and  
the CoS will be mapped to the same TC.  
Choose the menu QoS →DiffServ →802.1P/CoS mapping to load the following page.  
Figure 9-8 802.1P/CoS mapping  
143  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
The following entries are displayed on this screen:  
Priority and CoS-mapping Config  
Tag-id/Cos-id:  
Queue TC-id:  
Indicates the precedence level defined by IEEE802.1P and the  
CoS ID.  
Indicates the priority level of egress queue the packets with tag  
and CoS-id are mapped to. The priority levels of egress queue are  
labeled as TC0, TC1, TC2 and TC3.  
Configuration Procedure:  
Step Operation  
Description  
1
2
Configure  
the  
mapping Required. On QoS→DiffServ→802.1P/CoS mapping  
relation between the 802.1P page, configure the mapping relation between the  
priority Tag/CoS and the TC  
802.1P priority Tag/CoS and the TC.  
Select a schedule mode  
Required. On QoS→DiffServ→Schedule Mode page,  
select a schedule mode.  
9.1.4 Schedule Mode  
On this page you can select a schedule mode for the switch. When the network is congested, the  
problem that many packets compete for resources must be solved, usually in the way of queue  
scheduling. The switch will control the forwarding sequence of the packets according to the priority  
queues and scheduling algorithms you set. On this switch, the priority levels are labeled as TC0,  
TC1… TC3.  
Choose the menu QoS →DiffServ →Schedule Mode to load the following page.  
Figure 9-9 Schedule Mode  
The following entries are displayed on this screen:  
Schedule Mode Config  
SP-Mode:  
Strict-Priority Mode. In this mode, the queue with higher priority will  
occupy the whole bandwidth. Packets in the queue with lower  
priority are sent only when the queue with higher priority is empty.  
WRR-Mode:  
Weight Round Robin Mode. In this mode, packets in all the queues  
are sent in order based on the weight value for each queue. The  
weight value ratio of TC0, TC1, TC2 and TC3 is 1:2:4:8.  
144  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
SP+WRR-Mode:  
Strict-Priority + Weight Round Robin Mode. In this mode, this switch  
provides two scheduling groups, SP group and WRR group. Queues  
in SP group and WRR group are scheduled strictly based on  
strict-priority mode while the queues inside WRR group follow the  
WRR mode. In SP+WRR mode, TC3 is in the SP group; TC0, TC1  
and TC2 belong to the WRR group and the weight value ratio of  
TC0, TC1 and TC2 is 1:2:4. In this way, when scheduling queues,  
the switch allows TC3 to occupy the whole bandwidth following the  
SP mode and the TC0, TC1 and TC2 in the WRR group will take up  
the bandwidth according to their ratio 1:2:4.  
Equ-Mode:  
Equal-Mode. In this mode, all the queues occupy the bandwidth  
equally. The weight value ratio of all the queues is 1:1:1:1.  
9.2 Bandwidth Control  
Bandwidth function, allowing you to control the traffic rate and broadcast flow on each port to  
ensure network in working order, can be implemented on Rate Limit and Storm Control pages.  
9.2.1 Rate Limit  
Rate limit functions to control the ingress/egress traffic rate on each port via configuring the  
available bandwidth of each port. In this way, the network bandwidth can be reasonably distributed  
and utilized.  
Choose the menu QoS →Bandwidth Control →Rate Limit to load the following page.  
Figure 9-10 Rate Limit  
145  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
The following entries are displayed on this screen:  
Rate Limit Config  
Port Select:  
Click the Select button to quick-select the corresponding port  
based on the port number you entered.  
Select:  
Select the desired port for Rate configuration. It is multi-optional.  
Displays the port number of the switch.  
Port:  
Ingress Rate (bps):  
Configure the bandwidth for receiving packets on the port. You can  
select a rate from the dropdown list or select "Manual" to set  
Ingress rate, the system will automatically select integral multiple  
of 64Kbps that closest to the rate you entered as the real Ingress  
rate.  
Egress Rate(bps):  
Configure the bandwidth for sending packets on the port. You can  
select a rate from the dropdown list or select "Manual" to set  
Egress rate, the system will automatically select integral multiple  
of 64Kbps that closest to the rate you entered as the real Egress  
rate.  
LAG:  
Note:  
Displays the LAG number which the port belongs to.  
1. If you enable ingress rate limit feature for the storm control-enabled port, storm control feature  
will be disabled for this port.  
2. When selecting "Manual" to set Ingress/Egress rate, the system will automatically select  
integral multiple of 64Kbps that closest to the rate you entered as the real Ingress/Egress rate.  
For example, if you enter 1000Kbps for egress rate, the system will automatically select  
1024Kbps as the real Egress rate.  
3. When egress rate limit feature is enabled for one or more ports, you are suggested to disable  
the flow control on each port to ensure the switch works normally.  
9.2.2 Storm Control  
Storm Control function allows the switch to filter broadcast, multicast and UL frame in the network.  
If the transmission rate of the three kind packets exceeds the set bandwidth, the packets will be  
automatically discarded to avoid network broadcast storm.  
146  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Choose the menu QoS →Bandwidth Control →Storm Control to load the following page.  
Figure 9-11 Storm Control  
The following entries are displayed on this screen:  
Storm Control Config  
Port Select:  
Click the Select button to quick-select the corresponding port  
based on the port number you entered.  
Select:  
Port:  
Select the desired port for Storm Control configuration. It is  
multi-optional.  
Displays the port number of the switch.  
Broadcast Rate  
(bps):  
Select the bandwidth for receiving broadcast packets on the port.  
The packet traffic exceeding the bandwidth will be discarded.  
Select Disable to disable the storm control function for the port.  
Multicast Rate  
(bps):  
Select the bandwidth for receiving multicast packets on the port.  
The packet traffic exceeding the bandwidth will be discarded.  
Select Disable to disable the storm control function for the port.  
UL-Frame Rate  
(bps):  
Select the bandwidth for receiving UL-Frame on the port. The  
packet traffic exceeding the bandwidth will be discarded. Select  
Disable to disable the storm control function for the port.  
LAG:  
Note:  
Displays the LAG number which the port belongs to.  
If you enable storm control feature for the ingress rate limit-enabled port, ingress rate limit feature  
will be disabled for this port.  
147  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9.3 Voice VLAN  
Voice VLANs are configured specially for voice data stream. By configuring Voice VLANs and  
adding the ports with voice devices attached to voice VLANs, you can perform QoS-related  
configuration for voice data, ensuring the transmission priority of voice data stream and voice  
quality.  
OUI Address (Organizationally unique identifier address)  
The switch can determine whether a received packet is a voice packet by checking its source MAC  
address. If the source MAC address of packet complies with the OUI addresses configured by the  
system, the packet is determined as voice packets and transmitted in voice VLAN.  
An OUI address is a unique identifier assigned by IEEE (Institute of Electrical and Electronics  
Engineers) to a device vendor. It comprises the first 24 bits of a MAC address. You can recognize  
which vendor a device belongs to according to the OUI address. The following table shows the  
OUI addresses of several manufacturers. The following OUI addresses are preset of the switch by  
default.  
Number OUI Address  
Vendor  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
00-01-E3-00-00-00  
Siemens phone  
00-03-6B-00-00-00  
00-04-0D-00-00-00  
00-60-B9-00-00-00  
Cisco phone  
Avaya phone  
Philips/NEC phone  
00-D0-1E-00-00-00 Pingtel phone  
00-E0-75-00-00-00 Polycom phone  
00-E0-BB-00-00-00 3com phone  
Table 9-1 OUI addresses on the switch  
Port Voice VLAN Mode  
A voice VLAN can operate in two modes: automatic mode and manual mode.  
Automatic Mode: In this mode, the switch will automatically add a port which receives voice  
packets to voice VLAN and determine the priority of the packets through learning the source MAC  
of the UNTAG packets sent from IP phone when it is powered on. The aging time of voice VLAN  
can be configured on the switch. If the switch does not receive any voice packet on the ingress  
port within the aging time, the switch will remove this port from voice VLAN. Voice ports are  
automatically added into or removed from voice VLAN.  
Manual Mode: You need to manually add the port of IP phone to voice VLAN, and then the switch  
will assign ACL rules and configure the priority of the packets through learning the source MAC  
address of packets and matching OUI address.  
In practice, the port voice VLAN mode is configured according to the type of packets sent out from  
voice device and the link type of the port. The following table shows the detailed information.  
148  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Port Voice VLAN Voice  
Link type of the port and processing mode  
Mode  
Stream Type  
Automatic Mode  
TAG  
voice ACCESS: Not supported.  
stream  
TRUNK: Supported. The default VLAN of the port cannot be  
voice VLAN.  
GENERAL: Supported. The default VLAN of the port cannot  
be voice VLAN and the egress rule of the access port in the  
voice VLAN should be TAG.  
UNTAG voice ACCESS: Supported.  
stream  
TRUNK: Not supported.  
GENERAL: Supported. The default VLAN of the port should  
be voice VLAN and the egress rule of the access port in the  
voice VLAN should be UNTAG.  
Manual Mode  
TAG  
voice ACCESS: Not supported.  
stream  
TRUNK：Supported. The default VLAN of the port should not  
be voice VLAN.  
GENERAL：Supported. The default VLAN of the port cannot  
be voice VLAN and the egress rule of the access port in the  
voice VLAN should be TAG.  
UNTAG voice ACCESS: Supported.  
stream  
TRUNK: Not supported.  
GENERAL: Supported. The default VLAN of the port should  
be voice VLAN and the egress rule of the access port in the  
voice VLAN should be UNTAG.  
Table 9-2 Port voice VLAN mode and voice stream processing mode  
Security Mode of Voice VLAN  
When voice VLAN is enabled for a port, you can configure its security mode to filter data stream. If  
security mode is enabled, the port just forwards voice packets, and discards other packets whose  
source MAC addresses do not match OUI addresses. If security mode is not enabled, the port  
forwards all the packets.  
Security  
Mode  
Packet Type  
Processing Mode  
UNTAG packet  
When the source MAC address of the packet is the OUI address  
that can be identified, the packet can be transmitted in the voice  
VLAN. Otherwise, the packet will be discarded.  
Packet with voice  
VLAN TAG  
Enable  
The processing mode for the device to deal with the packet is  
Packet with other  
VLAN TAG  
determined by whether the port permits  
independent of voice VLAN security mode.  
the VLAN or not,  
UNTAG packet  
Do not check the source MAC address of the packet and all the  
packets can be transmitted in the voice VLAN.  
Packet with voice  
VLAN TAG  
Disable  
The processing mode for the device to deal with the packet is  
determined by whether the port permits the VLAN or not,  
independent of voice VLAN security mode.  
Packet with other  
VLAN TAG  
Table 9-3 Security mode and packets processing mode  
149  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Note:  
Do not transmit voice stream together with other business packets in the voice VLAN except for  
some special requirements.  
The Voice VLAN function can be implemented on Global Config, Port Config and OUI Config  
pages.  
9.3.1 Global Config  
On this page, you can configure the global parameters of the voice VLAN, including VLAN ID,  
aging time, the transmission priority of the voice packets and so on.  
Choose the menu QoS →Voice VLAN →Global Config to load the following page.  
Figure 9-12 Global Configuration  
The following entries are displayed on this screen:  
Global Config  
Voice VLAN:  
VLAN ID:  
Select Enable/Disable Voice VLAN function.  
Enter the VLAN ID of the voice VLAN.  
Aging Time:  
Specifies the living time of the member port in auto mode after the  
OUI address is aging out.  
Priority:  
Select the priority of the port when sending voice data. The default  
priority is 6.  
9.3.2 Port Config  
Before the voice VLAN function is enabled, the parameters of the ports in the voice VLAN should  
be configured on this page.  
150  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Choose the menu QoS →Voice VLAN →Port Config to load the following page.  
Figure 9-13 Port Config  
Note:  
To enable voice VLAN function for the LAG member port, please ensure its member state accords  
with its port mode.  
If a port is a member port of voice VLAN, changing its port mode to be “Auto” will make the port  
leave the voice VLAN and will not join the voice VLAN automatically until it receives voice streams.  
The following entries are displayed on this screen:  
Port Config  
Port Select:  
Click the Select button to quick-select the corresponding port  
based on the port number you entered.  
Select:  
Select the desired port for voice VLAN configuration. It is  
multi-optional.  
Port:  
Displays the port number of the switch.  
Port Mode:  
Select the mode for the port to join the voice VLAN.  
Auto: In this mode, the switch automatically adds a port to the  
voice VLAN or removes a port from the voice VLAN by  
checking whether the port receives voice data or not  
Manual: In this mode, you can manually add a port to the  
voice VLAN or remove a port from the voice VLAN.  
151  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Security Mode:  
Configure the security mode for forwarding packets.  
Disable: All packets are forwarded.  
Enable: Only voice data are forwarded.  
Member State:  
LAG:  
Displays the state of the port in the current voice VLAN.  
Displays the LAG number which the port belongs to.  
9.3.3 OUI Config  
The switch supports OUI creation and adds the MAC address of the special voice device to the  
OUI table of the switch. The switch determines whether a received packet is a voice packet by  
checking its OUI address. The switch analyzes the received packets. If the packets are recognized  
as voice packets, the access port will be automatically added to the Voice VLAN.  
Choose the menu QoS →Voice VLAN→OUI Config to load the following page.  
Figure 9-14 OUI Configuration  
The following entries are displayed on this screen:  
Create OUI  
OUI:  
Enter the OUI address of the voice device.  
Enter the OUI address mask of the voice device.  
Give a description to the OUI for identification.  
Mask:  
Description:  
OUI Table  
Select:  
OUI:  
Select the desired entry to view the detailed information.  
Displays the OUI address of the voice device.  
Mask:  
Displays the OUI address mask of the voice device.  
152  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Description:  
Displays the description of the OUI.  
Configuration Procedure of Voice VLAN:  
Step Operation  
Description  
1
2
3
Configure the link Required. On VLAN→802.1Q VLAN→Port Config page,  
type of the port  
Create VLAN  
configure the link type of ports of the voice device.  
Required. On VLAN→802.1Q VLAN→Port Config page, click  
the Create button to create a VLAN.  
Optional. On QoS→Voice VLAN→OUI Config page, you can  
check whether the switch is supporting the OUI template or not. If  
not, please add the OUI address.  
Add OUI address  
Configure  
parameters of the  
ports in voice VLAN.  
4
5
the  
Required. On QoS→Voice VLAN→Port Config page, configure  
the parameters of the ports in voice VLAN.  
Required. On QoS→Voice VLAN→Global Config page,  
configure the global parameters of voice VLAN.  
Enable Voice VLAN  
Return to CONTENTS  
153  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 10 PoE  
Note:  
Only TL-SG3424P supports PoE function.  
PoE (Power over Ethernet) technology describes a system to transmit electrical power along with  
data to remote devices over standard twisted-pair cable in an Ethernet network. It is especially  
useful for supplying power to IP telephones, wireless LAN access points, cameras and so on.  
Composition  
A PoE system usually consists of PSE and PD.  
PSE: Power sourcing equipment (PSE) is a device such as a switch that provides power on the  
Ethernet cable to the linked device.  
PD: A powered device (PD) is a device accepting power from the PSE and thus consumes energy.  
PDs falls into two types, standard PDs and nonstandard PDs. Standard PDs refer to the powered  
devices that comply with IEEE 802.3af and IEEE 802.3at. Examples include wireless LAN access  
points, IP Phones, IP cameras, network hubs, embedded computers etc.  
Advantage  
Cheap cabling: The remote device such as cameras can be powered by PSE in no need  
of prolonging its power cord additionally and Ethernet cable is much cheaper than AC  
wire or power cord.  
Easy to connect: PoE uses only one Ethernet cable with no need of external power  
supply.  
Reliable: A powered device can be either powered by PSE using Ethernet cable or  
powered through the provided power adapter. It is very convenient to provide a backup  
power supply for the PDs.  
Flexibility: In compliance with IEEE 802.3af and IEEE 802.3at, global organizations can  
deploy PoE everywhere without concern for any local variance in AC power standards,  
outlets, plugs, or reliability.  
Wide use: It can be applied to wireless LAN access points, IP Phones, IP cameras,  
network hubs, embedded computers etc.  
TL-SG3424P is a Power Sourcing Equipment (PSE). All the Auto-Negotiation RJ45 ports on the  
switch support Power over Ethernet (PoE) function, which can automatically detect and supply  
power for those powered devices (PDs) complying with IEEE 802.3af and IEEE 802.3at. The  
maximum power TL-SG3424P can supply is 320W and the maximum power each PoE port can  
supply is 30W.  
PoE function can be configured in the two sections, PoE Config and PoE Time-Range.  
10.1 PoE Config  
All the RJ45 ports on the switch can be configured to supply power for the powered devices that  
comply with IEEE 802.3af and IEEE 802.3at. As the power every port or the system can provide is  
limited, some attributes should be set to make full use of the power and guarantee the adequate  
power to the linked PDs. When the power exceeds the maximum power limit or the power is  
inadequate to power the device, the switch may disconnect the power supply to the PD linked to  
the port with lower priority. When detecting a PD is unplugged, the switch will stop supplying the  
power to the PD.  
154  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
PoE Config, mainly for PoE attributes configuration, is implemented on PoE Config and PoE  
Time-Range ages.  
10.1.1 PoE Config  
On this page, you can configure the parameters to implement PoE function.  
Choose the menu PoE→PoE Config→PoE Config to load the following page.  
Figure 10-1 PoE Config  
The following items are displayed on this screen:  
Global Config  
System Power Limit:  
Specify the max power the PoE switch can supply.  
Power Disconnect  
Method:  
When the supply power exceeds the system power limit, the PoE  
switch guarantees the power supply with the following two  
methods:  
Deny Next Port: When the supply power exceeds the system  
power limit, the newly-connected PD will be disconnected.  
Deny Lower Priority: When the supply power exceeds the  
system power limit, the PD linked to the port with lower  
priority will be disconnected.  
System  
Consumption:  
Power  
Power  
Displays the PoE switch's real time system power consumption.  
Displays the PoE switch's real time remaining system power.  
System  
Remain:  
Port Config  
Port Select:  
Click the Select button to quick-select the corresponding entry  
based on the port number you entered.  
Select:  
Select the desired port to configure its parameters.  
155  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Port:  
Displays the port number.  
PoE Status:  
Select to disable/enable the PoE feature for the corresponding  
port. If set enable, the corresponding port can supply power to the  
linked PD (Powered Device).  
PoE Priority:  
The priority levels include High, Middle and Low in descending  
order. When the supply power exceeds the system power limit,  
the PD linked to the port with lower priority will be disconnected.  
Power Limit  
(0.1w-30w):  
Defines the max power the corresponding port can supply. Class1  
represents 4w, Class2 represents 7w, Class3 represents 15.4w  
and Class4 represents 30w.  
Time Range:  
PoE Profile:  
Select the time range for the PoE port to supply power. If No limit  
is selected, the PoE port will supply power all the time.  
Select the profile you want to apply to the selected port. If a PoE  
Profile is selected, the three attributes including PoE Status, PoE  
Priority and Power Limit are not available.  
Power (W):  
Current (mA):  
Voltage (V):  
PD Class:  
Displays the port's real time power supply.  
Displays the port's real time current.  
Displays the port's real time voltage.  
Displays the class the linked PD (Powered Device) belongs to.  
Displays the port's real time power status.  
Power Status:  
10.1.2 PoE Profile  
PoE (Power over Ethernet) Profile is a short cut for the configuration of the PoE port. You can  
create some profiles to be applied to the ports. In a profile, the PoE status, PoE priority and Power  
limit are configured.  
Choose the menu PoE→PoE Config→Profile Profile to load the following page.  
Figure 10-2 Profile Config  
156  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
The following items are displayed on this screen:  
Create PoE Profile  
Profile Name:  
PoE Status:  
Enter the name of the profile.  
Select to the enable/disable PoE feature for the corresponding  
port. If set enable, the port may supply power to the linked PD  
(Power Device).  
PoE Priority:  
Power Limit:  
The priority levels include High, Middle and Low in descending  
order. When the supply power exceeds the system power limit,  
the PD linked to the port with lower priority will be disconnected.  
Defines the max power the corresponding port can supply. Class1  
represents 4w, Class2 represents 7w, Class3 represents 15.4w,  
and Class4 represents 30w.  
PoE Profile  
Select:  
Select the desired profile to delete.  
Profile Name:  
PoE Status:  
PoE Priority:  
Power Limit:  
Displays the name of the profile.  
Displays the PoE status of the port in the profile.  
Displays the PoE priority of the port in the profile.  
Displays the max power the port in the profile can supply.  
10.2 PoE Time-Range  
A time-range based PoE enables you to implement PoE power supply by differentiating the  
time-ranges. A time-range can be specified for each port. The port will not supply power when the  
specified time-range is configured and the system time is not within the time-range.  
On this switch absolute time, week time and holiday can be configured. Configure an absolute time  
section in the form of “the start date to the end date” to make the port based on this time range  
supply power; configure a week time section to make the port supply based on this time range on  
the fixed days of the week; configure a holiday section and select Exclude Holiday to make the port  
based on this time range not supply power on some special days. In each time-range, four  
time-slices can be configured.  
The Time-Range configuration can be implemented on PoE Time-Range Summary, PoE  
Time-Range Create and PoE Holiday Config pages.  
10.2.1 Time-Range Summary  
On this page you can view or delete the current time-ranges.  
Choose the menu PoE→PoE Time-Range→PoE Time-Range Summary to load the following  
page.  
Figure 10-3 Time-Range Table  
157  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
The following items are displayed on this screen:  
Time-Range Table  
Select:  
Select the desired entry to delete the corresponding time-range.  
Displays the index of the time-range.  
Index:  
Time-Range Name:  
Slice:  
Displays the name of the time-range.  
Displays the time-slice of the time-range.  
Displays the mode the time-range adopts.  
Mode:  
Operation:  
Click Edit to modify this time-range and click Detail to display the  
complete information of this time–range.  
10.2.2 PoE Time-Range Create  
On this page you can create time-ranges.  
Choose the menu PoE→PoE Time-Range→PoE Time-Range Create to load the following page.  
Figure 10-4 Time-Range Create  
Note:  
To successfully configure time-ranges, please firstly specify time-slices and then time-ranges.  
The following items are displayed on this screen:  
Create Time-Range  
Name:  
Enter the name of the time-range for time identification.  
Exclude Holiday:  
Select Exclude Holiday, and the port based on this time-range  
may not supply power when the system time is within the holiday  
Absolute:  
Select Absolute to configure absolute time-range. The port based  
on this time-range will supply power based on this time-range  
when the system time is within the absolute time-range.  
158  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Week:  
Select Week to configure week time-range. The port based on this  
time-range will supply power based on this time-range when the  
system time is within the week time-range.  
Create Time-Slice  
Start Time:  
Set the start time of the time-slice.  
Set the end time of the time-slice.  
End Time:  
Time-Slice Table  
Index:  
Displays the index of the time-slice.  
Start Time:  
End Time:  
Delete:  
Displays the start time of the time-slice.  
Displays the end time of the time-slice.  
Click the Delete button to delete the corresponding time-slice.  
10.2.3 PoE Holiday Config  
Holiday mode is applied as a different secured access control policy from the week mode. On this  
page you can define holidays according to your work arrangement.  
Choose the menu PoE→PoE Time-Range→PoE Holiday Create to load the following page.  
Figure 10-5 Holiday Configuration  
The following entries are displayed on this screen:  
Create Holiday  
Start Date:  
Specify the start date of the holiday.  
Specify the end date of the holiday.  
Enter the name of the holiday.  
End Date:  
Holiday Name:  
Holiday Table  
Select:  
Index:  
Select the desired entry to delete the corresponding holiday.  
Displays the index of the holiday.  
159  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Holiday Name:  
Start Date:  
Displays the name of the holiday.  
Displays the start date of the holiday.  
Displays the end date of the holiday.  
End Date:  
Return to CONTENTS  
160  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 11 ACL  
ACL (Access Control List) is used to filter packets by configuring match rules and process policies  
of packets in order to control the access of the illegal users to the network. Besides, ACL functions  
to control traffic flows and save network resources. It provides a flexible and secured access  
control policy and facilitates you to control the network security.  
On this switch, ACLs classify packets based on a series of match conditions, which can be L2-L4  
protocol key fields carried in the packets. A time-range based ACL enables you to implement ACL  
control over packets by differentiating the time-ranges.  
The ACL module is mainly for ACL configuration of the switch, including four submenus:  
Time-Range, ACL Config, Policy Config and Policy Binding.  
11.1 Time-Range  
If a configured ACL is needed to be effective in a specified time-range, a time-range should be  
firstly specified in the ACL. As the time-range based ACL takes effect only within the specified  
time-range, data packets can be filtered by differentiating the time-ranges.  
On this switch absolute time, week time and holiday can be configured. Configure an absolute time  
section in the form of “the start date to the end date” to make ACLs effective; configure a week time  
section to make ACLs effective on the fixed days of the week; configure a holiday section to make  
ACLs effective on some special days. In each time-range, four time-slices can be configured.  
The Time-Range configuration can be implemented on Time-Range Summary, Time-Range  
Create and Holiday Config pages.  
11.1.1 Time-Range Summary  
On this page you can view the current time-ranges.  
Choose the menu ACL → Time-Range → Time-Range Summary to load the following page.  
Figure 11-1 Time-Range Table  
The following entries are displayed on this screen:  
Time-Range Table  
Select:  
Index:  
Select the desired entry to delete the corresponding time-range.  
Displays the index of the time-range.  
Time-Range Name: Displays the name of the time-range.  
Slice:  
Mode:  
Detail:  
Displays the time-slice of the time-range.  
Displays the mode the time-range adopts.  
Click the Detail button to display the complete information of this  
time–range.  
161  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
11.1.2 Time-Range Create  
On this page you can create time-ranges.  
Choose the menu ACL→Time-Range→Time-Range Create to load the following page.  
Figure 11-2 Time-Range Create  
Note:  
To successfully configure time-ranges, please firstly specify time-slices and then time-ranges.  
The following entries are displayed on this screen:  
Create Time-Range  
Name:  
Enter the name of the time-range for time identification.  
Holiday:  
Select Holiday you set as a time-range. The ACL rule based on this  
time-range takes effect only when the system time is within the holiday.  
Absolute:  
Week:  
Select Absolute to configure absolute time-range. The ACL rule based  
on this time-range takes effect only when the system time is within the  
absolute time-range.  
Select Week to configure week time-range. The ACL rule based on this  
time-range takes effect only when the system time is within the week  
time-range.  
Create Time-Slice  
Start Time:  
Set the start time of the time-slice.  
Set the end time of the time-slice.  
End Time:  
Time-Slice Table  
Index:  
Displays the index of the time-slice.  
Start Time:  
Displays the start time of the time-slice.  
162  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
End Time:  
Delete:  
Displays the end time of the time-slice.  
Click the Delete button to delete the corresponding time-slice.  
11.1.3 Holiday Config  
Holiday mode is applied as a different secured access control policy from the week mode. On this  
page you can define holidays according to your work arrangement.  
Choose the menu ACL→Time-Range→Holiday Config to load the following page.  
Figure 11-3 Holiday Configuration  
The following entries are displayed on this screen:  
Create Holiday  
Start Date:  
Specify the start date of the holiday.  
Specify the end date of the holiday.  
Enter the name of the holiday.  
End Date:  
Holiday Name:  
Holiday Table  
Select:  
Select the desired entry to delete the corresponding holiday.  
Displays the index of the holiday.  
Index:  
Holiday Name:  
Start Date:  
End Date:  
Displays the name of the holiday.  
Displays the start date of the holiday.  
Displays the end date of the holiday.  
11.2 ACL Config  
An ACL may contain a number of rules, and each rule specifies a different package range. Packets  
are matched in match order. Once a rule is matched, the switch processes the matched packets  
taking the operation specified in the rule without considering the other rules, which can enhance  
the performance of the switch.  
The ACL Config function can be implemented on ACL Summary, ACL Create, MAC ACL,  
Standard-IP ACL and Extend-IP ACL pages.  
163  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
11.2.1 ACL Summary  
On this page, you can view the current ACLs configured in the switch.  
Choose the menu ACL→ACL Config→ACL Summary to load the following page.  
Figure 11-4 ACL Summary  
The following entries are displayed on this screen:  
Search Option  
Select ACL:  
ACL Type:  
Rule Order:  
Rule Table  
Select the ACL you have created  
Displays the type of the ACL you select.  
Displays the rule order of the ACL you select.  
Here you can view the information about the ACL rule you select.  
11.2.2 ACL Create  
On this page you can create ACLs.  
Choose the menu ACL→ACL Config→ACL Create to load the following page.  
Figure 11-5 ACL Create  
The following entries are displayed on this screen:  
Create ACL  
ACL ID:  
Enter ACL ID of the ACL you want to create.  
Rule Order:  
User Config order is set to be match order in this ACL.  
164  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
11.2.3 MAC ACL  
MAC ACLs analyze and process packets based on a series of match conditions, which can be the  
source MAC addresses, destination MAC addresses, VLAN ID, and EtherType carried in the  
packets.  
Choose the menu ACL→ACL Config→MAC ACL to load the following page.  
Figure11-6 Create MAC Rule  
The following entries are displayed on this screen:  
Create MAC ACL  
ACL ID:  
Select the desired MAC ACL for configuration.  
Enter the rule ID.  
Rule ID:  
Operation:  
Select the operation for the switch to process packets which match the  
rules.  
Permit: Forward packets.  
Deny: Discard Packets.  
S-MAC:  
D-MAC:  
MASK:  
Enter the source MAC address contained in the rule.  
Enter the destination MAC address contained in the rule.  
Enter MAC address mask. If it is set to 1, it must strictly match the  
address.  
VLAN ID:  
Enter the VLAN ID contained in the rule.  
Enter EtherType contained in the rule.  
EtherType:  
User Priority:  
Select the user priority contained in the rule for the tagged packets to  
match.  
Time-Range:  
Select the time-range for the rule to take effect.  
165  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
11.2.4 Standard-IP ACL  
Standard-IP ACLs analyze and process data packets based on a series of match conditions, which  
can be the source IP addresses and destination IP addresses carried in the packets.  
Choose the menu ACL→ACL Config→Standard-IP ACL to load the following page.  
Figure11-7 Create Standard-IP Rule  
The following entries are displayed on this screen:  
Create Standard-IP ACL  
ACL ID:  
Select the desired Standard-IP ACL for configuration.  
Rule ID:  
Operation:  
Enter the rule ID.  
Select the operation for the switch to process packets which match the  
rules.  
Permit: Forward packets.  
Deny: Discard Packets.  
S-IP:  
D-IP:  
Mask:  
Enter the source IP address contained in the rule.  
Enter the destination IP address contained in the rule.  
Enter IP address mask. If it is set to 1, it must strictly match the  
address.  
Time-Range:  
Select the time-range for the rule to take effect.  
11.2.5 Extend-IP ACL  
Extend-IP ACLs analyze and process data packets based on a series of match conditions, which  
can be the source IP addresses, destination IP addresses, IP protocol and other information of this  
sort carried in the packets.  
166  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Choose the menu ACL→ACL Config→Extend-IP ACL to load the following page.  
Figure11-8 Create Extend-IP Rule  
The following entries are displayed on this screen:  
Create Extend-IP ACL  
ACL ID:  
Select the desired Extend-IP ACL for configuration.  
Enter the rule ID.  
Rule ID:  
Operation:  
Select the operation for the switch to process packets which match the  
rules.  
Permit: Forward packets.  
Deny: Discard Packets.  
S-IP:  
D-IP:  
Mask:  
Enter the source IP address contained in the rule.  
Enter the destination IP address contained in the rule.  
Enter IP address mask. If it is set to 1, it must strictly match the  
address.  
IP Protocol:  
Select IP protocol contained in the rule.  
Configure TCP flag when TCP is selected from the pull-down list of IP  
Protocol.  
TCP Flag：  
S-Port:  
D-Port:  
DSCP:  
Configure TCP/IP source port contained in the rule when TCP/UDP is  
selected from the pull-down list of IP Protocol.  
Configure TCP/IP destination port contained in the rule when  
TCP/UDP is selected from the pull-down list of IP Protocol.  
Enter the DSCP information contained in the rule.  
167  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
IP ToS:  
Enter the IP-ToS contained in the rule.  
IP Pre:  
Enter the IP Precedence contained in the rule.  
Select the time-range for the rule to take effect.  
Time-Range:  
11.3 Policy Config  
A Policy is used to control the data packets those match the corresponding ACL rules by  
configuring ACLs and actions together for effect. The operations here include stream mirror,  
stream condition, QoS remarking and redirect.  
The Policy Config can be implemented on Policy Summary, Police Create and Action Create  
pages.  
11.3.1 Policy Summary  
On this page, you can view the ACL and the corresponding operations in the policy.  
Choose the menu ACL→Policy Config→Policy Summary to load the following page.  
Figure 11-9 Policy Summary  
The following entries are displayed on this screen:  
Search Option  
Select Policy:  
Select name of the desired policy for view. If you want to delete the  
desired policy, please click the Delete button.  
Action Table  
Select:  
Select the desired entry to delete the corresponding policy.  
Enter the index of the policy.  
Index:  
ACL ID:  
Displays the ID of the ACL contained in the policy.  
Displays the source mirror port of the policy.  
Displays the source condition added to the policy.  
Displays the redirect added to the policy.  
S-Mirror:  
S-Condition:  
Redirect:  
QoS Remark:  
Displays the QoS remark added to the policy.  
11.3.2 Policy Create  
On this page you can create the policy.  
168  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Choose the menu ACL→Policy Config→Policy Create to load the following page.  
Figure 11-10 Create Policy  
The following entries are displayed on this screen:  
Create Policy  
Policy Name:  
Enter the name of the policy.  
11.3.3 Action Create  
On this page you can add ACLs and create corresponding actions for the policy.  
Choose the menu ACL→Policy Config→Action Create to load the following page.  
Figure 11-11 Action Create  
The following entries are displayed on this screen:  
Create Action  
Select Policy:  
Select ACL:  
S-Mirror:  
Select the name of the policy.  
Select the ACL for configuration in the policy.  
Select S-Mirror to mirror the data packets in the policy to the specific  
port.  
169  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
S-Condition:  
Select S-Condition to limit the transmission rate of the data packets in  
the policy.  
Rate: Specify the forwarding rate of the data packets those match  
the corresponding ACL.  
Out of Band: Specify the disposal way of the data packets those  
are transmitted beyond the rate.  
Redirect:  
Select Redirect to change the forwarding direction of the data packets  
in the policy.  
Destination Port: Forward the data packets those match the  
corresponding ACL to the specific port.  
QoS Remark:  
Select QoS Remark to forward the data packets based on the QoS  
settings.  
DSCP: Specify the DSCP region for the data packets those match  
the corresponding ACL.  
Local Priority: Specify the local priority for the data packets those  
match the corresponding ACL.  
11.4 Policy Binding  
Policy Binding function can have the policy take its effect on a specific port/VLAN. The policy will  
take effect only when it is bound to a port/VLAN. In the same way, the port/VLAN will receive the  
data packets and process them based on the policy only when the policy is bound to the  
port/VLAN.  
The Policy Binding can be implemented on Binding Table, Port Binding and VLAN Binding  
pages.  
11.4.1 Binding Table  
On this page view the policy bound to port/VLAN.  
Choose the menu ACL→Policy Binding→Binding Table to load the following page.  
Figure 11-12 Binding Table  
The following entries are displayed on this screen:  
Search Option  
Show Mode:  
Select a show mode appropriate to your needs.  
Policy Bind Table  
Select:  
Select the desired entry to delete the corresponding binding policy.  
170  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Index:  
Displays the index of the binding policy.  
Displays the name of the binding policy.  
Displays the port number or VLAN ID bound to the policy.  
Displays the binding direction.  
Policy Name:  
Interface:  
Direction:  
11.4.2 Port Binding  
On this page you can bind a policy to a port.  
Choose the menu ACL→Policy Binding→Port Binding to load the following page.  
Figure 11-13 Bind the policy to the port  
The following entries are displayed on this screen:  
Port-Bind Config  
Policy Name:  
Port:  
Select the name of the policy you want to bind.  
Enter the number of the port you want to bind.  
Port-Bind Table  
Index:  
Displays the index of the binding policy.  
Policy Name:  
Port:  
Displays the name of the binding policy.  
Displays the number of the port bound to the corresponding policy.  
Displays the binding direction.  
Direction:  
11.4.3 VLAN Binding  
On this page you can bind a policy to a VLAN.  
171  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Choose the menu ACL→Policy Binding→VLAN Binding to load the following page.  
Figure11-14 Bind the policy to the VLAN  
The following entries are displayed on this screen:  
VLAN-Bind Config  
Policy Name:  
VLAN ID:  
Select the name of the policy you want to bind.  
Enter the ID of the VLAN you want to bind.  
VLAN-Bind Table  
Index:  
Displays the index of the binding policy.  
Displays the name of the binding policy.  
Displays the ID of the VLAN bound to the corresponding policy.  
Displays the binding direction.  
Policy Name:  
VLAN ID:  
Direction:  
Configuration Procedure:  
Step Operation  
Description  
1 Configure  
time-range  
effective Required. On ACL→Time-Range configuration pages,  
configure the effective time-ranges for ACLs.  
2 Configure ACL rules  
Required. On ACL→ACL Config configuration pages,  
configure ACL rules to match packets.  
3 Configure Policy  
Required. On ACL→Policy Config configuration pages,  
configure the policy to control the data packets those match  
the corresponding ACL rules.  
4 Bind the policy to the Required. On ACL→Policy Binding configuration pages,  
port/VLAN  
bind the policy to the port/VLAN to make the policy effective  
on the corresponding port/VLAN.  
11.5 Application Example for ACL  
Network Requirements  
1. The manager of the R&D department can access to the forum of the company and the Internet  
without any forbiddance. The MAC address of the manager is 00-64-A5-5D-12-C3.  
2. The staff of the R&D department cannot access to the Internet during the working time but can  
visit the forum all day.  
172  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
3. The staff of the marketing department can access to the Internet all day but cannot visit the  
forum during the working time.  
4. The R&D department and marketing department cannot communicate with each other.  
Network Diagram  
Configuration Procedure  
Step Operation  
Description  
1
Configure  
Time-range  
On ACL→Time-Range page, create a time-range named work_time.  
Select Week mode and configure the week time from Monday to Friday.  
Add a time-slice 08:00~18:00.  
2
Configure  
for On ACL→ACL Config→ACL Create page, create ACL 11.  
requirement 1  
On ACL→ACL Config→MAC ACL page, select ACL 11, create Rule 1,  
configure the operation as Permit, configure the S-MAC as  
00-64-A5-5D-12-C3 and mask as FF-FF-FF-FF-FF-FF, and configure  
the time-range as No Limit.  
On ACL→Policy Config→Policy Create page, create a policy named  
manager.  
On ACL→Policy Config→Action Create page, add ACL 11 to Policy  
manager.  
On ACL→Policy Binding→Port Binding page, select Policy manager  
to bind to port 3.  
173  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Step Operation  
Description  
3
Configure  
requirement  
and 4  
for On ACL→ACL Config→ACL Create page, create ACL 100.  
2
On ACL→ACL Config→Standard-IP ACL page, select ACL 100,  
create Rule 1, configure operation as Deny, configure S-IP as  
10.10.70.1 and mask as 255.255.255.0, configure D-IP as 10.10.50.1  
and mask as 255.255.255.0, configure the time-range as No Limit.  
On ACL→ACL Config→Standard-IP ACL page, select ACL 100,  
create Rule 2, configure operation as Deny, configure S-IP as  
10.10.70.1 and mask as 255.255.255.0, configure D-IP as 10.10.88.5  
and mask as 255.255.255.255, configure the time-range as No Limit.  
On ACL→ACL Config→Standard-IP ACL page, select ACL 100,  
create Rule 3, configure operation as Permit, configure S-IP as  
10.10.70.1 and mask as 255.255.255.0, configure D-IP as 10.10.88.5  
and mask as 255.255.255.0, configure the time-range as work_time.  
On ACL→Policy Config→Action Create page, add ACL 100 to Policy  
limit1.  
On ACL→Policy Binding→Port Binding page, select Policy limit1 to  
bind to port 3.  
4
Configure  
requirement  
and 4  
for On ACL→ACL Config→ACL Create page, create ACL 101.  
3
On ACL→ACL Config→Standard-IP ACL page, select ACL 101,  
create Rule 4, configure operation as Deny, configure S-IP as  
10.10.70.1 and mask as 255.255.255.0, configure D-IP as 10.10.50.1  
and mask as 255.255.255.0, configure the time-range as No Limit.  
On ACL→ACL Config→Standard-IP ACL page, select ACL 101,  
create Rule 5, configure operation as Deny, configure S-IP as  
10.10.70.1 and mask as 255.255.255.0, configure D-IP as 10.10.88.5  
and mask as 255.255.255.255, configure the time-range as No Limit.  
On ACL→Policy Config→Policy Create page, create a policy named  
limit2.  
On ACL→Policy Config→Action Create page, add ACL 101 to Policy  
limit1.  
On ACL→Policy Binding→Port Binding page, select Policy limit2 to  
bind to port 4.  
Return to CONTENTS  
174  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 12 Network Security  
Network Security module is to provide the multiple protection measures for the network security,  
including four submenus: IP-MAC Binding, ARP Inspection, DoS Defend and 802.1X. Please  
configure the functions appropriate to your need.  
12.1 IP-MAC Binding  
The IP-MAC Binding function allows you to bind the IP address, MAC address, VLAN ID and the  
connected Port number of the Host together. Based on the IP-MAC binding table and ARP  
Inspection functions, you can control the network access and only allow the Hosts matching the  
bound entries to access the network.  
The following three IP-MAC Binding methods are supported by the switch.  
（1） Manually: You can manually bind the IP address, MAC address, VLAN ID and the Port  
number together in the condition that you have got the related information of the Hosts in the  
LAN.  
（2） Scanning: You can quickly get the information of the IP address, MAC address, VLAN ID  
and the connected port number of the Hosts in the LAN via the ARP Scanning function,  
and bind them conveniently. You are only requested to enter the range of the IP address  
on the ARP Scanning page for the scanning.  
（3） DHCP Snooping: You can use DHCP Snooping functions to monitor the process of the  
Host obtaining the IP address from DHCP server, and record the IP address, MAC address,  
VLAN and the connected Port number of the Host for automatic binding.  
These three methods are also considered as the sources of the IP-MAC Binding entries. The  
entries from various sources should be different from one another to avoid collision. Among the  
entries in collision, only the entry from the source with the highest priority will take effect. These  
three sources (Manual, Scanning and Snooping) are in descending order of priority.  
The IP-MAC Binding function is implemented on the Binding Table, Manual Binding, ARP  
Scanning and DHCP Snooping pages.  
12.1.1 Binding Table  
On this page, you can view the information of the bound entries.  
Choose the menu Network Security→IP-MAC Binding→Binding Table to load the following  
page.  
Figure 12-1 Binding Table  
175  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
The following entries are displayed on this screen:  
Search Option  
Source:  
Select a Source from the pull-down list and click the Search  
button to view your desired entry in the Binding Table.  
•
•
All: All the bound entries will be displayed.  
Manual: Only the manually added entries will be  
displayed.  
•
•
Scanning: Only the entries formed via ARP Scanning will  
be displayed.  
Snooping: Only the entries formed via DHCP Snooping  
will be displayed.  
Binding Table  
Select Option:  
Click the Select button to quick-select the corresponding entry  
based on the key word you entered.  
•
•
•
Host Name: Click the Select button to quick-select the  
corresponding entry based on the Host Name you entered.  
IP Address: Click the Select button to quick-select the  
corresponding entry based on the IP address you entered.  
MAC Address: Click the Select button to quick-select the  
corresponding entry based on the MAC address you  
entered.  
Select:  
Select the desired entry to modify the Host Name, MAC  
address, VLAN ID, Port and Protect Type. It is multi-optional.  
Host Name:  
IP Address:  
MAC Address:  
Allows you to view and modify the Host Name of the entry.  
Displays the IP Address of the Host.  
Displays the MAC Address of the Host. Allows you to modify the  
MAC address of the entry which is from Manual and Scanning.  
VLAN ID:  
Port:  
Displays the VLAN ID here. Allows you to modify the VLAN ID  
of the entry which is from Manual and Scanning.  
Displays the number of port connected to the Host. Allows you  
to modify the port of the entry which is from Manual and  
Scanning.  
Protect Type:  
Source:  
Allows you to view and modify the Protect Type of the entry.  
Displays the Source of the entry.  
Collision:  
Displays the Collision status of the entry.  
•
Warning: Indicates that the collision may be caused by the  
MSTP function.  
•
Critical: Indicates that the entry has a collision with the  
other entries.  
Note:  
1. Among the entries with Critical collision level, the one with the highest Source priority will take  
effect.  
176  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2. Among the conflicting entries with the same Source priority, only the last added or edited one  
will take effect.  
12.1.2 Manual Binding  
You can manually bind the IP address, MAC address, VLAN ID and the Port number together in  
the condition that you have got the related information of the Hosts in the LAN.  
Choose the menu Network Security→IP-MAC Binding→Manual Binding to load the following  
page.  
Figure 12-2 Manual Binding  
The following entries are displayed on this screen:  
Manual Binding Option  
Host Name:  
IP Address:  
MAC Address:  
VLAN ID:  
Enter the Host Name.  
Enter the IP Address of the Host.  
Enter the MAC Address of the Host.  
Enter the VLAN ID.  
Port:  
Select the number of port connected to the Host.  
Select the Protect Type for the entry.  
Protect Type:  
Manual Binding Table  
Select:  
Select the desired entry to be deleted. It is multi-optional.  
Displays the Host Name here.  
Host Name:  
IP Address:  
MAC Address:  
VLAN ID:  
Port:  
Displays the IP Address of the Host.  
Displays the MAC Address of the Host.  
Displays the VLAN ID here.  
Displays the number of port connected to the Host.  
177  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Protect Type:  
Collision:  
Displays the Protect Type of the entry.  
Displays the Collision status of the entry.  
•
Warning: Indicates that the collision may be  
caused by the MSTP function.  
•
Critical: Indicates that the entry has a collision  
with the other entries.  
12.1.3 ARP Scanning  
ARP (Address Resolution Protocol) is used to analyze and map IP addresses to the corresponding  
MAC addresses so that packets can be delivered to their destinations correctly. IP address is the  
address of the Host on Network layer. MAC address, the address of the Host on Data link layer, is  
necessary for the packet to reach the very device. So the destination IP address carried in a  
packet need to be translated into the corresponding MAC address.  
ARP functions to translate the IP address into the corresponding MAC address and maintain an  
ARP Table, where the latest used IP address-to-MAC address mapping entries are stored. When  
the Host communicates with a strange Host, ARP works as the following figure shown.  
Figure 12-3 ARP Implementation Procedure  
（1） Suppose there are two hosts in the LAN: Host A and Host B. To send a packet to Host B,  
Host A checks its own ARP Table first to see if the ARP entry related to the IP address of Host  
B exists. If yes, Host A will directly send the packets to Host B. If the corresponding MAC  
address is not found in the ARP Table, Host A will broadcast ARP request packet, which  
contains the IP address of Host B, the IP address of Host A, and the MAC address of Host A,  
in the LAN.  
（2） Since the ARP request packet is broadcasted, all hosts in the LAN can receive it. However,  
only the Host B recognizes and responds to the request. Host B sends back an ARP reply  
packet to Host A, with its MAC address carried in the packet.  
（3） Upon receiving the ARP reply packet, Host A adds the IP address and the corresponding  
MAC address of Host B to its ARP Table for the further packets forwarding.  
ARP Scanning function enables the switch to send the ARP request packets of the specified IP  
field to the Hosts in the LAN or VLAN. Upon receiving the ARP reply packet, the switch can get the  
IP address, MAC address, VLAN and the connected port number of the Host by analyzing the  
packet and bind them conveniently.  
Choose the menu Network Security→IP-MAC Binding→ARP Scanning to load the following  
page.  
178  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Figure 12-4 ARP Scanning  
The following entries are displayed on this screen:  
Scanning Option  
Start IP Address:  
End IP Address:  
VLAN ID:  
Specify the Start IP Address.  
Specify the End IP Address.  
Enter the VLAN ID. If blank, the switch will send the untagged  
packets for scanning.  
Scan:  
Click the Scan button to scan the Hosts in the LAN.  
Scanning Result  
Select:  
Select the desired entry to be bound or deleted.  
Displays the Host Name here.  
Host Name:  
IP Address:  
MAC Address:  
VLAN ID:  
Displays the IP Address of the Host.  
Displays the MAC Address of the Host.  
Displays the VLAN ID here.  
Port:  
Displays the number of port connected to the Host.  
Displays the Protect Type of the entry.  
Displays the Collision status of the entry.  
Protect Type:  
Collision:  
•
Warning: Indicates that the collision may be caused by the  
MSTP function.  
•
Critical: Indicates that the entry has a collision with the  
other entries.  
12.1.4 DHCP Snooping  
Nowadays, the network is getting larger and more complicated. The amount of the PCs always  
exceeds that of the assigned IP addresses. The wireless network and the laptops are widely used  
and the locations of the PCs are always changed. Therefore, the corresponding IP address of the  
PC should be updated with a few configurations. DHCP（Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol, the  
179  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
network configuration protocol optimized and developed based on the BOOTP, functions to solve  
the above mentioned problems.  
DHCP Working Principle  
DHCP works via the “Client/Server” communication mode. The Client applies to the Server for  
configuration. The Server assigns the configuration information, such as the IP address, to the  
Client, so as to reach a dynamic employ of the network source. A Server can assign the IP  
address for several Clients, which is illustrated in the following figure.  
Figure 12-5 Network diagram for DHCP-snooping implementation  
For different DHCP Clients, DHCP Server provides three IP address assigning methods:  
（1） Manually assign the IP address: Allows the administrator to bind the static IP address to  
the specific Client (e.g.: WWW Server) via the DHCP Server.  
（2） Automatically assign the IP address: DHCP Server assigns the IP address without an  
expiration time limitation to the Clients.  
（3） Dynamically assign the IP address: DHCP Server assigns the IP address with an  
expiration time. When the time for the IP address expired, the Client should apply for a  
new one.  
180  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The most Clients obtain the IP addresses dynamically, which is illustrated in the following figure.  
Figure 12-6 Interaction between a DHCP client and a DHCP server  
（1） DHCP-DISCOVER Stage: The Client broadcasts the DHCP-DISCOVER packet to find the  
DHCP Server.  
（2） DHCP-OFFER Stage: Upon receiving the DHCP-DISCOVER packet, the DHCP Server  
selects an IP address from the IP pool according to the assigning priority of the IP  
addresses and replies to the Client with DHCP-OFFER packet carrying the IP address and  
other information.  
（3） DHCP-REQUEST Stage: In the situation that there are several DHCP Servers sending the  
DHCP-OFFER packets, the Client will only respond to the first received DHCP-OFFER  
packet and broadcast the DHCP-REQUEST packet which includes the assigned IP  
address of the DHCP-OFFER packet.  
（4） DHCP-ACK Stage: Since the DHCP-REQUEST packet is broadcasted, all DHCP Servers  
on the network segment can receive it. However, only the requested Server processes the  
request. If the DHCP Server acknowledges assigning this IP address to the Client, it will  
send the DHCP-ACK packet back to the Client. Otherwise, the Server will send the  
DHCP-NAK packet to refuse assigning this IP address to the Client.  
Option 82  
The DHCP packets are classified into 8 types with the same format based on the format of BOOTP  
packet. The difference between DHCP packet and BOOTP packet is the Option field. The Option  
field of the DHCP packet is used to expand the function, for example, the DHCP can transmit the  
control information and network parameters via the Option field, so as to assign the IP address to  
the Client dynamically. For the details of the DHCP Option, please refer to RFC 2132.  
Option 82 records the location of the DHCP Client. Upon receiving the DHCP-REQUEST packet,  
the switch adds the Option 82 to the packet and then transmits the packet to DHCP Server.  
Administrator can be acquainted with the location of the DHCP Client via Option 82 so as to locate  
the DHCP Client for fulfilling the security control and account management of Client. The Server  
181  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
supported Option 82 also can set the distribution policy of IP addresses and the other parameters  
according to the Option 82, providing more flexible address distribution way.  
Option 82 can contain 255 sub-options at most. If Option 82 is defined, at least a sub-option  
should be defined. This switch supports two sub-options: Circuit ID and Remote ID. Since there is  
no universal standard about the content of Option 82, different manufacturers define the  
sub-options of Option 82 to their need. For this switch, the sub-options are defined as the following:  
The Circuit ID is defined to be the number of the port which receives the DHCP Request packets  
and its VLAN number. The Remote ID is defined to be the MAC address of DHCP Snooping  
device which receives the DHCP Request packets from DHCP Clients.  
DHCP Cheating Attack  
During the working process of DHCP, generally there is no authentication mechanism between  
Server and Client. If there are several DHCP servers in the network, network confusion and  
security problem will happen. The common cases incurring the illegal DHCP servers are the  
following two:  
（1） It’s common that the illegal DHCP server is manually configured by the user by mistake.  
（2） Hacker exhausted the IP addresses of the normal DHCP server and then pretended to be  
a legal DHCP server to assign the IP addresses and the other parameters to Clients. For  
example, hacker used the pretended DHCP server to assign a modified DNS server  
address to users so as to induce the users to the evil financial website or electronic trading  
website and cheat the users of their accounts and passwords. The following figure  
illustrates the DHCP Cheating Attack implementation procedure.  
Figure 12-7 DHCP Cheating Attack Implementation Procedure  
DHCP Snooping feature only allows the port connected to the DHCP Server as the trusted port to  
forward DHCP packets and thereby ensures that users get proper IP addresses. DHCP Snooping  
is to monitor the process of the Host obtaining the IP address from DHCP server, and record the IP  
address, MAC address, VLAN and the connected Port number of the Host for automatic binding.  
The bound entry can cooperate with the ARP Inspection and the other security protection features.  
182  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DHCP Snooping feature prevents the network from the DHCP Server Cheating Attack by  
discarding the DHCP packets on the distrusted port, so as to enhance the network security.  
Choose the menu Network Security→IP-MAC Binding→DHCP Snooping to load the following  
page.  
Figure 12-8 DHCP Snooping  
Note:  
If you want to enable the DHCP Snooping feature for the member port of LAG, please ensure the  
parameters of all the member ports are the same.  
183  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The following entries are displayed on this screen:  
DHCP Snooping Config  
DHCP Snooping:  
Enable/Disable the DHCP Snooping function globally.  
Global Flow Control:  
Select the value to specify the maximum amount of DHCP  
messages that can be forwarded by the switch per second. The  
excessive massages will be discarded.  
Decline Threshold:  
Select the value to specify the minimum transmission rate of the  
Decline packets to trigger the Decline protection for the specific  
port.  
Decline Flow Control:  
Select the value to specify the Decline Flow Control. The traffic  
flow of the corresponding port will be limited to be this value if  
the transmission rate of the Decline packets exceeds the  
Decline Threshold.  
Option 82 Config  
Option 82 Support:  
Existed Option 82 field:  
Enable/Disable the Option 82 feature.  
Select the operation for the Option 82 field of the DHCP request  
packets from the Host.  
•
•
Keep: Indicates to keep the Option 82 field of the packets.  
Replace: Indicates to replace the Option 82 field of the  
packets with the switch defined one.  
•
Drop: Indicates to discard the packets including the Option  
82 field.  
Customization:  
Circuit ID:  
Enable/Disable the switch to define the Option 82.  
Enter the sub-option Circuit ID for the customized Option 82.  
Enter the sub-option Remote ID for the customized Option 82.  
Remote ID:  
Port Config  
Port Select:  
Click the Select button to quick-select the corresponding port  
based on the port number you entered.  
Select:  
Select your desired port for configuration. It is multi-optional.  
Displays the port number.  
Port:  
Trusted Port:  
Select Enable/Disable the port to be a Trusted Port. Only the  
Trusted Port can receive the DHCP packets from DHCP  
servers.  
MAC Verify:  
Select Enable/Disable the MAC Verify feature. There are two  
fields of the DHCP packet containing the MAC address of the  
Host. The MAC Verify feature is to compare the two fields and  
discard the packet if the two fields are different.  
Flow Control:  
Select Enable/Disable the Flow Control feature for the DHCP  
packets. The excessive DHCP packets will be discarded.  
184  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Decline Protect:  
LAG:  
Select Enable/Disable the Decline Protect feature.  
Displays the LAG to which the port belongs to.  
12.2 ARP Inspection  
According to the ARP Implementation Procedure stated in 12.1.3 ARP Scanning, it can be found  
that ARP protocol can facilitate the Hosts in the same network segment to communicate with one  
another or access to external network via Gateway. However, since ARP protocol is implemented  
with the premise that all the Hosts and Gateways are trusted, there are high security risks during  
ARP Implementation Procedure in the actual complex network. Thus, the cheating attacks against  
ARP, such as imitating Gateway, cheating Gateway, cheating terminal Hosts and ARP Flooding  
Attack, frequently occur to the network, especially to the large network such as campus network  
and so on. The following part will simply introduce these ARP attacks.  
Imitating Gateway  
The attacker sends the MAC address of a forged Gateway to Host, and then the Host will  
automatically update the ARP table after receiving the ARP response packets, which causes that  
the Host cannot access the network normally. The ARP Attack implemented by imitating Gateway  
is illustrated in the following figure.  
Figure 12-9 ARP Attack - Imitating Gateway  
As the above figure shown, the attacker sends the fake ARP packets with a forged Gateway  
address to the normal Host, and then the Host will automatically update the ARP table after  
receiving the ARP packets. When the Host tries to communicate with Gateway, the Host will  
encapsulate this false destination MAC address for packets, which results in a breakdown of the  
normal communication.  
Cheating Gateway  
The attacker sends the wrong IP address-to-MAC address mapping entries of Hosts to the  
Gateway, which causes that the Gateway cannot communicate with the legal terminal Hosts  
normally. The ARP Attack implemented by cheating Gateway is illustrated in the following figure.  
185  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Figure 12-10 ARP Attack – Cheating Gateway  
As the above figure shown, the attacker sends the fake ARP packets of Host A to the Gateway,  
and then the Gateway will automatically update its ARP table after receiving the ARP packets.  
When the Gateway tries to communicate with Host A in LAN, it will encapsulate this false  
destination MAC address for packets, which results in a breakdown of the normal communication.  
Cheating Terminal Hosts  
The attacker sends the false IP address-to-MAC address mapping entries of terminal Host/Server  
to another terminal Host, which causes that the two terminal Hosts in the same network segment  
cannot communicate with each other normally. The ARP Attack implemented by cheating terminal  
Hosts is illustrated in the following figure.  
186  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Figure 12-11 ARP Attack – Cheating Terminal Hosts  
As the above figure shown, the attacker sends the fake ARP packets of Host A to Host B, and then  
Host B will automatically update its ARP table after receiving the ARP packets. When Host B tries  
to communicate with Host A, it will encapsulate this false destination MAC address for packets,  
which results in a breakdown of the normal communication.  
Man-In-The-Middle Attack  
The attacker continuously sends the false ARP packets to the Hosts in LAN so as to make the  
Hosts maintain the wrong ARP table. When the Hosts in LAN communicate with one another, they  
will send the packets to the attacker according to the wrong ARP table. Thus, the attacker can get  
and process the packets before forwarding them. During the procedure, the communication  
packets information between the two Hosts are stolen in the case that the Hosts were unaware of  
the attack. That is called Man-In-The-Middle Attack. The Man-In-The-Middle Attack is illustrated in  
the following figure.  
187  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Figure 12-12 Man-In-The-Middle Attack  
Suppose there are three Hosts in LAN connected with one another through a switch.  
Host A: IP address is 192.168.0.101; MAC address is 00-00-00-11-11-11.  
Host B: IP address is 192.168.0.102; MAC address is 00-00-00-22-22-22.  
Attacker: IP address is 192.168.0.103; MAC address is 00-00-00-33-33-33.  
1. First, the attacker sends the false ARP response packets.  
2. Upon receiving the ARP response packets, Host A and Host B updates the ARP table of their  
own.  
3. When Host A communicates with Host B, it will send the packets to the false destination MAC  
address, i.e. to the attacker, according to the updated ARP table.  
4. After receiving the communication packets between Host A and Host B, the attacker processes  
and forwards the packets to the correct destination MAC address, which makes Host A and  
Host B keep a normal-appearing communication.  
5. The attacker continuously sends the false ARP packets to the Host A and Host B so as to make  
the Hosts always maintain the wrong ARP table.  
In the view of Host A and Host B, their packets are directly sent to each other. But in fact, there is a  
Man-In-The-Middle stolen the packets information during the communication procedure. This kind  
of ARP attack is called Man-In-The-Middle attack.  
ARP Flooding Attack  
The attacker broadcasts a mass of various fake ARP packets in a network segment to occupy the  
network bandwidth viciously, which results in a dramatic slowdown of network speed. Meantime,  
the Gateway learns the false IP address-to-MAC address mapping entries from these ARP  
packets and updates its ARP table. As a result, the ARP table is fully occupied by the false entries  
and unable to learn the ARP entries of legal Hosts, which causes that the legal Hosts cannot  
access the external network.  
188  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The IP-MAC Binding function allows the switch to bind the IP address, MAC address, VLAN ID  
and the connected Port number of the Host together when the Host connects to the switch. Based  
on the predefined IP-MAC Binding entries, the ARP Inspection functions to detect the ARP packets  
and filter the illegal ARP packet so as to prevent the network from ARP attacks.  
The ARP Inspection function is implemented on the ARP Detect, ARP Defend and ARP  
Statistics pages.  
12.2.1 ARP Detect  
ARP Detect feature enables the switch to detect the ARP packets based on the bound entries in  
the IP-MAC Binding Table and filter the illegal ARP packets, so as to prevent the network from  
ARP attacks, such as the Network Gateway Spoofing and Man-In-The-Middle Attack, etc.  
Choose the menu Network Security →ARP Inspection →ARP Detect to load the following  
page.  
Figure 12-13 ARP Detect  
The following entries are displayed on this screen:  
ARP Detect  
ARP Detect:  
Enable/Disable the ARP Detect function, and click the Apply  
button to apply.  
Trusted Port  
Trusted Port:  
Select the port for which the ARP Detect function is unnecessary  
as the Trusted Port. The specific ports, such as up-linked port,  
routing port and LAG port, should be set as Trusted Port. To  
ensure the normal communication of the switch, please  
configure the ARP Trusted Port before enabling the ARP Detect  
function.  
Note:  
ARP Detect and ARP Defend cannot be enabled at the same time.  
189  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Configuration Procedure:  
Step Operation  
Description  
1
Bind the IP address, MAC Required. On the IP-MAC Binding page, bind the IP  
address, VLAN ID and the address, MAC address, VLAN ID and the connected Port  
connected Port number of number of the Host together via Manual Binding, ARP  
the Host together.  
Scanning or DHCP Snooping.  
2
3
Enable the protection for the Required. On the Network Security→IP-MAC  
bound entry.  
Binding→Binding Table page, specify a protect type for  
the corresponding bound entry.  
Specify the trusted port.  
Required.  
On  
the  
Network  
Security→ARP  
Inspection→ARP Detect page, specify the trusted port.  
The specific ports, such as up-linked port, routing port  
and LAG port, should be set as Trusted Port.  
4
Enable ARP Detect feature. Required.  
On  
the  
Network  
Security→ARP  
Inspection→ARP Detect page, enable the ARP Detect  
feature.  
12.2.2 ARP Defend  
With the ARP Defend enabled, the switch can terminate receiving the ARP packets for 300  
seconds when the transmission speed of the legal ARP packet on the port exceeds the defined  
value so as to avoid ARP Attack flood.  
Choose the menu Network Security→ARP Inspection→ARP Defend to load the following page.  
Figure 12-14 ARP Defend  
190  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
The following entries are displayed on this screen:  
ARP Defend  
Port Select:  
Click the Select button to quick-select the corresponding port  
based on the port number you entered.  
Select:  
Port:  
Select your desired port for configuration. It is multi-optional.  
Displays the port number.  
Defend:  
Speed:  
Select Enable/Disable the ARP Defend feature for the port.  
Enter a value to specify the maximum amount of the received ARP  
packets per second.  
Current Speed:  
Status:  
Displays the current speed of the received ARP packets.  
Displays the status of the ARP attack.  
LAG:  
Displays the LAG to which the port belongs to.  
Operation:  
Click the Recover button to restore the port to the normal status.  
The ARP Defend for this port will be re-enabled.  
Note:  
1. It’s not recommended to enable the ARP Defend feature for the LAG member port.  
2. ARP Detect and ARP Defend cannot be enabled at the same time.  
12.2.3 ARP Statistics  
ARP Statistics feature displays the number of the illegal ARP packets received on each port, which  
facilitates you to locate the network malfunction and take the related protection measures.  
191  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Choose the menu Network Security→ARP Inspection→ARP Statistics to load the following  
page.  
Figure 12-15 ARP Statistics  
The following entries are displayed on this screen:  
Auto Refresh  
Auto Refresh:  
Enable/Disable the Auto Refresh feature.  
Refresh Interval:  
Illegal ARP Packet  
Specify the refresh interval to display the ARP Statistics.  
Port:  
Displays the port number.  
Trusted Port:  
Illegal ARP Packet:  
Indicates the port is an ARP Trusted Port or not.  
Displays the number of the received illegal ARP packets.  
12.3 DoS Defend  
DoS (Denial of Service) Attack is to occupy the network bandwidth maliciously by the network  
attackers or the evil programs sending a lot of service requests to the Host, which incurs an  
abnormal service or even breakdown of the network.  
With DoS Defend function enabled, the switch can analyze the specific fields of the IP packets and  
distinguish the malicious DoS attack packets. Upon detecting the packets, the switch will discard  
the illegal packets directly and limit the transmission rate of the legal packets if the over legal  
packets may incur a breakdown of the network. The switch can defend a few types of DoS attack  
listed in the following table.  
192  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
DoS Attack Type  
Description  
Land Attack  
The attacker sends a specific fake SYN packet to the destination Host.  
Since both the source IP address and the destination IP address of the SYN  
packet are set to be the IP address of the Host, the Host will be trapped in  
an endless circle for building the initial connection. The performance of the  
network will be reduced extremely.  
Scan SYNFIN  
The attacker sends the packet with its SYN field and the FIN field set to 1.  
The SYN field is used to request initial connection whereas the FIN field is  
used to request disconnection. Therefore, the packet of this type is illegal.  
The switch can defend this type of illegal packet.  
Xmascan  
The attacker sends the illegal packet with its TCP index, FIN, URG and  
PSH field set to 1.  
NULL Scan Attack  
The attacker sends the illegal packet with its TCP index and all the control  
fields set to 0. During the TCP connection and data transmission, the  
packets with all the control fields set to 0 are considered as the illegal  
packets.  
SYN packet with its source port  
less than 1024  
The attacker sends the illegal packet with its TCP SYN field set to 1 and  
source port less than 1024.  
Blat Attack  
The attacker sends the illegal packet with its source port and destination  
port on Layer 4 the same and its URG field set to 1. Similar to the Land  
Attack, the system performance of the attacked Host is reduced since the  
Host circularly attempts to build a connection with the attacker.  
Ping Flooding  
The attacker floods the destination system with Ping broadcast storm  
packets to forbid the system to respond to the legal communication.  
SYN/SYN-ACK Flooding  
The attacker uses a fake IP address to send TCP request packets to the  
Server. Upon receiving the request packets, the Server responds with  
SYN-ACK packets. Since the IP address is fake, no response will be  
returned. The Server will keep on sending SYN-ACK packets. If the attacker  
sends overflowing fake request packets, the network resource will be  
occupied maliciously and the requests of the legal clients will be denied.  
Table 12-1 Defendable DoS Attack Types  
On this page, you can enable the DoS Defend type appropriate to your need.  
193  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Choose the menu Network Security→DoS Defend→DoS Defend to load the following page.  
Figure 12-16 DoS Defend  
The following entries are displayed on this screen:  
Configure  
DoS Defend:  
Defend Table  
Select:  
Enable/Disable DoS Defend function.  
Select the entry to enable the corresponding Defend Type.  
Displays the Defend Type name.  
Defend Type:  
Tips:  
You are suggested to take the following further steps to ensure the network security.  
1. It’s recommended to inspect and repair the system vulnerability regularly. It is also necessary  
to install the system bulletins and backup the important information in time.  
2. The network administrator is suggested to inspect the physic environment of the network and  
block the unnecessary network services.  
3. Enhance the network security via the protection devices, such as the hardware firewall.  
12.4 802.1X  
The 802.1X protocol was developed by IEEE802 LAN/WAN committee to deal with the security  
issues of wireless LANs. It was then used in Ethernet as a common access control mechanism for  
LAN ports to solve mainly authentication and security problems.  
802.1X is a port-based network access control protocol. It authenticates and controls devices  
requesting for access in terms of the ports of LAN access control devices. With the 802.1X  
protocol enabled, a supplicant can access the LAN only when it passes the authentication,  
whereas those failing to pass the authentication are denied when accessing the LAN.  
194  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Architecture of 802.1X Authentication  
802.1X adopts a client/server architecture with three entities: a supplicant system, an  
authenticator system, and an authentication server system, as shown in the following figure.  
Figure 12-17 Architecture of 802.1X authentication  
（1） Supplicant System: The supplicant system is an entity in LAN and is authenticated by the  
authenticator system. The supplicant system is usually a common user terminal computer.  
An 802.1X authentication is initiated when a user launches client program on the  
supplicant system. Note that the client program must support the 802.1X authentication  
protocol.  
（2） Authenticator System: The authenticator system is usually an 802.1X-supported network  
device, such as this TP-LINK switch. It provides the physical or logical port for the  
supplicant system to access the LAN and authenticates the supplicant system.  
（3） Authentication Server System: The authentication server system is an entity that  
provides authentication service to the authenticator system. Normally in the form of a  
RADIUS server. Authentication Server can store user information and serve to perform  
authentication and authorization. To ensure a stable authentication system, an alternate  
authentication server can be specified. If the main authentication server is in trouble, the  
alternate authentication server can substitute it to provide normal authentication service.  
The Mechanism of an 802.1X Authentication System  
IEEE 802.1X authentication system uses EAP (Extensible Authentication Protocol) to exchange  
information between the supplicant system and the authentication server.  
（1） EAP protocol packets transmitted between the supplicant system and the authenticator  
system are encapsulated as EAPOL packets.  
（2） EAP protocol packets transmitted between the authenticator system and the RADIUS  
server can either be encapsulated as EAPOR (EAP over RADIUS) packets or be  
terminated at authenticator system and the authenticator system then communicate with  
RADIUS servers through PAP (Password Authentication Protocol) or CHAP (Challenge  
Handshake Authentication Protocol) protocol packets.  
（3） When a supplicant system passes the authentication, the authentication server passes the  
information about the supplicant system to the authenticator system. The authenticator  
system in turn determines the state (authorized or unauthorized) of the controlled port  
according to the instructions (accept or reject) received from the RADIUS server.  
195  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
802.1X Authentication Procedure  
An 802.1X authentication can be initiated by supplicant system or authenticator system. When the  
authenticator system detects an unauthenticated supplicant in LAN, it will initiate the 802.1X  
authentication by sending EAP-Request/Identity packets to the supplicant. The supplicant system  
can also launch an 802.1X client program to initiate an 802.1X authentication through the sending  
of an EAPOL-Start packet to the switch,  
This TP-LINK switch can authenticate supplicant systems in EAP relay mode or EAP terminating  
mode. The following illustration of these two modes will take the 802.1X authentication procedure  
initiated by the supplicant system for example.  
（1） EAP Relay Mode  
This mode is defined in 802.1X. In this mode, EAP-packets are encapsulated in higher level  
protocol (such as EAPOR) packets to allow them successfully reach the authentication server.  
This mode normally requires the RADIUS server to support the two fields of EAP: the  
EAP-message field and the Message-authenticator field. This switch supports EAP-MD5  
authentication way for the EAP relay mode. The following figure describes the basic EAP-MD5  
authentication procedure.  
Figure 12-18 EAP-MD5 Authentication Procedure  
1. A supplicant system launches an 802.1X client program via its registered user name and  
password to initiate an access request through the sending of an EAPOL-Start packet to the  
switch. The 802.1X client program then forwards the packet to the switch to start the  
authentication process.  
2. Upon receiving the authentication request packet, the switch sends an EAP-Request/Identity  
packet to ask the 802.1X client program for the user name.  
3. The 802.1X client program responds by sending an EAP-Response/Identity packet to the  
switch with the user name included. The switch then encapsulates the packet in a RADIUS  
Access-Request packet and forwards it to the RADIUS server.  
196  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4. Upon receiving the user name from the switch, the RADIUS server retrieves the user name,  
finds the corresponding password by matching the user name in its database, encrypts the  
password using a randomly-generated key, and sends the key to the switch through an  
RADIUS Access-Challenge packet. The switch then sends the key to the 802.1X client  
program.  
5. Upon receiving the key (encapsulated in an EAP-Request/MD5 Challenge packet) from the  
switch, the client program encrypts the password of the supplicant system with the key and  
sends the encrypted password (contained in an EAP-Response/MD5 Challenge packet) to  
the RADIUS server through the switch. (The encryption is irreversible.)  
6. The RADIUS server compares the received encrypted password (contained in a RADIUS  
Access-Request packet) with the locally-encrypted password. If the two match, it will then  
send feedbacks (through a RADIUS Access-Accept packet and an EAP-Success packet) to  
the switch to indicate that the supplicant system is authorized.  
7. The switch changes the state of the corresponding port to accepted state to allow the  
supplicant system access the network. And then the switch will monitor the status of  
supplicant by sending hand-shake packets periodically. By default, the switch will force the  
supplicant to log off if it cannot get the response from the supplicant for two times.  
8. The supplicant system can also terminate the authenticated state by sending EAPOL-Logoff  
packets to the switch. The switch then changes the port state from accepted to rejected.  
（2） EAP Terminating Mode  
In this mode, packet transmission is terminated at authenticator systems and the EAP packets are  
mapped into RADIUS packets. Authentication and accounting are accomplished through RADIUS  
protocol.  
In this mode, PAP or CHAP is employed between the switch and the RADIUS server. This switch  
supports the PAP terminating mode. The authentication procedure of PAP is illustrated in the  
following figure.  
Figure 12-19 PAP Authentication Procedure  
In PAP mode, the switch encrypts the password and sends the user name, the  
randomly-generated key, and the supplicant system-encrypted password to the RADIUS server for  
197  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
further authentication. Whereas the randomly-generated key in EAP-MD5 relay mode is generated  
by the authentication server, and the switch is responsible to encapsulate the authentication  
packet and forward it to the RADIUS server.  
802.1X Timer  
In 802.1 x authentication, the following timers are used to ensure that the supplicant system, the  
switch, and the RADIUS server interact in an orderly way:  
（1） Supplicant system timer (Supplicant Timeout): This timer is triggered by the switch  
after the switch sends a request packet to a supplicant system. The switch will resend the  
request packet to the supplicant system if the supplicant system fails to respond in the  
specified timeout period.  
（2） RADIUS server timer (Server Timeout): This timer is triggered by the switch after the  
switch sends an authentication request packet to RADIUS server. The switch will resend  
the authentication request packet if the RADIUS server fails to respond in the specified  
timeout period.  
（3） Quiet-period timer (Quiet Period): This timer sets the quiet-period. When a supplicant  
system fails to pass the authentication, the switch quiets for the specified period before it  
processes another authentication request re-initiated by the supplicant system.  
Guest VLAN  
Guest VLAN function enables the supplicants that do not pass the authentication to access the  
specific network resource.  
By default, all the ports connected to the supplicants belong to a VLAN, i.e. Guest VLAN. Users  
belonging to the Guest VLAN can access the resources of the Guest VLAN without being  
authenticated. But they need to be authenticated before accessing external resources. After  
passing the authentication, the ports will be removed from the Guest VLAN and be allowed to  
access the other resources.  
With the Guest VLAN function enabled, users can access the Guest VLAN to install 802.1X client  
program or upgrade their 802.1x clients without being authenticated. If there is no supplicant past  
the authentication on the port in a certain time, the switch will add the port to the Guest VLAN.  
With 802.1X function enabled and Guest VLAN configured, after the maximum number retries  
have been made to send the EAP-Request/Identity packets and there are still ports that have not  
sent any response back, the switch will then add these ports into the Guest VLAN according to  
their link types. Only when the corresponding user passes the 802.1X authentication, the port will  
be removed from the Guest VLAN and added to the specified VLAN. In addition, the port will back  
to the Guest VLAN when its connected user logs off.  
The 802.1X function is implemented on the Global Config, Port Config and Radius Server  
pages.  
12.4.1 Global Config  
On this page, you can enable the 802.1X authentication function globally and control the  
authentication process by specifying the Authentication Method, Guest VLAN and various Timers.  
198  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Choose the menu Network Security→802.1X→Global Config to load the following page.  
Figure 12-20 Global Config  
The following entries are displayed on this screen:  
Global Config  
802.1X:  
Enable/Disable the 802.1X function.  
Authentication Method:  
Select the Authentication Method from the pull-down list.  
•
EAP-MD5: IEEE 802.1X authentication system  
uses extensible authentication protocol (EAP) to  
exchange information between the switch and the  
client.  
authentication data can be encapsulated in the  
advanced protocol (such as RADIUS) packets to be  
transmitted to the authentication server.  
•
PAP: IEEE 802.1X authentication system uses  
extensible authentication protocol (EAP) to  
exchange information between the switch and the  
client. The transmission of EAP packets is  
terminated at the switch and the EAP packets are  
converted to the other protocol (such as RADIUS)  
packets for transmission.  
Guest VLAN:  
Enable/Disable the Guest VLAN feature.  
Guest VLAN ID:  
Enter your desired VLAN ID to enable the Guest VLAN  
feature. The supplicants in the Guest VLAN can access  
the specified network source.  
Authentication Config  
Quiet:  
Enable/Disable the Quiet timer.  
199  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Quiet Period:  
Specify a value for Quiet Period. Once the supplicant  
failed to the 802.1X Authentication, then the switch will not  
respond to the authentication request from the same  
supplicant during the Quiet Period.  
Retry Times:  
Specify the maximum transfer times of the repeated  
authentication request.  
Supplicant Timeout:  
Specify the maximum time for the switch to wait for the  
response from supplicant before resending a request to  
the supplicant.  
Server Timeout:  
Specify the maximum time for the switch to wait for the  
response from authentication server before resending a  
request to the authentication server.  
12.4.2 Port Config  
On this page, you can configure the 802.1X features for the ports based on the actual network.  
Choose the menu Network Security→802.1X→Port Config to load the following page.  
Figure 12-21 Port Config  
The following entries are displayed on this screen:  
Port Config  
Port Select:  
Click the Select button to quick-select the corresponding port  
based on the port number you entered.  
Select:  
Select your desired port for configuration. It is multi-optional.  
200  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Port:  
Displays the port number.  
Status:  
Select Enable/Disable the 802.1X authentication feature for the  
port.  
Guest VLAN:  
Select Enable/Disable the Guest VLAN feature for the port.  
Specify the Control Mode for the port.  
Control Mode:  
•
•
•
Auto: In this mode, the port will normally work only after  
passing the 802.1X Authentication.  
Force-Authorized: In this mode, the port can work normally  
without passing the 802.1X Authentication.  
Force-Unauthorized: In this mode, the port is forbidden  
working for its fixed unauthorized status.  
Control Type:  
Specify the Control Type for the port.  
•
MAC Based: Any client connected to the port should pass the  
802.1X Authentication for access.  
•
Port Based: All the clients connected to the port can access  
the network on the condition that any one of the clients has  
passed the 802.1X Authentication.  
Authorized:  
LAG:  
Displays the authentication status of the port.  
Displays the LAG to which the port belongs to.  
12.4.3 Radius Server  
RADIUS (Remote Authentication Dial-In User Service) server provides the authentication service  
for the switch via the stored client information, such as the user name, password, etc, with the  
purpose to control the authentication and accounting status of the clients. On this page, you can  
configure the parameters of the authentication server.  
Choose the menu Network Security→802.1X→Radius Server to load the following page.  
Figure 12-22 Radius Server  
201  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
The following entries are displayed on this screen:  
Authentication Config  
Primary IP:  
Enter the IP address of the authentication server.  
Secondary IP:  
Authentication Port:  
Enter the IP address of the alternate authentication server.  
Set the UDP port of authentication server(s). The default port is  
1812  
Select to modify the authentication key.  
Key Modify：  
Authentication KEY:  
Set the shared password for the switch and the authentication  
servers to exchange messages.  
Accounting Config  
Accounting:  
Enable/Disable the accounting feature.  
Primary IP:  
Enter the IP address of the accounting server.  
Enter the IP address of the alternate accounting server.  
Set the UDP port of accounting server(s). The default port is 1813.  
Select to modify the accounting key.  
Secondary IP:  
Accounting Port:  
Key Modify：  
Accounting Key:  
Set the shared password for the switch and the accounting  
servers to exchange messages.  
Note:  
1. The 802.1X function takes effect only when it is enabled globally on the switch and for the port.  
2. The 802.1X function cannot be enabled for LAG member ports. That is, the port with 802.1X  
function enabled cannot be added to the LAG.  
3. The 802.1X function should not be enabled for the port connected to the authentication server.  
In addition, the authentication parameters of the switch and the authentication server should be  
the same.  
Configuration Procedure:  
Step Operation  
Description  
1
2
Connect an authentication Required. Record the information of the client in the LAN to  
server to the switch and do the authentication server and configure the corresponding  
some configuration.  
authentication username and password for the client.  
Install the 802.1X client Required. For the client computers, you are required to  
software.  
install the 802.1X software TpSupplicant provided on the  
CD. For the installation guide, please refer to Appendix D:  
802.1X Client Software.  
3
4
Configure  
globally.  
the  
802.1X Required. By default, the global 802.1X function is disabled.  
On the Network Security→802.1X→Global Config page,  
configure the 802.1X function globally.  
Configure the parameters of Required. On the Network Security→802.1X→Radius  
the authentication server  
Server page, configure the parameters of the server.  
202  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Step Operation  
Description  
5
Configure the 802.1X for the Required. On the Network Security→802.1X→Port  
port.  
Config page, configure the 802.1X feature for the port of  
the switch based on the actual network.  
Return to CONTENTS  
203  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 13 SNMP  
SNMP Overview  
SNMP (Simple Network Management Protocol) has gained the most extensive application on the  
UDP/IP networks. SNMP provides a management frame to monitor and maintain the network  
devices. It is used for automatically managing the various network devices no matter the physical  
differences of the devices. Currently, most network management systems are based on SNMP.  
SNMP is simply designed and convenient for use with no need of complex fulfillment procedures  
and too much network resources. With SNMP function enabled, network administrators can easily  
monitor the network performance, detect the malfunctions and configure the network devices. In  
the meantime, they can locate faults promptly and implement the fault diagnosis, capacity planning  
and report generating.  
SNMP Management Frame  
SNMP management frame includes three network elements: SNMP Management Station, SNMP  
Agent and MIB (Management Information Base).  
SNMP Management Station: SNMP Management Station is the workstation for running the  
SNMP client program, providing a friendly management interface for the administrator to manage  
the most network devices conveniently.  
SNMP Agent: Agent is the server software operated on network devices with the responsibility of  
receiving and processing the request packets from SNMP Management Station. In the meanwhile,  
Agent will inform the SNMP Management Station of the events whenever the device status  
changes or the device encounters any abnormalities such as device reboot.  
MIB: MIB is the set of the managed objects. MIB defines a few attributes of the managed objects,  
including the names, the access rights, and the data types. Every SNMP Agent has its own MIB.  
The SNMP Management station can read/write the MIB objects based on its management right.  
SNMP Management Station is the manager of SNMP network while SNMP Agent is the managed  
object. The information between SNMP Management Station and SNMP Agent are exchanged  
through SNMP (Simple Network Management Protocol). The relationship among SNMP  
Management Station, SNMP Agent and MIB is illustrated in the following figure.  
Figure 13-1 Relationship among SNMP Network Elements  
SNMP Versions  
This switch supports SNMP v3, and is compatible with SNMP v1 and SNMP v2c. The SNMP  
versions adopted by SNMP Management Station and SNMP Agent should be the same.  
Otherwise, SNMP Management Station and SNMP Agent cannot communicate with each other  
normally. You can select the management mode with proper security level according to your actual  
application requirement.  
204  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
SNMP v1: SNMP v1 adopts Community Name authentication. The community name is used to  
define the relation between SNMP Management Station and SNMP Agent. The SNMP packets  
failing to pass community name authentication are discarded. The community name can limit  
access to SNMP Agent from SNMP NMS, functioning as a password.  
SNMP v2c: SNMP v2c also adopts community name authentication. It is compatible with SNMP  
v1 while enlarges the function of SNMP v1.  
SNMP v3: Based on SNMP v1 and SNMP v2c, SNMP v3 extremely enhances the security and  
manageability. It adopts VACM (View-based Access Control Model) and USM (User-Based  
Security Model) authentication. The user can configure the authentication and the encryption  
functions. The authentication function is to limit the access of the illegal user by authenticating the  
senders of packets. Meanwhile, the encryption function is used to encrypt the packets transmitted  
between SNMP Management Station and SNMP Agent so as to prevent any information being  
stolen. The multiple combinations of authentication function and encryption function can  
guarantee a more reliable communication between SNMP Management station and SNMP Agent.  
MIB Introduction  
To uniquely identify the management objects of the device in SNMP messages, SNMP adopts the  
hierarchical architecture to identify the managed objects. It is like a tree, and each tree node  
represents a managed object, as shown in the following figure. Thus the object can be identified  
with the unique path starting from the root and indicated by a string of numbers. The number string  
is the Object Identifier of the managed object. In the following figure, the OID of the managed  
object B is {1.2.1.1}. While the OID of the managed object A is {1.2.1.1.5}.  
Figure 13-2 Architecture of the MIB tree  
SNMP Configuration Outline  
1. Create View  
The SNMP View is created for the SNMP Management Station to manage MIB objects. The  
managed object, uniquely identified by OID, can be set to under or out of the management of  
SNMP Management Station by configuring its view type (included/excluded). The OID of managed  
object can be found on the SNMP client program running on the SNMP Management Station.  
2. Create SNMP Group  
After creating the SNMP View, it’s required to create an SNMP Group. The Group Name, Security  
Model and Security Level compose the identifier of the SNMP Group. The Groups with these three  
items the same are considered to be the same. You can configure SNMP Group to control the  
network access by providing the users in various groups with different management rights via the  
Read View, Write View and Notify View.  
205  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3. Create SNMP User  
The User configured in an SNMP Group can manage the switch via the client program on  
management station. The specified User Name and the Auth/Privacy Password are used for  
SNMP Management Station to access the SNMP Agent, functioning as the password.  
SNMP module is used to configure the SNMP function of the switch, including three submenus:  
SNMP Config, Notification and RMON.  
13.1 SNMP Config  
The SNMP Config can be implemented on the Global Config, SNMP View, SNMP Group,  
SNMP User and SNMP Community pages.  
13.1.1 Global Config  
To enable SNMP function, please configure the SNMP function globally on this page.  
Choose the menu SNMP→SNMP Config→Global Config to load the following page.  
Figure 13-3 Global Config  
The following entries are displayed on this screen:  
Global Config  
SNMP:  
Enable/Disable the SNMP function.  
Local Engine  
Local Engine ID:  
Specify the switch’s Engine ID for the remote clients. The  
Engine ID is a unique alphanumeric string used to identify the  
SNMP engine on the switch.  
Remote Engine  
Remote Engine ID:  
Specify the Remote Engine ID for switch. The Engine ID is a  
unique alphanumeric string used to identify the SNMP engine  
on the remote device which receives traps and informs from  
switch.  
206  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Note:  
The amount of Engine ID characters must be even.  
13.1.2 SNMP View  
The OID (Object Identifier) of the SNMP packets is used to describe the managed objects of the  
switch, and the MIB (Management Information Base) is the set of the OIDs. The SNMP View is  
created for the SNMP management station to manage MIB objects.  
Choose the menu SNMP→SNMP Config→SNMP View to load the following page.  
Figure 13-4 SNMP View  
The following entries are displayed on this screen:  
View Config  
View Name:  
Give a name to the View for identification. Each View can  
include several entries with the same name.  
MIB Object ID:  
View Type:  
Enter the Object Identifier (OID) for the entry of View.  
Select the type for the view entry.  
•
Include: The view entry can be managed by the SNMP  
management station.  
•
Exclude: The view entry cannot be managed by the SNMP  
management station.  
View Table  
Select:  
Select the desired entry to delete the corresponding view. All  
the entries of a View will be deleted together.  
View Name:  
View Type:  
Displays the name of the View entry.  
Displays the type of the View entry.  
Displays the OID of the View entry.  
MIB Object ID:  
207  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
13.1.3 SNMP Group  
On this page, you can configure SNMP Group to control the network access by providing the users  
in various groups with different management rights via the Read View, Write View and Notify View.  
Choose the menu SNMP→SNMP Config→SNMP Group to load the following page.  
Figure 13-5 SNMP Group  
The following entries are displayed on this screen:  
Group Config  
Group Name:  
Enter the SNMP Group name. The Group Name, Security Model  
and Security Level compose the identifier of the SNMP Group.  
The Groups with these three items the same are considered to be  
the same.  
Security Model:  
Select the Security Model for the SNMP Group.  
•
•
•
v1: SNMPv1 is defined for the group. In this model, the  
Community Name is used for authentication. SNMP v1 can be  
configured on the SNMP Community page directly.  
v2c: SNMPv2c is defined for the group. In this model, the  
Community Name is used for authentication. SNMP v2c can be  
configured on the SNMP Community page directly.  
v3: SNMPv3 is defined for the group. In this model, the USM  
mechanism is used for authentication. If SNMPv3 is enabled,  
the Security Level field is enabled for configuration.  
Security Level:  
Select the Security Level for the SNMP v3 Group.  
•
noAuthNoPriv: No authentication and no privacy security  
level is used.  
•
•
authNoPriv: Only the authentication security level is used.  
authPriv: Both the authentication and the privacy security  
levels are used.  
208  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Read View:  
Write View:  
Select the View to be the Read View. The management access is  
restricted to read-only, and changes cannot be made to the  
assigned SNMP View.  
Select the View to be the Write View. The management access is  
writing only and changes can be made to the assigned SNMP  
View. The View defined both as the Read View and the Write View  
can be read and modified.  
Notify View:  
Select the View to be the Notify View. The management station  
can receive trap messages of the assigned SNMP view generated  
by the switch's SNMP agent.  
Group Table  
Select:  
Select the desired entry to delete the corresponding group. It is  
multi-optional.  
Group Name:  
Security Model:  
Security Level:  
Read View:  
Displays the Group Name here.  
Displays the Security Model of the group.  
Displays the Security Level of the group.  
Displays the Read View name in the entry.  
Displays the Write View name in the entry.  
Displays the Notify View name in the entry.  
Write View:  
Notify View:  
Operation:  
Click the Edit button to modify the Views in the entry and click the  
Modify button to apply.  
Note:  
Every Group should contain a Read View. The default Read View is viewDefault.  
13.1.4 SNMP User  
The User in an SNMP Group can manage the switch via the management station software. The  
User and its Group have the same security level and access right. You can configure the SNMP  
User on this page.  
209  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Choose the menu SNMP→SNMP Config→SNMP User to load the following page.  
Figure 13-6 SNMP User  
The following entries are displayed on this screen:  
User Config  
User Name:  
User Type:  
Enter the User Name here.  
Select the type for the User.  
•
Local User: Indicates that the user is connected to a  
local SNMP engine.  
•
Remote User: Indicates that the user is connected to a  
remote SNMP engine.  
Group Name:  
Select the Group Name of the User. The User is classified to  
the corresponding Group according to its Group Name,  
Security Model and Security Level.  
Security Model:  
Security Level:  
Auth Mode:  
Select the Security Model for the User.  
Select the Security Level for the SNMP v3 User.  
Select the Authentication Mode for the SNMP v3 User.  
•
•
None: No authentication method is used.  
MD5: The port authentication is performed via  
HMAC-MD5 algorithm.  
•
SHA: The port authentication is performed via SHA  
(Secure Hash Algorithm). This authentication mode has a  
higher security than MD5 mode.  
Auth Password:  
Privacy Mode:  
Enter the password for authentication.  
Select the Privacy Mode for the SNMP v3 User.  
•
•
None: No privacy method is used.  
DES: DES encryption method is used.  
210  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Privacy Password:  
User Table  
Enter the Privacy Password.  
Select:  
Select the desired entry to delete the corresponding User. It is  
multi-optional.  
User Name:  
User Type:  
Displays the name of the User.  
Displays the User Type.  
Group Name:  
Security Model:  
Security Level:  
Auth Mode:  
Displays the Group Name of the User.  
Displays the Security Model of the User.  
Displays the Security Level of the User.  
Displays the Authentication Mode of the User.  
Displays the Privacy Mode of the User.  
Privacy Mode:  
Operation:  
Click the Edit button to modify the Group of the User and click  
the Modify button to apply.  
Note:  
The SNMP User and its Group should have the same Security Model and Security Level.  
13.1.5 SNMP Community  
SNMP v1 and SNMP v2c adopt community name authentication. The community name can limit  
access to the SNMP agent from SNMP network management station, functioning as a password. If  
SNMP v1 or SNMP v2c is employed, you can directly configure the SNMP Community on this  
page without configuring SNMP Group and User.  
Choose the menu SNMP→SNMP Config→SNMP Community to load the following page.  
Figure 13-7 SNMP Community  
The following entries are displayed on this screen:  
Community Config  
Community Name:  
Enter the Community Name here.  
211  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Access:  
Defines the access rights of the community.  
•
read-only: Management right of the Community is  
restricted to read-only, and changes cannot be made to  
the corresponding View.  
•
read-write: Management right of the Community is  
read-write and changes can be made to the corresponding  
View.  
MIB View:  
Select the MIB View for the community to access.  
Community Table  
Select:  
Select the desired entry to delete the corresponding Community. It  
is multi-optional.  
Community Name:  
Access:  
Displays the Community Name here.  
Displays the right of the Community to access the View.  
Displays the Views which the Community can access.  
MIB View:  
Operation:  
Click the Edit button to modify the MIB View and the Access right  
of the Community, and then click the Modify button to apply.  
Note:  
The default MIB View of SNMP Community is viewDefault.  
Configuration Procedure:  
If SNMPv3 is employed, please take the following steps:  
Step Operation  
Description  
1
Enable SNMP function globally.  
Required. On the SNMP→SNMP Config→Global  
Config page, enable SNMP function globally.  
2
Create SNMP View.  
Create SNMP Group.  
Create SNMP User.  
Required. On the SNMP→SNMP Config→SNMP  
View page, create SNMP View of the management  
agent. The default View Name is viewDefault and the  
default OID is 1.  
3
4
Required. On the SNMP→SNMP Config→SNMP  
Group page, create SNMP Group for SNMPv3 and  
specify SNMP Views with various access levels for  
SNMP Group.  
Required. On the SNMP→SNMP Config→SNMP  
User page, create SNMP User in the Group and  
configure the auth/privacy mode and auth/privacy  
password for the User.  
212  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
If SNMPv1 or SNMPv2c is employed, please take the following steps:  
Step Operation  
Description  
1
Enable SNMP function globally.  
Required. On the SNMP→SNMP Config→Global  
Config page, enable SNMP function globally.  
2
Create SNMP View.  
Required. On the SNMP→SNMP Config→SNMP  
View page, create SNMP View of the management  
agent. The default View Name is viewDefault and the  
default OID is 1.  
3
Create  
SNMP Required alternatively.  
Community  
directly.  
Create SNMP Community directly.  
On the SNMP→SNMP Config→SNMP  
Community page, create SNMP Community  
based on SNMP v1 and SNMP v2c.  
Create SNMP Group and SNMP User.  
Configure  
Similar to the configuration way based on  
SNMPv3, you can create SNMP Group and  
SNMP User of SNMP v1/v2c. The User name  
can limit access to the SNMP agent from SNMP  
network management station, functioning as a  
community name. The users can manage the  
device via the Read View, Write View and Notify  
View defined in the SNMP Group.  
access level  
for the User.  
Create  
Group and SNMP  
User.  
SNMP  
13.2 Notification  
With the Notification function enabled, the switch can initiatively report to the management station  
about the important events that occur on the Views (e.g., the managed device is rebooted), which  
allows the management station to monitor and process the events in time.  
The notification information includes the following two types:  
Trap ：Trap is the information that the managed device initiatively sends to the Network  
management station without request.  
Inform：Inform packet is sent to inform the management station and ask for the reply. The switch  
will resend the inform request if it doesn’t get the response from the management station during  
the Timeout interval, and it will terminate resending the inform request if the resending times reach  
the specified Retry times. The Inform type, employed on SNMPv2c and SNMPv3, has a higher  
security than the Trap type.  
On this page, you can configure the notification function of SNMP.  
213  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Choose the menu SNMP → Notification → Notification to load the following page.  
Figure 13-8 Notification Config  
The following entries are displayed on this screen:  
Create Notification  
IP Mode:  
Select the IP Mode.  
IP Address:  
UDP Port:  
Enter the IP Address of the management Host.  
Enter the number of the UDP port used to send notifications.  
The UDP port functions with the IP address for the notification  
sending. The default is 162.  
User:  
Enter the User name of the management station.  
Select the Security Model of the management station.  
Select the Security Level for the SNMP v3 User.  
Security Model:  
Security Level:  
•
noAuthNoPriv: No authentication and no privacy security  
level is used.  
•
•
authNoPriv: Only the authentication security level is used.  
authPriv: Both the authentication and the privacy security  
levels are used.  
Type:  
Select the type for the notifications.  
•
•
Trap: Indicates traps are sent.  
Inform: Indicates informs are sent. The Inform type has a  
higher security than the Trap type.  
Retry:  
Specify the amount of times the switch resends an inform  
request. The switch will resend the inform request if it doesn’t  
get the response from the management station during the  
Timeout interval, and it will terminate resending the inform  
request if the resending times reach the specified Retry times.  
Timeout:  
Specify the maximum time for the switch to wait for the  
response from the management station before resending a  
request.  
214  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Notification Table  
Select:  
Select the desired entry to delete the corresponding  
management station.  
IP Address:  
IP Mode:  
Displays the IP Address of the management host.  
Displays the IP Mode of the management host.  
Displays the UDP port used to send notifications.  
Displays the User name of the management station.  
Displays the Security Model of the management station.  
Displays the Security Level for the SNMP v3 User.  
Displays the type of the notifications.  
UDP Port:  
User:  
Security Model:  
Security Level:  
Type:  
Timeout:  
Displays the maximum time for the switch to wait for the  
response from the management station before resending a  
request.  
Retry:  
Displays the amount of times the switch resends an inform  
request.  
Operation:  
Click the Edit button to modify the corresponding entry and  
click the Modify button to apply.  
13.3 RMON  
RMON (Remote Monitoring) based on SNMP (Simple Network Management Protocol)  
architecture, functions to monitor the network. RMON is currently a commonly used network  
management standard defined by Internet Engineering Task Force (IETF), which is mainly used to  
monitor the data traffic across a network segment or even the entire network so as to enable the  
network administrator to take the protection measures in time to avoid any network malfunction. In  
addition, RMON MIB records network statistics information of network performance and  
malfunction periodically, based on which the management station can monitor network at any time  
effectively. RMON is helpful for network administrator to manage the large-scale network since it  
reduces the communication traffic between management station and managed agent.  
RMON Group  
This switch supports the following four RMON Groups defined on the RMON standard (RFC1757):  
History Group, Event Group, Statistic Group and Alarm Group.  
RMON Group  
Function  
History Group  
After a history group is configured, the switch collects and records network  
statistics information periodically, based on which the management station  
can monitor network effectively.  
Event Group  
Event Group is used to define RMON events. Alarms occur when an event is  
detected.  
Statistic Group  
Statistic Group is set to monitor the statistic of alarm variables on the specific  
ports.  
215  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
RMON Group  
Function  
Alarm Group  
Alarm Group is configured to monitor the specific alarm variables. When the  
value of a monitored variable exceeds the threshold, an alarm event is  
generated, which triggers the switch to act in the set way.  
The RMON Groups can be configured on the History Control, Event Config and Alarm Config  
pages.  
13.3.1 History Control  
On this page, you can configure the History Group for RMON.  
Choose the menu SNMP→RMON→History Control to load the following page.  
Figure 13-9 History Control  
The following entries are displayed on this screen:  
History Control Table  
Select:  
Index:  
Port:  
Select the desired entry for configuration.  
Displays the index number of the entry.  
Specify the port from which the history samples were taken.  
Specify the interval to take samplings from the port.  
Enter the name of the device or user that defined the entry.  
Select Enable/Disable the corresponding sampling entry.  
Interval:  
Owner:  
Status:  
13.3.2 Event Config  
On this page, you can configure the RMON events.  
216  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Choose the menu SNMP→RMON→Event Config to load the following page.  
Figure 13-10 Event Config  
The following entries are displayed on this screen:  
Event Table  
Select:  
Index:  
Select the desired entry for configuration.  
Displays the index number of the entry.  
User:  
Enter the name of the User or the community to which the  
event belongs.  
Description:  
Type:  
Give a description to the event for identification.  
Select the event type, which determines the act way of the  
network device in response to an event.  
•
•
•
•
None: No processing.  
Log: Logging the event.  
Notify: Sending trap messages to the management station.  
Log&Notify: Logging the event and sending trap messages  
to the management station.  
Owner:  
Status:  
Enter the name of the device or user that defined the entry.  
Select Enable/Disable the corresponding event entry.  
13.3.3 Alarm Config  
On this page, you can configure Statistic Group and Alarm Group for RMON.  
217  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Choose the menu SNMP→RMON→Alarm Config to load the following page.  
Figure 13-11 Alarm Config  
The following entries are displayed on this screen:  
Alarm Table  
Select:  
Select the desired entry for configuration.  
Displays the index number of the entry.  
Index:  
Variable:  
Port:  
Select the alarm variables from the pull-down list.  
Select the port on which the Alarm entry acts.  
Sample Type:  
Specify the sampling method for the selected variable and  
comparing the value against the thresholds.  
•
Absolute: Compares the values directly with the thresholds  
at the end of the sampling interval.  
•
Delta: Subtracts the last sampled value from the current  
value. The difference in the values is compared to the  
threshold.  
Rising Threshold:  
Rising Event:  
Enter the rising counter value that triggers the Rising Threshold  
alarm.  
Select the index of the corresponding event which will be  
triggered if the sampled value is larger than the Rising  
Threshold.  
Falling Threshold:  
Falling Event:  
Enter the falling counter value that triggers the Falling Threshold  
alarm.  
Select the index of the corresponding event which will be  
triggered if the sampled value is lower than the Falling  
Threshold.  
Alarm Type:  
Specify the type of the alarm.  
•
All: The alarm event will be triggered either the sampled  
value exceeds the Rising Threshold or is under the Falling  
Threshold.  
•
Rising: When the sampled value exceeds the Rising  
Threshold, an alarm event is triggered.  
218  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
•
Falling: When the sampled value is under the Falling  
Threshold, an alarm event is triggered.  
Interval:  
Owner:  
Status:  
Enter the alarm interval time in seconds.  
Enter the name of the device or user that defined the entry.  
Select Enable/Disable the corresponding alarm entry.  
Note:  
When alarm variables exceed the Threshold on the same direction continuously for several times,  
an alarm event will only be generated on the first time, that is, the Rising Alarm and Falling Alarm  
are triggered alternately for that the alarm following to Rising Alarm is certainly a Falling Alarm and  
vice versa.  
Return to CONTENTS  
219  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 14 Cluster  
With the development of network technology, the network scale is getting larger and more network  
devices are required, which may result in a more complicated network management system. As a  
large number of devices need to be assigned different network addresses and every management  
device needs to be respectively configured to meet the application requirements, manpower are  
needed.  
The Cluster Management function can solve the above problem. It is mainly used to central  
manage the scattered devices in the network. A network administrator can manage and maintain  
the switches in the cluster via a management switch. The management switch is the commander  
of the cluster and the others are member switches.  
The typical topology is as follows.  
Figure 14-1 Cluster topology  
Cluster Role  
According to their functions and status in a cluster, switches in the cluster play different roles. You  
can specify the role a switch plays. There are three roles.  
Commander Switch: Indicates the device that can configure and manage all the devices in a  
cluster. It discovers and determins the candidate switches by collecting NDP (Neighbor Discovery  
Protocol) and NTDP (Neighbor Topology Discovery Protocol).  
Member Switch: Indicates the device that is managed in a cluster.  
Candidate Switch: Indicates the device that does not belong to any cluster though it can be  
added to a cluster.  
Individual Switch: Indicates the device with cluster feature disabled  
The roles can be changed from one to anther following the specified rules.  
220  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
The current switch you create cluster is specified as the commander switch.  
The commander switch discovers and determines candidate switches by collecting related  
information.  
After being added to the cluster, the candidate switch becomes to be the member switch,  
After being removed from the cluster, the member switch becomes to be the candidate switch.  
The commander switch becomes to be the candidate switch only when the cluster is deleted.  
Note:  
TL-SG3210/TL-SG3216/TL-SG3424/TL-SG3424P switch cannot be configured as commander  
switch to manage the cluster.  
Introduction to Cluster  
Cluster functions to configure and manage the switches in the cluster based on three protocols,  
NDP, NTDP and CMP (Cluster Management Protocol).  
NDP: All switches get neighbor information by collecting NDP.  
NTDP: The commander switch collects the NDP information and neighboring connection  
information of each device in a specific network range to determine the candidate switches in  
the cluster.  
Cluster maintenance: The commander switch adds the candidate switch to the cluster and  
removes the member switch from the cluster according to the collected NTDP information.  
The Cluster module, mainly used for cluster management configuration, including three submenus:  
NDP, NTDP and Cluster.  
14.1 NDP  
NDP (Neighbor Discovery Protocol) is used to get the information of the directly connected neighbor  
devices to support cluster establishing. An NDP-enabled device sends NDP packets regularly to  
neighbor devices as well as receives NDP packets from neighbor devices. An NDP packet carries  
the NDP information (including the device name, MAC address, firmware version and so on).  
A switch keeps and maintains a neighbor information table, which contains the NDP information of  
each neighbor switch. If a switch receives the NDP information of a new neighbor, it will add the  
information to the neighbor information table. If the received NDP information is different from the  
old information, the switch will update it in the neighbor information table; if the received NDP  
information is the same with the old information, the switch will just update the aging time; if the  
switch does not receive NDP information within the aging time, the switch will remove the  
corresponding information from the table automatically.  
The NDP function can be implemented on Neighbor Info, NDP Summary and NDP Config  
pages.  
14.1.1 Neighbor Info  
On this page you can view the NDP neighbor information of the switch.  
221  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Choose the menu Cluster→NDP→Neighbor Info to load the following page.  
Figure 14-2 Neighbor Information  
The following entries are displayed on this screen:  
Neighbor  
Search Option:  
Select the information the desired entry should contain and then  
click the Search button to display the desired entry in the following  
Neighbor Information table.  
Neighbor Info  
Native Port:  
Remote Port:  
Displays the port number of the switch.  
Displays the port number of the neighbor switch which is  
connected to the corresponding port.  
Device Name:  
Device MAC:  
Displays the name of the neighbor switch.  
Displays MAC address of the neighbor switch.  
Displays the firmware version of the neighbor switch.  
Firmware Version:  
Aging Time:  
Displays the period for the switch to keep the NDP packets from  
the neighbor switch.  
14.1.2 NDP Summary  
On this page you can view the NDP configuration of the switch.  
222  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Choose the menu Cluster→NDP→NDP Summary to load the following page.  
Figure 14-3 NDP Summary  
The following entries are displayed on this screen:  
Global Config  
NDP:  
Displays the global NDP status (enabled or disabled) for the  
switch.  
Aging Time:  
Hello Time:  
Displays the period for the neighbor switch to keep the NDP  
packets from this switch.  
Displays the interval to send NDP packets.  
Port Status  
Port:  
Displays the port number of the switch.  
NDP:  
Displays the NDP status (enabled or disabled) for the current port.  
Displays the count of currently sent NDP packets.  
Displays the count of currently received NDP packets.  
Displays the count of currently received error NDP packets.  
Displays the count of the connected neighbors.  
Send NDP Packets:  
Receive NDP Packets:  
Error NDP Packets:  
Neighbors:  
223  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Click the Detail button to view the complete information collected  
Detail：  
for the port.  
14.1.3 NDP Config  
On this page you can configure the NDP function for the switch.  
Choose the menu Cluster→NDP→NDP Config to load the following page.  
Figure 14-4 NDP Config  
The following entries are displayed on this screen:  
Global Config  
NDP:  
Select Enable/Disable NDP function globally.  
Aging Time:  
Enter the period for the neighbor switch to keep the NDP packets  
from this switch.  
Hello Time:  
Port Config  
Select:  
Enter the interval to send NDP packets.  
Select the desired port to configure its NDP status.  
Displays the port number of the switch.  
Port:  
NDP:  
Displays NDP status of the current port.  
Enable:  
Click the Enable button to enable NDP for the port you select.  
224  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Disable:  
Note:  
Click the Disable button to disable NDP for the port you select.  
1. NDP function is effective only when NDP function is enabled globally and for the port.  
2. The aging time should be set over the hello time value; otherwise this setting will be invalid  
and will not take effect.  
14.2 NTDP  
NTDP (Neighbor Topology Discovery Protocol）is used for the commander switch to collect NDP  
information. NTDP transmits and forwards NTDP topology collection request based on NDP  
neighbor information table, and collects the NDP information and neighboring connection  
information of each device in a specific network range. The commander switch can collects the  
specified topology in the network regularly and you can also enable topology collection manually  
on the commander switch.  
After the commander switch sends out NTDP request packets, lots of switches receive the request  
packets and send out response packets at the same time, which may result in network congestion  
and the commander switch overload. To avoid the above problem, two time parameters are  
designed to control the spread speed of NTDP request packets.  
NTDP hop delay: Indicates the time between the switch receiving NTDP request packets and  
the switch forwarding NTDP request packets for the first time.  
NTDP port delay: Indicates the time between the port forwarding NTDP request packets and its  
adjacent port forwarding NTDP request packets over.  
The NTDP function can be implemented on Device Table, NTDP Summary and NTDP Config  
pages.  
14.2.1 Device Table  
On this page you can view the information of the devices collected by NTDP. Meanwhile, no matter  
whether a cluster is established, on this page you can manually collect NTDP information at any  
time to manage and control devices.  
Choose the menu Cluster→NTDP→Device Table to load the following page.  
Figure 14-5 Device Table  
The following entries are displayed on this screen:  
Device Table  
Device Type:  
Device MAC:  
Cluster Name:  
Displays the device description collected through NTDP.  
Displays the MAC address of this device.  
Displays the cluster name of this device.  
225  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Role:  
Displays the role this device plays in the cluster.  
Commander: Indicates the device that can configure and  
manage all the devices in a cluster.  
Member: Indicates the device that is managed in a cluster.  
Candidate: Indicates the device that does not belong to any  
cluster though it can be added to a cluster.  
Individual: Indicates the device with cluster feature disabled.  
Hops:  
Displays the hop count from this device to the switch.  
Neighbor Info:  
Click the Detail button to view the complete information of this  
device and its neighbors.  
Collect Topology:  
Click the Collect Topology button to collect NTDP information of  
the switch so as to collect the latest network topology.  
Click the Detail button to view the complete information of this device and its neighbors.  
Figure 14-6 Information of the Current Device  
14.2.2 NTDP Summary  
On this page you can view the NTDP configuration.  
226  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Choose the menu Cluster→NTDP→NTDP Summary to load the following page.  
Figure 14-7 NTDP Summary  
The following entries are displayed on this screen:  
Global Config  
NTDP:  
Displays the NTDP status (enabled or disabled) of the switch  
globally.  
NTDP Interval Time:  
NTDP Hops:  
Displays the interval to collect topology information.  
Displays the hop count the switch topology collects.  
NTDP Hop Delay:  
Displays the time between the switch receiving NTDP request  
packets and the switch forwarding NTDP request packets for the  
first time.  
NTDP Port Delay:  
Port Status  
Displays the time between the port forwarding NTDP request  
packets and its adjacent port forwarding NTDP request packets  
over.  
Port:  
Displays the port number of the switch.  
NTDP:  
Displays NTDP status (enabled or disabled) of the current port.  
227  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
14.2.3 NTDP Config  
On this page you can configure NTDP globally.  
Choose the menu Cluster→NTDP→NTDP Config to load the following page.  
Figure 14-8 NTDP Config  
The following entries are displayed on this screen:  
Global Config  
NTDP:  
Select Enable/Disable NTDP for the switch globally.  
NTDP Interval Time:  
Enter the interval to collect topology information. The default is 1  
minute.  
NTDP Hops:  
Enter the hop count the switch topology collects. The default is 3  
hops.  
NTDP Hop Delay:  
Enter the time between the switch receiving NTDP request  
packets and the switch forwarding NTDP request packets for the  
first time. The default is 200 milliseconds.  
NTDP Port Delay:  
Port Config  
Enter the time between the port forwarding NTDP request packets  
and its adjacent port forwarding NTDP request packets over. The  
default is 20 milliseconds.  
228  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Select:  
Port:  
Select the desired port for NTDP status configuration.  
Displays the port number of the switch.  
NTDP:  
Enable:  
Displays NTDP status (enabled or disabled) of the current port.  
Click the Enable button to enable NTDP feature for the port you  
select.  
Disable:  
Note:  
Click the Disable button to disable NTDP feature for the port you  
select.  
NTDP function is effective only when NTDP function is enabled globally and for the port.  
14.3 Cluster  
A commander switch can recognize and add the candidate switch to a cluster automatically based  
on NDP and NTDP. You can manually add the candidate switch to a cluster. If the candidate switch  
is successfully added to the cluster, it will get a private IP address assigned by the commander  
switch. You can manage and configure the member switch via the commander switch.  
The Cluster function can be implemented on Cluster Summary and Cluster Config pages.  
14.3.1 Cluster Summary  
On this page you can view the status of the current cluster.  
Choose the menu Cluster→Cluster→Cluster Summary to load the following page.  
For a candidate switch, the following page is displayed:  
Figure 14-9 Cluster Summary for Candidate Switch  
The following entries are displayed on this screen:  
Global  
Cluster:  
Displays the cluster status (enabled or disabled) of the switch.  
Displays the role the switch plays in the cluster.  
Cluster Role:  
229  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
For a member switch, the following page is displayed:  
Figure 14-10 Cluster Summary for Member Switch  
The following entries are displayed on this screen:  
Global Config  
Cluster:  
Displays the cluster status (enabled or disabled) of the switch.  
Displays the role the switch plays in the cluster.  
Cluster Role:  
Cluster Name:  
Commander MAC:  
Displays the name of the current cluster the switch belongs to.  
Displays the MAC address of the commander switch.  
For an individual switch, the following page is displayed:  
Figure 14-11 Cluster Summary for Individual Switch  
The following entries are displayed on this screen:  
Global Config  
Cluster:  
Displays the cluster status (enabled or disabled) of the switch.  
Displays the role the switch plays in the cluster.  
Cluster Role:  
14.3.2 Cluster Config  
On this page you can configure the status of the cluster the switch belongs to.  
230  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Choose the menu Cluster→Cluster→Cluster Config to load the following page.  
For a candidate switch, the following page is displayed.  
Figure 14-12 Cluster Configuration for Candidate Switch  
The following entries are displayed on this screen:  
Current Role  
Role:  
Displays the role the current switch plays in the cluster.  
Role Change  
Individual:  
Select this option to change the role of the switch to be individual  
switch.  
For a member switch, the following page is displayed.  
Figure 14-13 Cluster Configuration for Member Switch  
The following entries are displayed on this screen:  
Current Role  
Role:  
Displays the role the current switch plays in the cluster.  
Role Change  
Individual:  
Select this option to change the role of the switch to be individual  
switch.  
231  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
For an individual switch, the following page is displayed.  
Figure 14-14 Cluster Configuration for Individual Switch  
The following entries are displayed on this screen:  
Current Role  
Role:  
Displays the role the current switch plays in the cluster.  
Role Change  
Candidate:  
Select this option to change the role of the switch to be candidate  
switch.  
14.4 Application Example for Cluster Function  
Network Requirements  
Three switches form cluster, one commander switch (Here take TP-LINK TL-SL5428E as an  
example) and two member switches (Here take TP-LINK  
TL-SG3210/TL-SG3216/TL-SG3424/TL-SG3424P as an example). The administrator manages all  
the switches in the cluster via the commander switch.  
Port 1 of the commander switch is connecting to the external network, port 2 is connecting to  
member switch 1 and port 3 is connecting to member switch 2.  
IP pool: 175.128.0.1, Mask: 255.255.255.0.  
232  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Network Diagram  
Figure 14-15 Network diagram  
Configuration Procedure  
Configure the member switch  
Step Operation  
Description  
1
Enable NDP function on the On Cluster→NDP→NDP Config page, enable NDP  
switch and for port 1 function.  
2
Enable NTDP function on the On Cluster→NTDP→NTDP Config page, enable  
switch and for port 1  
NTDP function.  
Configure the commander switch  
Step Operation  
Description  
1
2
3
Enable NDP function on the On Cluster→NDP→NDP Config page, enable NDP  
switch and for port 1, port 2 and function.  
port 3  
Enable NTDP function on the On Cluster→NTDP→NTDP Config page, enable  
switch and for port 1, port 2 and NTDP function.  
port 3  
Create a cluster and configure On Cluster→Cluster→Cluster Config page, configure  
the related parameters  
the role as Commander and enter the related  
information.  
IP pool: 175.128.0.1  
Mask: 255.255.255.0  
233  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Step Operation  
Configure the member switch  
Description  
4
On Cluster→Cluster→Member Config page, select  
the member switch and click the Manage button to log  
on to its Web management page.  
Or On Cluster→Cluster→Cluster Topology page,  
double-click the switch icon to view its detailed  
information; click the switch icon and click the Manage  
button to log on to the Web management page.  
Return to CONTENTS  
234  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 15 LLDP  
Note:  
Only TL-SG3424P supports LLDP function.  
LLDP (Link Layer Discovery Protocol) is a Layer 2 protocol that is used for network devices to  
advertise their own device information periodically to neighbors on the same IEEE 802 local area  
network. The advertised information, including details such as device identification, capabilities  
and configuration settings, is represented in TLV (Type/Length/Value) format according to the  
IEEE 802.1ab standard, and these TLVs are encapsulated in LLDPDU (Link Layer Discovery  
Protocol Data Unit). The LLDPDU distributed via LLDP is stored by its recipients in a standard MIB  
(Management Information Base), making it possible for the information to be accessed by a  
Network Management System (NMS) using a management protocol such as the Simple Network  
Management Protocol (SNMP).  
An IETF Standard MIB, as well as a number of vendor specific MIBs, have been created to  
describe a network's physical topology and associated systems within that topology. However,  
there is no standard protocol for populating these MIBs or communicating this information among  
stations on the IEEE 802 LAN. LLDP protocol specifies a set. The device running LLDP can  
automatically discover and learn about the neighbors, allowing for interoperability between the  
network devices of different vendors. This protocol allows two systems running different network  
layer protocols to learn about each other.  
LLDP-MED (Link Layer Discovery Protocol for Media Endpoint Devices) is an extension of LLDP  
intended for managing endpoint devices such as Voice over IP phones and network switches. The  
LLDP-MED TLVs advertise information such as network policy, power via MDI, inventory  
management, and device location details.  
The LLDP and LLDP-MED information can be used by SNMP applications to simplify  
troubleshooting, enhance network management, and maintain an accurate network topology.  
LLDPDU Format  
Each LLDPDU includes an ordered sequence of three mandatory TLVs followed by one or more  
optional TLVs plus an End of LLDPDU TLV, as shown in the figure below. Chassis ID TLV, Port ID  
TLV, TTL TLV and End TLV are the four mandatory TLVs for a LLDPDU. Optional TLVs provide  
various details about the LLDP agent advertising them and they are selected by network  
management.  
The maximum length of the LLDPDU shall be the maximum information field length allowed by the  
particular transmission rate and protocol. In IEEE 802.3 MACs, for example, the maximum  
LLDPDU length is the maximum data field length for the basic, untagged MAC frame (1500  
octets).  
LLDP Working Mechanism  
1) LLDP Admin Status  
The transmission and the reception of LLDPDUs can be separately enabled for every port, making  
it possible to configure an implementation to restrict the port either to transmit only or receive only,  
235  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
or to allow the port to both transmit and receive LLDPDUs. Four LLDP admin statuses are  
supported by each port.  
Tx&Rx: the port can both transmit and receive LLDPDUs.  
Rx_Only: the port can receive LLDPDUs only.  
Tx_Only: the port can transmit LLDPDUs only.  
Disable: the port cannot transmit or receive LLDPDUs.  
2) LLDPDU transmission mechanism  
If the ports are working in TxRx or Tx mode, they will advertise local information by  
sending LLDPDUs periodically.  
If there is a change in the local device, the change notification will be advertised. To  
prevent a series of successive LLDPDUs transmissions during a short period due to  
frequent changes in local device, a transmission delay timer is set by network  
management to ensure that there is a defined minimum time between successive LLDP  
frame transmissions.  
If the LLDP admin status of the port is changed from Disable/Rx to TxRx/Tx, the Fast  
Start Mechanism will be active, the transmit interval turns to be 1 second, several  
LLDPDUs will be sent out, and then the transmit interval comes back to the regular  
interval.  
3) LLDPDU receipt mechanism  
When a port is working in TxRx or Rx mode, the device will check the validity of the received  
LLDPDUs and the attached TLVs, save this neighbor information to the local device and then set  
the aging time of this information according to the TTL value of TTL (Time To Live) TLV. Once the  
TTL is 0, this neighbor information will be aged out immediately.  
The aging time of the local information in the neighbor device is determined by TTL. Hold  
Multiplier is a multiplier on the Transmit Interval that determines the actual TTL value used in an  
LLDPDU. TTL = Hold Multiplier * Transmit Interval.  
TLV  
TLV refers to Type/Length/Value and is contained in a LLDPDU. Type identifies what kind of  
information is being sent, Length indicates the length of information string in octets and Value is  
the actual information to be sent. The basic TLV Format is shown as follows:  
Each TLV is identified by a unique TLV type value that indicates the particular kind of information  
contained in the TLV.  
236  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The following table shows the details about the currently defined TLVs.  
TLV type TLV Name Description  
Usage in  
LLDPDU  
0
End of LLDPDU Mark the end of the TLV sequence in LLDPDUs. Mandatory  
Any information following an End Of LLDPDU  
TLV shall be ignored.  
1
2
Chassis ID  
Identifies the Chassis address of the connected Mandatory  
device.  
Port ID  
Identifies the specific port that transmitted the Mandatory  
LLDP frame. When the device does not advertise  
MED TLV, this field displays the port name of the  
port; when the device advertises MED TLV, this  
field displays the MAC address of the port.  
3
Time To Live  
Indicates the number of seconds that the Mandatory  
neighbor device is to regard the local information  
to be valid.  
4
5
6
Port Description Identifies the description string of the port.  
Optional  
Optional  
Optional  
System Name  
Identifies the system name.  
System  
Identifies the system description.  
Description  
7
8
System  
Capabilities  
Identifies the main functions of the system and Optional  
the functions enabled.  
Management  
Address  
Identifies the management IP address, the Optional  
corresponding interface number and OID (Object  
Identifier). The management IP address is  
specified by the user.  
127  
Organizationally Allows different organizations, such as IEEE Optional  
Specific  
802.1, IEEE 802.3, IETF, as well as individual  
software and equipment vendors, to define TLVs  
that advertise information to remote device.  
Optional TLVs are grouped into two categories including basic management TLV and  
Organizationally-specific TLV.  
1) Basic Management TLV  
A set of TLVs considered to be basic to the management of the network stations are required for  
all LLDP implementations.  
2) Organizationally Specific TLV  
Different organizations have defined various TLVs. For instance, Port VLAN ID TLV, Port and  
Protocol VLAN ID TLV, VLAN Name TLV And Protocol Identity TLV are defined by IEEE 802.1,  
while MAC/PHY Configuration/Status TLV, Power Via MDI TLV, Link Aggregation TLV and  
Maximum Frame TLV are defined by IEEE 802.3. Some specific TLVs are for LLDP-MED protocol,  
such as LLDP-MED Capabilities TLV, Network Policy TLV, Extended Power-via-MDI TLV,  
Hardware Revision TLV and so on.  
237  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Note:  
For detailed introduction of TLV, please refer to IEEE 802.1AB standard and ANSI/TIA-1057.  
In TP-LINK switch, the following LLDP optional TLVs are supported.  
TLV Type  
Description  
Port Description TLV  
The Port Description TLV allows network management to  
advertise the IEEE 802 LAN station's port description.  
System Capabilities TLV  
System Description TLV  
The System Capabilities TLV identifies the primary functions of  
the system and whether or not these primary functions are  
enabled.  
The System Description TLV allows network management to  
advertise the system's description, which should include the full  
name and version identification of the system's hardware type,  
software operating system, and networking software.  
System Name TLV  
The System Name TLV allows network management to  
advertise the system's assigned name, which should be the  
system's fully qualified domain name.  
Management Address TLV The Management Address TLV identifies an address associated  
with the local LLDP agent that may be used to reach higher  
entities to assist discovery by network management.  
Port VLAN ID TLV  
The Port VLAN ID TLV allows a VLAN bridge port to advertise  
the port's VLAN identifier (PVID) that will be associated with  
untagged or priority tagged frames.  
Port And Protocol VLAN ID The Port And Protocol VLAN ID TLV allows a bridge port to  
TLV  
advertise a port and protocol VLAN ID.  
VLAN Name TLV  
The VLAN Name TLV allows an IEEE 802.1Q-compatible IEEE  
802 LAN station to advertise the assigned name of any VLAN  
with which it is configured.  
Link Aggregation TLV  
The Link Aggregation TLV indicates whether the link is capable  
of being aggregated, whether the link is currently in an  
aggregation, and if in an aggregation, the port identification of  
the aggregation.  
MAC/PHY  
Configuration/Status TLV  
The MAC/PHY Configuration/Status TLV identifies: a)The duplex  
and bit-rate capability of the sending IEEE 802.3 LAN node that  
is connected to the physical medium; b)The current duplex and  
bit-rate settings of the sending IEEE 802.3 LAN node; c)Whether  
these settings are the result of auto-negotiation during link  
initiation or of manual set override action.  
Max Frame Size TLV  
Power Via MDI TLV  
The Maximum Frame Size TLV indicates the maximum frame  
size capability of the implemented MAC and PHY.  
The Power Via MDI TLV allows network management to  
advertise and discover the MDI power support capabilities of the  
sending IEEE 802.3 LAN station.  
238  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The LLDP module is mainly for LLDP function configuration of the switch, including three  
submenus: Basic Config, Device Info, Device Statistics and LLDP-MED.  
15.1 Basic Config  
LLDP is configured on the Global Config and Port Config pages.  
15.1.1 Global Config  
On this page you can configure the LLDP parameters of the device globally.  
Choose the menu LLDP→Basic Config→Global Config to load the following page.  
Figure 15-1 LLDP Global Configuration  
The following entries are displayed on this screen:  
Global Config  
LLDP:  
Enable/disable LLDP function globally.  
Parameters Config  
Transmit Interval:  
Hold Multiplier:  
Enter the interval for the local device to transmit LLDPDU to its  
neighbors. The default value is 30.  
Enter a multiplier on the Transmit Interval. It determines the actual  
TTL (Time To Live) value used in an LLDPDU. TTL = Hold  
Multiplier * Transmit Interval. The default value is 4.  
Transmit Delay:  
Enter a value from 1 to 8192 in seconds to specify the time for the  
local device to transmit LLDPDU to its neighbors after changes  
occur so as to prevent LLDPDU being sent frequently. The default  
value is 2.  
Reinit Delay:  
This parameter indicates the amount of delay from when LLDP  
status becomes "disable" until re-initialization will be attempted.  
The default value is 3.  
Notification Interval:  
Specify the interval of Trap message which will be sent from local  
device to network management system. The default value is 5.  
239  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Fast Start Times:  
When the port's LLDP state transforms from Disable (or Rx_Only)  
to Tx&Rx (or Tx_Only), the fast start mechanism will be enabled,  
that is, the transmit interval will be shorten to a second, and  
several LLDPDUs will be sent out (the number of LLDPDUs  
equals this parameter). The default value is 3.  
15.1.2 Port Config  
On this page you can configure all ports' LLDP parameters.  
Choose the menu LLDP→Basic Config→Port Config to load the following page.  
Figure 15-2 LLDP Port Config  
The following entries are displayed on this screen:  
LLDP Port Config  
Port Select:  
Select the desired port to configure.  
Admin Status:  
Select the port’s LLDP operating mode:  
Tx&Rx: send and receive LLDP frames.  
Rx_Only: Only receive LLDP frames.  
Tx_Only: Only send LLDP frames.  
Disable: neither send nor receive LLDP frames.  
Notification Mode:  
Allows you to enable or disable the ports' SNMP notification. If  
enabled, the local device will notify the trap event to SNMP server.  
Included TLVs:  
Details:  
Select TLVs to be included in outgoing LLDPDU.  
Click the Detail button to display the included TLVs and select the  
desired TLVs.  
240  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
15.2 Device Info  
You can view the LLDP information of the local device and its neighbors on the Local Info and  
Neighbor Info pages respectively.  
15.2.1 Local Info  
On this page you can see all ports' configuration and system information.  
Choose the menu LLDP→Device Info→Local Info to load the following page.  
Figure 15-3 LLDP Local Information  
The following entries are displayed on this screen:  
Auto Refresh  
Auto Refresh:  
Enable/Disable the auto refresh function.  
241  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Refresh Rate:  
Local Info  
Specify the auto refresh rate.  
Enter the desired port number and click Select to display the information of the corresponding  
port.  
15.2.2 Neighbor Info  
On this page you can get the information of the neighbors.  
Choose the menu LLDP→Device Info→Neighbor Info to load the following page.  
Figure 15-4 LLDP Neighbor Information  
The following entries are displayed on this screen:  
Auto Refresh  
Auto Refresh:  
Refresh Rate:  
Neighbor Info  
Enable/Disable the auto refresh function.  
Specify the auto refresh rate.  
Port Select:  
Click the Select button to quick-select the corresponding port  
based on the port number you entered.  
Local Port:  
Displays the local port number connecting to the neighbor device.  
Displays the system name of the neighbor device.  
System Name:  
Chassis ID:  
Displays the Chassis ID of the neighbor device.  
System Description:  
Neighbor Port:  
Information:  
Displays the system description of the neighbor device.  
Displays the port number of the neighbor linking to local port.  
Click Information to display the detailed information of the  
neighbor device.  
15.3 Device Statistics  
You can view the LLDP statistics of the local device through this feature.  
242  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Choose the menu LLDP→Device Statistics→Statistic Info to load the following page.  
Figure 15-5 LLDP Statistic Information  
The following entries are displayed on this screen:  
Auto Refresh  
Auto Refresh:  
Refresh Rate:  
Global Statistics  
Enable/Disable the auto refresh function.  
Specify the auto refresh rate.  
Last Update:  
Displays latest update time of the statistics.  
Total Inserts:  
Total Deletes:  
Total Drops:  
Total Ageouts:  
Displays the number of neighbors inserted till last update time.  
Displays the number of neighbors deleted by local device.  
Displays the number of neighbors dropped by local device.  
Displays the number of overtime neighbors in local device.  
243  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Neighbor Statistics  
Port Select:  
Click the Select button to quick-select the corresponding port  
based on the port number you entered.  
Port:  
Displays local device's port number.  
Transmit Total:  
Receive Total:  
Discards:  
Displays the number of LLDPDUs sent by this port.  
Displays the number of LLDPDUs received by this port.  
Displays the number of LLDPDUs discarded by this port.  
Displays the number of error LLDPDUs received by this port.  
Displays the number of overtime neighbors linking to this port.  
Displays the number of TLVs dropped by this port.  
Displays the number of unknown TLVs received by this port.  
Errors:  
Ageouts:  
TLV Discards:  
TLV Unknowns:  
15.4 LLDP-MED  
LLDP-MED is an extension of LLDP intended for managing endpoint devices such as Voice over  
IP phones and network switches. The LLDP-MED TLVs advertise information such as network  
policy, power via MDI, inventory management, and device location details.  
Elements  
LLDP-MED Device: Refers to any device which implements this Standard.  
LLDP-MED Device Type: LLDP-MED devices are comprised of two primary device types:  
Network Connectivity Devices and Endpoint Devices.  
Network Connectivity Device: Refers to an LLDP-MED Device that provides access to the IEEE  
802 based LAN infrastructure for LLDP-MED Endpoint Devices. Bridge is a Network Connectivity  
Device.  
Endpoint Device: Refers to an LLDP-MED Device at the network edge, providing some aspects  
of IP communications service, based on IEEE 802 LAN technology. Endpoint Devices may be a  
member of any of the Endpoint Device Classes. Endpoint Devices are composed of three defined  
Classes: Class I, Class II and Class III.  
Generic Endpoint Device (Class I): The most basic class of Endpoint Device.  
Media Endpoint Device (Class II): The class of Endpoint Device that supports media stream  
capabilities.  
Communication Device Endpoint (Class III): The class of Endpoint Device that directly supports  
end users of the IP communication system.  
TLV Type  
Function  
Network Policy TLV  
The Network Policy TLV allows both Network Connectivity  
Devices and Endpoints to advertise VLAN configuration and  
associated Layer 2 and Layer 3 attributes that apply for a set  
of specific applications on that port.  
244  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
TLV Type  
Function  
Location Identification TLV  
The Location Identification TLV provides for advertisement of  
location identifier information to Communication Endpoint  
Devices, based on configuration of the Network Connectivity  
Device it's connected to. You can set the Location  
Identification content in Location Identification Parameters. If  
Location Identification TLV is included and Location  
Identification Parameters isn't set, a default value is used in  
Location Identification TLV.  
Extended Power-Via-MDI TLV The Extended Power-Via-MDI TLV is intended to enable  
advanced power management between LLDP-MED Endpoint  
and Network Connectivity Devices, and it allows  
advertisement of fine grained power requirement details,  
Endpoint power priority, as well as both Endpoint and Network  
Connectivity Device power status.  
Inventory TLV  
The Inventory TLV set contains seven basic Inventory  
management TLVs, that is, Hardware Revision TLV, Firmware  
Revision TLV, Software Revision TLV, Serial Number TLV,  
Manufacturer Name TLV, Model Name TLV and Asset ID  
TLV. If support for any of the TLVs in the Inventory  
Management set is implemented, then support for all  
Inventory Management TLVs shall be implemented.  
LLDP-MED is configured on the Global Config, Port Config, Local Info and Neighbor Info  
pages.  
15.4.1 Global Config  
On this page you can configure the LLDP-MED parameters of the device globally.  
Choose the menu LLDP→LLDP-MED→Global Config to load the following page.  
Figure 15-6 LLDP-MED Global Configuration  
The following entries are displayed on this screen:  
LLDP-MED Parameters Config  
Fast Start Count:  
Device Class:  
When LLDP-MED fast start mechanism is activated, multiple  
LLDP-MED frames will be transmitted based on this parameter.  
LLDP-MED devices are comprised of two primary device types:  
Network Connectivity Devices and Endpoint Devices. In turn,  
Endpoint Devices are composed of three defined Classes: Class I,  
Class II and Class III. Bridge is a Network Connectivity Device.  
245  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
15.4.2 Port Config  
On this page you can configure all ports' LLDP-MED parameters.  
Choose the menu LLDP→LLDP-MED→Port Config to load the following page.  
Figure 15-7 LLDP-MED Port Configuration  
The following entries are displayed on this screen:  
LLDP-MED Port Config  
Port Select:  
Select the desired port to configure.  
Configure the port's LLDP-MED status:  
LLDP-MED Status:  
Enable: Enable the port's LLDP-MED status, and the port's Admin  
Status will be changed to Tx&Rx.  
Disable: Disable the port's LLDP-MED status.  
Included TLVs:  
Detail:  
Select TLVs to be included in outgoing LLDPDU.  
Click the Detail button to display the included TLVs and select the  
desired TLVs.  
246  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Included TLVs  
Select TLVs to be included in outgoing LLDPDU.  
Location Identification Parameters  
Configure the Location Identification TLV's content in outgoing LLDPDU of the port.  
Emergency  
Number:  
Emergency number is Emergency Call Service ELIN identifier,  
which is used during emergency call setup to a traditional CAMA  
or ISDN trunk-based PSAP.  
Civic Address:  
The Civic address is defined to reuse the relevant sub-fields of the  
DHCP option for Civic Address based Location Configuration  
Information as specified by IETF.  
15.4.3 Local Info  
On this page you can see all ports' LLDP-MED configuration.  
247  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Choose the menu LLDP→LLDP-MED→Local Info to load the following page.  
Figure 15-8 LLDP-MED Local Information  
The following entries are displayed on this screen:  
Auto Refresh  
Auto Refresh:  
Refresh Rate:  
Local Info  
Enable/Disable the auto refresh function.  
Specify the auto refresh rate.  
Enter the desired port number and click Select to display the information of the corresponding  
port.  
15.4.4 Neighbor Info  
On this page you can get the LLDP-MED information of the neighbors.  
248  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Choose the menu LLDP→LLDP-MED→Neighbor Info to load the following page.  
Figure 15-9 LLDP-MED Neighbor Information  
The following entries are displayed on this screen:  
Auto Refresh  
Auto Refresh:  
Refresh Rate:  
Neighbor Info  
Enable/Disable the auto refresh function.  
Specify the auto refresh rate.  
Port Select:  
Click the Select button to quick-select the corresponding port  
based on the port number you entered.  
Local Port:  
Displays the local port number connecting to the neighbor device.  
Displays the device type of the neighbor.  
Device Type:  
Application Type:  
Displays the application type of the neighbor. Application Type  
indicates the primary function of the applications defined for the  
network policy.  
Local Data Format:  
Power Type:  
Displays the location identification of the neighbor.  
Displays the power type of the neighbor device, Power Sourcing  
Entity (PSE) or Powered Device (PD).  
Information:  
Click the Information button to display the detailed information of  
the corresponding neighbor.  
Return to CONTENTS  
249  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 16 Maintenance  
Maintenance module, assembling the commonly used system tools to manage the switch,  
provides the convenient method to locate and solve the network problem.  
（1） System Monitor: Monitor the utilization status of the memory and the CPU of switch.  
（2） Log: View the configuration parameters of the switch and find out the errors via the Logs.  
（3） Device Diagnostics: Cable Test tests the connection status of the cable to locate and  
diagnoses the trouble spot of the network.  
（4） Network Diagnostics: Test whether the destination device is reachable and detect the  
route hops from the switch to the destination device.  
16.1 System Monitor  
System Monitor functions to display the utilization status of the memory and the CPU of switch via  
the data graph. The CPU utilization rate and the memory utilization rate should fluctuate stably  
around a specific value. If the CPU utilization rate or the memory utilization rate increases  
markedly, please detect whether the network is being attacked.  
The System Monitor function is implemented on the CPU Monitor and Memory Monitor pages.  
16.1.1 CPU Monitor  
Choose the menu Maintenance→System Monitor→CPU Monitor to load the following page.  
Figure 16-1 CPU Monitor  
250  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Click the Monitor button to enable the switch to monitor and display its CPU utilization rate every  
four seconds.  
16.1.2 Memory Monitor  
Choose the menu Maintenance→System Monitor→Memory Monitor to load the following page.  
Figure 16-2 Memory Monitor  
Click the Monitor button to enable the switch to monitor and display its Memory utilization rate  
every four seconds.  
16.2 Log  
The Log system of switch can record, classify and manage the system information effectively,  
providing powerful support for network administrator to monitor network operation and diagnose  
malfunction.  
The Logs of switch are classified into the following eight levels.  
Severity  
Level Description  
The system is unusable.  
emergencies  
0
1
2
3
4
Action must be taken immediately.  
Critical conditions  
alerts  
critical  
errors  
Error conditions  
Warnings conditions  
warnings  
251  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Normal but significant conditions  
Informational messages  
Debug-level messages  
notifications  
informational  
debugging  
5
6
7
Table 16-1 Log Level  
The Log function is implemented on the Log Table, Local Log, Remote Log and Backup Log  
pages.  
16.2.1 Log Table  
The switch supports logs output to two directions, namely, log buffer and log file. The information  
in log buffer will be lost after the switch is rebooted or powered off whereas the information in log  
file will be kept effective even the switch is rebooted or powered off. Log Table displays the system  
log information in log buffer.  
Choose the menu Maintenance→Log→Log Table to load the following page.  
Figure 16-3 Log Table  
The following entries are displayed on this screen:  
Log Info  
Index:  
Time:  
Displays the index of the log information.  
Displays the time when the log event occurs. The log can get the  
correct time after you configure on the System ->System  
Info->System Time Web management page.  
Module:  
Severity:  
Content:  
Displays the module which the log information belongs to. You can  
select a module from the drop-down list to display the corresponding  
log information.  
Displays the severity level of the log information. You can select a  
severity level to display the log information whose severity level value  
is the same or smaller.  
Displays the content of the log information.  
252  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Note:  
1. The logs are classified into eight levels based on severity. The higher the information severity  
is, the lower the corresponding level is.  
2. This page displays logs in the log buffer, and at most 512 logs are displayed.  
253  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
16.2.2 Local Log  
Local Log is the log information saved in switch. By default, all system logs from level_0 to level_6  
are saved in log buffer. On this page, you can set the output channel for logs.  
Choose the menu Maintenance→Log→Local Log to load the following page.  
Figure 16-4 Local Log  
The following entries are displayed on this screen:  
Local Log Config  
Select:  
Select the desired entry to configure the corresponding local log.  
Log Buffer:  
Indicates the RAM for saving system log. The inforamtion in the  
log buffer is displayed on the Log Table page. It will be lost when  
the switch is restarted.  
Log File:  
Severity:  
Status:  
Indicates the flash sector for saving system log. The inforamtion  
in the log file will not be lost after the switch is restarted and can  
be exported on the Backup Log page.  
Specify the severity level of the log information output to each  
channel. Only the log with the same or smaller severity level  
value will be output.  
Enable/Disable the channel.  
16.2.3 Remote Log  
Remote log feature enables the switch to send system logs to the Log Server. Log Server is to  
centralize the system logs from various devices for the administrator to monitor and manage the  
whole network.  
254  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Choose the menu Maintenance→Log→Remote Log to load the following page.  
Figure 16-5 Log Host  
The following entries are displayed on this screen:  
Log Host  
Index:  
Displays the index of the log host. The switch supports 4 log  
hosts.  
Host IP:  
Configure the IP for the log host.  
UDP Port:  
Displays the UDP port used for receiving/sending log  
information. Here we use the standard port 514.  
Severity:  
Specify the severity level of the log information sent to each log  
host. Only the log with the same or smaller severity level value  
will be sent to the corresponding log host.  
Status:  
Note:  
Enable/Disable the log host.  
The Log Server software is not provided. If necessary, please download it on the Internet.  
16.2.4 Backup Log  
Backup Log feature enables the system logs saved in the switch to be output as a file for device  
diagnosis and statistics analysis. When a critical error results in the breakdown of the system, you  
can export the logs to get some related important information about the error for device diagnosis  
after the switch is restarted.  
Choose the menu Maintenance→Log→Backup Log to load the following page.  
Figure 16-6 Backup Log  
255  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
The following entry is displayed on this screen:  
Backup Log  
Backup Log:  
Click the Backup Log button to save the log as a file to your computer.  
Note:  
It will take a few minutes to backup the log file. Please wait without any operation.  
16.3 Device Diagnostics  
This switch provides Cable Test function for device diagnostics.  
16.3.1 Cable Test  
Cable Test functions to test the connection status of the cable connected to the switch, which  
facilitates you to locate and diagnose the trouble spot of the network.  
Choose the menu Maintenance→Device Diagnostics→Cable Test to load the following page.  
Figure 16-7 Cable Test  
The following entries are displayed on this screen:  
Cable Test  
Port:  
Select the port for cable testing.  
Displays the Pair number.  
Pair:  
Status:  
Displays the connection status of the cable connected to the port. The  
test results of the cable include normal, close, open, short, impedance  
or unknown.  
Length:  
Error:  
If the connection status is normal, here displays the length range of  
the cable.  
If the connection status is close, open or impedance, here displays the  
error length of the cable.  
256  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Note:  
1. The Length displayed here is the length of pair cable not that of the physical cable.  
2. The test result is just for your reference.  
16.4 Network Diagnostics  
This switch provides Ping test and Tracert test functions for network diagnostics.  
16.4.1 Ping  
Ping test function, testing the connectivity between the switch and one node of the network,  
facilitates you to test the network connectivity and reachability of the host so as to locate the  
network malfunctions.  
Choose the menu Maintenance → Network Diagnostics → Ping to load the following page.  
Figure 16-9 Ping  
The following entries are displayed on this screen:  
Ping Config  
Destination IP:  
Enter the IP address of the destination node for Ping test. Both IPv4  
and IPv6 are supported.  
Ping Times:  
Data Size:  
Enter the amount of times to send test data during Ping testing. The  
default value is recommended.  
Enter the size of the sending data during Ping testing. The default  
value is recommended.  
257  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Interval:  
Specify the interval to send ICMP request packets. The default value  
is recommended.  
16.4.2 Tracert  
Tracert test function is used to test the connectivity of the gateways during its journey from the  
source to destination of the test data. When malfunctions occur to the network, you can locate  
trouble spot of the network with this tracert test.  
Choose the menu Maintenance → Network Diagnostics → Tracert to load the following page.  
Figure 16-10 Tracert  
The following entries are displayed on this screen:  
Tracert Config  
Destination IP:  
Enter the IP address of the destination device. Both IPv4 and IPv6 are  
supported.  
Max Hop:  
Specify the maximum number of the route hops the test data can pass  
through.  
Return to CONTENTS  
258  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Appendix A: Specifications  
IEEE802.3 10Base-T Ethernet  
IEEE802.3u 100Base-TX/100Base-FX Fast Ethernet  
IEEE802.3ab 1000Base-T Gigabit Ethernet  
IEEE802.3z 1000Base-X Gigabit Ethernet  
IEEE802.3x Flow Control  
Standards  
IEEE802.1p QoS  
IEEE802.1q VLAN  
IEEE802.1X Port-based Access Authentication  
IEEE 802.3 af/at (for TL-SG3424P)  
Ethernet: 10Mbps HD，20Mbps FD  
Fast Ethernet: 100Mbps HD，200Mbps FD  
Gigabit Ethernet: 2000Mbps FD  
Transmission Rate  
10Base-T: UTP/STP of Cat. 3 or above  
100Base-TX: UTP/STP of Cat. 5 or above  
100Base-FX: MMF or SMF SFP Module (Optional)  
Transmission Medium  
1000Base-T: 4-pair UTP (≤100m) of Cat. 5, Cat. 5e, Cat.6  
or above  
1000Base-X: MMF or SMF SFP Module (Optional)  
For TL-SG3210:  
PWR, SYS, 10/100/1000M, 1000M  
For TL-SG3216/TL-SG3424:  
Power System,1000Mbps, Link/Act  
For TL-SG3424P:  
LED  
Speed, Power, System, PoE, PoE Max, Port Status  
Transmission Method  
Store and Forward  
10BASE-T：14881pps/port  
100BASE-TX：148810pps/port  
1000Base-T：1488095pps/port  
Packets Forwarding Rate  
259  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Operating Temperature: 0℃ ~ 40℃  
Storage Temperature: -40℃ ~ 70℃  
Operating  
Environment  
Operating Humidity: 10% ~ 90% RH Non-condensing  
Storage Humidity: 5% ~ 90% RH Non-condensing  
Return to CONTENTS  
260  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix B: Configuring the PCs  
In this section, we’ll introduce how to install and configure the TCP/IP correctly in Windows 2000  
and TCP/IPv6 in WIN7. First make sure your Ethernet Adapter is working, refer to the adapter’s  
manual if necessary.  
1. In IPv4 network：  
1) On the Windows taskbar, click the Start button, and then click Control Panel.  
2) Click the Network and Internet Connections icon, and then click on the Network  
Connections tab in the appearing window.  
3) Right click the icon that showed below, select Properties on the prompt page.  
Figure B-1  
261  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
4) In the prompt page that showed below, double click on the Internet Protocol (TCP/IP).  
Figure B-2  
5) The following TCP/IP Properties window will display and the IP Address tab is open on  
this window by default.  
Figure B-3  
262  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6) Select Use the following IP address. And the following items will be available. If the  
switch's IP address is 192.168.0.1, specify IP address as 192.168.0.x (x is from 2 to 254),  
and the Subnet mask as 255.255.255.0.  
2. In IPv6 network：  
1) On the Windows taskbar, click the Start button, and then click Control Panel.  
2) Click the View network status and tasks under the tab Network and Internet.  
3) Select Local Network Connection under the tab View your active networks on the  
prompt page.  
4) In the prompt page that showed below, double click on the Internet Protocol Version 6  
(TCP/IPv6).  
263  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
5) The following TCP/IPv6 Properties window will display and the IP Address tab is open  
on this window by default.  
264  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6) Select Use the following IPv6 address. And the following items will be available. If the  
switch's IP address is 3001::1/64, specify IP address as 3001::14 for example , and the  
Subnet prefix length as 64.  
Now:  
Click OK to save your settings.  
Return to CONTENTS  
265  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix C: Load Software Using FTP  
If there is something wrong with the firmware of the switch and the switch cannot be launched, you  
can load firmware to the switch via FTP function. FTP (File Transfer Protocol), a protocol in the  
application layer, is mainly used to transfer files between the remote server and the local PCs. It is  
a common protocol used in the IP network for files transfer.  
1. Hardware Installation  
Figure C-1  
1）Connect FTP server to port 1 of the switch.  
2）Connect the Console port of the PC to the switch.  
3）Save the firmware of the switch in the shared file of FTP server. Please write down the  
user name, password and the firmware name.  
2. Configure the Hyper Terminal  
After the hardware installation, please take the following steps to configure the hyper terminal of  
the management PC to manage the switch.  
1）Select Start→All Programs→Accessories→Communications→Hyper Terminal to  
open hyper terminal.  
266  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Figure C-2 Open Hyper Terminal  
2）The Connection Description Window will prompt shown as Figure C-3. Enter a name into  
the Name field and click OK.  
Figure C-3 Connection Description  
3）Select the port to connect in the following figure and then click OK.  
267  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Figure C-4 Select the port to connect  
4）Configure the port selected in the step above shown as the following figure. Configure  
Bits per second as 38400, Data bits as 8, Parity as None, Stop bits as 1, Flow control  
as None, and then click OK.  
Figure C-5 Port Settings  
3. Download Firmware via bootUtil menu  
To download firmware to the switch via FTP function, you need to enter into the bootUtil menu of  
the switch and take the following steps.  
1）Connect the console port of the PC to the console port of the switch and open hyper  
terminal. Connect FTP server to port 1 of the switch.  
2）Power off and restart the switch. When you are prompted that “Press CTRL-B to enter the  
bootUtil” in the hyper terminal, please press CTRL-B key to enter into bootUtil menu  
shown as the figure below.  
268  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Figure C-6 bootUtil Menu  
As the prompt is displayed for a short time, you are suggested not to release the CTRL-B key  
until you enter into bootUtil menu after powering on the switch.  
3）After entering into bootUtil menu, please firstly configure the IP parameters of the switch.  
The format is:  
ifconfig ip xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx mask 255.255.255.0 gateway xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx.  
For example: Configure the IP address as 10.10.70.22, mask as 255.255.255.0 and  
gateway as10.10.70.1. The detailed command is shown as the figure below. Enter the  
command and press Enter.  
[TP-LINK] : ifconfig ip 10.10.70.22 mask 255.255.255.0 gateway 10.10.70.1  
4）Configure the parameters of the FTP server which keeps the upgrade firmware. Later you  
can download the firmware to the switch from the FTP server. The format of the command  
is: ftp host xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx user xxxxx pwd xxxxx file xxxxxx.bin.  
Take the following parameters of the FTP server as an example. The IP address of the  
FTP server is 10.10.70.146; the user name and password for login to the FTP server are  
both 123; the name of the upgrade firmware is TL-SG3424_up.bin. The detailed  
command is shown as the following figure. Enter the command and press Enter.  
[TP-LINK] : ftp host 10.10.70.146 user 123 pwd 123 file TL-SG3424_up.bin  
5）Enter the upgrade command and press Enter to upgrade the firmware. After a while, the  
prompt “You can only use the port 1 to upgrade” will display in the hyper terminal shown  
as the following figure.  
[TP-LINK] : upgrade  
You can only use the port 1 to upgrade.  
6）When the prompt “Are you sure to upgrade the firmware[Y/N]:” displays, please enter Y to  
start upgrade or enter N to quit upgrade shown as the following figure. The # icon  
indicates it is upgrading. After upgrading, the [TP-LINK] command will display.  
Are you sure to upgrade the firmware[Y/N] : y  
# # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # #  
# # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # # #  
[TP-LINK] :  
269  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7）Please power off and restart the switch shown as the following figure. Now you are in the  
User EXEC mode and can manage the switch via CLI command.  
[TP-LINK] :  
Press CTRL-B to enter the bootUtil  
Starting . . .  
TL-SG3424>  
Return to CONTENTS  
270  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix D: 802.1X Client Software  
In 802.1X mechanism, the supplicant Client should be equipped with the corresponding client  
software complied with 802.1X protocol standard for 802.1X authentication. When the switch  
works as the authenticator system, please take the following instructions to install the  
TpSupplicant provided on the attached CD for the supplicant Client.  
1. Installation Guide  
1) Insert the provided CD into your CD-ROM drive. Open the file folder and double click the icon  
to load the following figure. Choose the proper language and click Next to  
continue.  
Figure D-1 Choose Setup Language  
2) Please wait for the InstallShield Wizard preparing the setup shown as the following screen.  
Figure D-2 Preparing Setup  
3) Then the following screen will appear. Click Next to continue. If you want to stop the  
installation, click Cancel.  
271  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Figure D-3 Welcome to the InstallShield Wizard  
4) To continue, choose the destination location for the installation files and click Next on the  
following screen.  
Figure D-4 Choose Destination Location  
By default, the installation files are saved on the Program Files folder of system disk. Click the  
Change button to modify the destination location proper to your need.  
5) Till now, The Wizard is ready to begin the installation. Click Install to start the installation on  
the following screen.  
272  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Figure D-5 Install the Program  
6) The InstallShield Wizard is installing TpSupplicant shown as the following screen. Please  
wait.  
Figure D-6 Setup Status  
7) On the following screen, click Finish to complete the installation.  
273  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Figure D-7 InstallShield Wizard Complete  
Note: Please pay attention to the tips on the above screen. If you have not installed WinPcap 4.0.2  
or the higher version on your computer, the 802.1X Client Software TpSupplicant cannot work. It’s  
recommended to go to http://www.winpcap.org to download the latest version of WinPcap for  
installation.  
2.  
Uninstall Software  
If you want to remove the TpSupplicant, please take the following steps:  
1) On the Windows taskbar, click the Start button, point to All ProgramsTP-LINK  
TpSupplicant, and then click Uninstall TP-LINK 802.1X, shown as the following figure.  
Figure D-8 Uninstall TP-LINK 802.1X  
274  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2) Then the following screen will appear. If you want to stop the remove process, click Cancel.  
Figure D-9 Preparing Setup  
3) On the continued screen, click Yes to remove the application from your PC.  
Figure D-10 Uninstall the Application  
4) Click Finish to complete.  
Figure D-11 Uninstall Complete  
3.  
Configuration  
1) After completing installation, double click the icon  
Software. The following screen will appear.  
to run the TP-LINK 802.1X Client  
275  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Figure D-12 TP-LINK 802.1X Client  
Enter the Name and the Password specified in the Authentication Server. The length of Name  
and Password should be less than 16 characters.  
2) Click the Properties button on Figure D-12 to load the following screen for configuring the  
connection properties.  
Figure D-13 Connection Properties  
Send 802.1X protocol packets by Unicast: When this option is selected, the Client will send the  
EAPOL Start packets to the switch via multicast and send the 802.1X authentication packets via  
unicast.  
Obtain an IP address automatically: Select this option if the Client automatically obtains the IP  
address from DHCP server. After passing the authentication, the Client can be assigned the IP  
address by DHCP server. The Client can access the network after getting the new IP address.  
Auto reconnect after timeout: Select this option to allow the Client to automatically start the  
connection again when it does not receive the handshake reply packets from the switch within a  
period.  
276  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3) To continue, click Connect button after entering the Name and Password on Figure D-12.  
Then the following screen will appear to prompt that the Radius server is being searched.  
Figure D-14 Authentication Dialog  
4) When passing the authentication, the following screen will appear.  
Figure D-15 Successfully Authenticated  
5) Double click the icon  
status screen will pop up.  
on the right corner of desktop, and then the following connection  
Figure D-16 Connection Status  
4. FAQ:  
Q1: Why does this error dialog box pop up when starting up the TP-LINK 802.1X Client Software?  
277  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
A1: It’s because the supported DLL file is missing. You are suggested to go to  
http://www.winpcap.org to download WinPcap 4.0.2 or the higher version for installation, and  
run the client software again.  
Q2: Is this TP-LINK 802.1X Client Software compliable with the switches of the other  
manufacturers?  
A2: No. This TP-LINK 802.1X Client Software is customized for TP-LINK switches.  
Q3: Is it safe to set the password being automatically saved？  
A3: Yes. The password saved in the configuration files is encrypted.  
Return to CONTENTS  
278  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix E: Glossary  
Access Control List (ACL)  
ACLs can limit network traffic and restrict access to certain users or devices by checking each  
packet for certain IP or MAC (i.e., Layer 2) information.  
Boot Protocol (BOOTP)  
BOOTP is used to provide bootup information for network devices, including IP address  
information, the address of the TFTP server that contains the devices system files, and the name  
of the boot file.  
Class of Service (CoS)  
CoS is supported by prioritizing packets based on the required level of service, and then placing  
them in the appropriate output queue. Data is transmitted from the queues using weighted  
round-robin service to enforce priority service and prevent blockage of lower-level queues. Priority  
may be set according to the port default, the packet’s priority bit (in the VLAN tag), TCP/UDP port  
number, or DSCP priority bit.  
Differentiated Services Code Point (DSCP)  
DSCP uses a six-bit tag to provide for up to 64 different forwarding behaviors. Based on network  
policies, different kinds of traffic can be marked for different kinds of forwarding. The DSCP bits  
are mapped to the Class of Service categories, and then into the output queues.  
Domain Name Service (DNS)  
A system used for translating host names for network nodes into IP addresses.  
Dynamic Host Control Protocol (DHCP)  
Provides a framework for passing configuration information to hosts on a TCP/IP network. DHCP  
is based on the Bootstrap Protocol (BOOTP), adding the capability of automatic allocation of  
reusable network addresses and additional configuration options.  
Extensible Authentication Protocol over LAN (EAPOL)  
EAPOL is a client authentication protocol used by this switch to verify the network access rights for  
any device that is plugged into the switch. A user name and password is requested by the switch,  
and then passed to an authentication server (e.g., RADIUS) for verification. EAPOL is  
implemented as part of the IEEE 802.1X Port Authentication standard.  
GARP VLAN Registration Protocol (GVRP)  
Defines a way for switches to exchange VLAN information in order to register necessary VLAN  
members on ports along the Spanning Tree so that VLANs defined in each switch can work  
automatically over a Spanning Tree network.  
Generic Attribute Registration Protocol (GARP)  
The GARP provides a generic attribute dissemination capability that is used by participants in  
GARP Applications (GARP Participants) to register and de-register attribute values with other  
GARP Participants within a Bridged LAN. The definition of the attribute types, the values that they  
can carry, and the semantics that are associated with those values when registered, are specific to  
the operation of the GARP Application concerned.  
279  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Generic Multicast Registration Protocol (GMRP)  
GMRP allows network devices to register end stations with multicast groups. GMRP requires that  
any participating network devices or end stations comply with the IEEE 802.1p standard.  
Group Attribute Registration Protocol (GARP)  
See Generic Attribute Registration Protocol.  
IEEE 802.1D  
Specifies a general method for the operation of MAC bridges, including the Spanning Tree  
Protocol.  
IEEE 802.1Q  
VLAN Tagging—Defines Ethernet frame tags which carry VLAN information. It allows switches to  
assign endstations to different virtual LANs, and defines a standard way for VLANs to  
communicate across switched networks.  
IEEE 802.1p  
An IEEE standard for providing quality of service (QoS) in Ethernet networks. The standard uses  
packet tags that define up to eight traffic classes and allows switches to transmit packets based on  
the tagged priority value.  
IEEE 802.1X  
Port Authentication controls access to the switch ports by requiring users to first enter a user ID  
and password for authentication.  
IEEE 802.3ac  
Defines frame extensions for VLAN tagging.  
IEEE 802.3x  
Defines Ethernet frame start/stop requests and timers used for flow control on full-duplex links.  
(Now incorporated in IEEE 802.3-2002)  
Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP)  
A protocol through which hosts can register with their local router for multicast services. If there is  
more than one multicast switch/router on a given subnetwork, one of the devices is made the  
“querier” and assumes responsibility for keeping track of group membership.  
IGMP Snooping  
Listening to IGMP Query and IGMP Report packets transferred between IP Multicast routers and  
IP Multicast host groups to identify IP Multicast group members.  
IGMP Query  
On each subnetwork, one IGMP-capable device will act as the querier — that is, the device that  
asks all hosts to report on the IP multicast groups they wish to join or to which they already belong.  
The elected querier will be the device with the lowest IP address in the subnetwork.  
IP Multicast Filtering  
It is a feature to allow or deny the Client to add the specified multicast group.  
Multicast Switching  
A process whereby the switch filters incoming multicast frames for services which no attached  
host has registered, or forwards them to all ports contained within the designated multicast group.  
280  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Layer 2  
Data Link layer in the ISO 7-Layer Data Communications Protocol. This is related directly to the  
hardware interface for network devices and passes on traffic based on MAC addresses.  
Link Aggregation  
See Port Trunk.  
Link Aggregation Control Protocol (LACP)  
Allows ports to automatically negotiate a trunked link with LACP-configured ports on another  
device.  
Management Information Base (MIB)  
An acronym for Management Information Base. It is a set of database objects that contains  
information about a specific device.  
MD5 Message-Digest Algorithm  
An algorithm that is used to create digital signatures. It is intended for use with 32 bit machines  
and is safer than the MD4 algorithm, which has been broken. MD5 is a one-way hash function,  
meaning that it takes a message and converts it into a fixed string of digits, also called a message  
digest.  
Network Time Protocol (NTP)  
NTP provides the mechanisms to synchronize time across the network. The time servers operate  
in a hierarchical-master-slave configuration in order to synchronize local clocks within the subnet  
and to national time standards via wire or radio.  
Port Authentication  
See IEEE 802.1X.  
Port Mirroring  
A method whereby data on a target port is mirrored to a monitor port for troubleshooting with a  
logic analyzer or RMON probe. This allows data on the target port to be studied unobstructively.  
Port Trunk  
Defines a network link aggregation and trunking method which specifies how to create a single  
high-speed logical link that combines several lower-speed physical links.  
Remote Authentication Dial-in User Service (RADIUS)  
RADIUS is a logon authentication protocol that uses software running on a central server to  
control access to RADIUS-compliant devices on the network.  
Remote Monitoring (RMON)  
RMON provides comprehensive network monitoring capabilities. It eliminates the polling required  
in standard SNMP, and can set alarms on a variety of traffic conditions, including specific error  
types.  
Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol (RSTP)  
RSTP reduces the convergence time for network topology changes to about 10% of that required  
by the older IEEE 802.1D STP standard.  
281  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Secure Shell (SSH)  
A secure replacement for remote access functions, including Telnet. SSH can authenticate users  
with a cryptographic key, and encrypt data connections between management clients and the  
switch.  
Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP)  
The application protocol in the Internet suite of protocols which offers network management  
services.  
Simple Network Time Protocol (SNTP)  
SNTP allows a device to set its internal clock based on periodic updates from a Network Time  
Protocol (NTP) server. Updates can be requested from a specific NTP server, or can be received  
via broadcasts sent by NTP servers.  
Spanning Tree Algorithm (STA)  
A technology that checks your network for any loops. A loop can often occur in complicated or  
backup linked network systems. Spanning Tree detects and directs data along the shortest  
available path, maximizing the performance and efficiency of the network.  
Telnet  
Defines a remote communication facility for interfacing to a terminal device over TCP/IP.  
Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol (TCP/IP)  
Protocol suite that includes TCP as the primary transport protocol, and IP as the network layer  
protocol.  
Trivial File Transfer Protocol (TFTP)  
A TCP/IP protocol commonly used for software downloads.  
User Datagram Protocol (UDP)  
UDP provides a datagram mode for packet-switched communications. It uses IP as the underlying  
transport mechanism to provide access to IP-like services. UDP packets are delivered just like IP  
packets – connection-less datagrams that may be discarded before reaching their targets. UDP is  
useful when TCP would be too complex, too slow, or just unnecessary.  
Virtual LAN (VLAN)  
A Virtual LAN is a collection of network nodes that share the same collision domain regardless of  
their physical location or connection point in the network. A VLAN serves as a logical workgroup  
with no physical barriers, and allows users to share information and resources as though located  
on the same LAN.  
Return to CONTENTS  
282  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  

Tonka Video Game Console MONSTER TRUCKS Manual User Manual
Toshiba DVD Recorder RD XS54SU User Manual
TRENDnet Switch TK803R User Manual
Vermont Casting Outdoor Fireplace RAD VTBB User Manual
ViewSonic Flat Panel Television VS13915 1M User Manual
Vision Fitness Home Gym ST740 User Manual
Vivitek Projector D326 User Manual
Vizio Universal Remote P283V1 User Manual
Vizualogic Car Video System A 1285 6 User Manual
Vornado Computer Accessories D9478A User Manual